st tno ae 
restatetss 
ἐξοευξο Nate Ne Nan A et 
SUGGES ot ae eet 
= τ - 
+ ΓΝ 
: peng Gren sind ως 
errr see areas 
a CEST ea 
ate tots ν ΟΣ ΣΤΡ 
tiple etal’, τ“ i 
toe oe ae 


a 
ise 


sorts 


t 
ud 


ΙΝ πο 
CHRP oa τ τε τας τος SECs 
pees SAU SESS ἘΝ 
ΟΣ PEM Set EOL δ, τος tes τ 
ν ἐξ OSS rr τοῖν php tee Us ar 
Come ee CE 
he. nates a 
et ger Se Sige 


oa 
eB FR 8 Σ, 


Ursa seer eet 
Soebelae BPE tis iin Purecrtia wale rarernernenetaaerteaes 


Spar enebetl Ser, Sraratatst: bots a ὡς bp ba a 
ST Ste . Saad pn are bode notes 
Lae “διότ στόμ τον or ene sr uner Aricy ree of 
. Ae 
FF wees 


= ; 
ἘΣ ΣῈ Σ ἢ ΕΣ 
inetessuteey 
ἘΣ or hatheate tye he Seo 
Gt. Bashy διλ τὸς 
ΟΡ ΟΣ ΡΝ ΤΣ enor ht wah 
pre are ee 7 coc εν τ ταν 
ΣΡ ΝΣ 


Soap 
nip ον 
iret πασῶν ον haigrenc 

pepe nee oe St re eae 


ΩΝ = 
rs 
2 bop oS 
ΡΣ ΩΝ Minty mdb many 
pear neioe Rooted eed ttt 


Foe 7 
᾿ - artes ate wy 
ξύν μρ δος race τὴ reat tree 
a eae recat ΤΗΣ 
Prat Pista sehorsteteiniee tk rare eat eee a Sty τ 


το πρὴς 
Nee roe pes 
ele wet, 


Oa aw ee pe 
wane acen et 


ΩΣ ; 
rade? feed! Fah ὄνοι ne eee 
Rie oa tra rie roe seine ieee erties 
Se Saat Onsen See σον φυσι σι μαι ee BaE Ar Lem PRPS Pod ᾿ peat τ ἐξ ας λ τις ats 
for Set Pe SPs wen ον ese “ τσ ἀν ΝΣ τε st ας φς- 

laserant eae 


‘ 
patie 
NSE Figtrtae 
τ το ΣΟΥ ΣΥΣ 
= aes 
aes 
and 
τὰς 
z ah 
mere rogers 


ΤΟΣ ἐσθ 
Fad eS 
ine haar rash et seat 
er 
eae ΤΟ τὶ 
prea 


δ νεὸς 
Freer 

OR i 
ra ears 
Sart eben pe tes 


seers) 


ΠΡ 
mr pent ers 

ees ae we 

ΥΣ δε το se ere 

ἜΤ ΌΣΝν ee atest. 


peer 
te 
eRe ee arto 
παρ το aiden Nother etaewe 
SREP re pe Thee ie Set eH Ar eke Ler ns 
ste ΟΣ ΣΟ ΝΣ, 
ν᾿ ἐς ae) 
“ὩΣ 
ΤΑΙ, 


τ 
ea peed) 
beet oe tors 


" Tate 
Latches 
: ~ τ Seed: 
πεκαλο τ asd srt 5 eet Toes STS 
pipet trees! toe epee . : Seah: 
nore Ὁ ΣΡ τ Ὁ] FS pine sy 3t 
f. ident Serial a) 


tm Pee 


Serene 
ihe Ἵ ns iicidertnoatbeent stated 
eee SIT serie td 
tm ean 9- tec Perth bah 8 ee Η rs 


aoe omg Wend δο " 


eas 
τὴν wu ΤΣ ἐς βς estas a5 
SS ates 9 δ᾽ . Poser aes “ 

: pitt 


oe) τοῖς heme op 


FSIS i hehe ae Birt ee Be 


4k 
: wee sa airs 
Pag whee 


te 
a3 Baas 
hp Hoe erate te ‘fF peeiein 


τας πετν 


Ged. asyetee 
Σ San terd arated 
2 ; ΣΤΡ ΜΕΤ ΣΤ 

erent bate Tae 


Pee 
ἌΣΣ τς 
γὶ berks 

ὑφέξιασοσα ν ν- Pb eepmipeie τον ρ δι φ- 


ee, 
cores 


Serantenstnnrs 

Dut eee ALN ee 
ὅ.ὁ- « 

aries 


ier. 


eee 
ee ee 
να 


ΜΝ 


ας ΤΑΣ 
= ih 


ers. hed & 
Brsrirarie 


Ὰ Ἴ" 
soaps ; Te eae 
2a! , τὺ 


ΘΟ a 
Be hea bean 


a μος at 
τ: Oy eb 
Somat 


ree ted dds ap- finan b lage esd το hee 


> <UStimr pete Orie Ces 
PS FM PRT ICD Tle 


“heh oe barge wo km 

Cot oe ace mares? 
ey a ae aly eran 
bee ed Sele er rey 
oar “ ‘= 


Mie 


het rice ae eer 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2019 with funding from © 
Princeton Theological Seminary Library 


https://archive.org/details/newtestamentgree0Omach_0 | 


ae 


ι ἜΤ ΓΟ ΑΓ ΤΥ ΤΡ Ἢ ὙΠ eet Sa 
Δ πο ᾽ Pi ὦ τ Wee ; 1% “ 
fri tr ΚΛ δὲν" ᾿ 
> ieee πων ak 
iw ἐν 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
FOR BEGINNERS 


THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 


NEW YORK - BOSTON - CHICAGO - DALLAS 
ATLANTA + SAN FRANCISCO 


MACMILLAN & CO., LimiTEpD 


LONDON - BOMBAY + CALCUTTA 
MELBOURNE 


THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltp. 
TORONTO 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
FOR BEGINNERS 


BY 


J. GRESHAM MACHEN, D.D. 


Assistant Professor of New Testament 
Literature and Exegesis 
an 
Princeton Theological Seminary 


ew Pork 
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
1924 


All rights reserved 


‘ ‘ , 
Wy 


PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 


CopyrrigHut, 1923, 
By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY. 


Set up and electrotyped. Published March, 1923. Reprinted 
January, 1924. 


TO MY MOTHER 


PREFACE 


This textbook is intended primarily for students who 
are beginning the study of the Greek Testament either with- 
out any previous acquaintance with the Greek language or 
with an acquaintance so imperfect that a renewed course of 
elementary instruction is needed. Owing to the exigencies 
of the present educational situation, many who desire to 
use the Greek Testament are unable to approach the subject 
through a study of classical Attic prose. The situation is 
undoubtedly to be regretted, but its existence should not 
be ignored. Itis unfortunate that so many students of the 
New Testament have no acquaintance with classical Greek, 
but it would be still more unfortunate if such students, on 
account of their lack of acquaintance with classical Greek, 
should be discouraged from making themselves acquainted 
at least with the easier language of the New Testament. 

The New Testament usage will here be presented with- 
out any reference to Attic prose. But a previous ac- 
quaintance with Attic prose, even though it be only a 
smattering, will prove to be an immense assistance in the 
mastery of the course. By students who possess such ac- 
quaintance the lessons can be covered much more rapidly 
than by mere beginners. 

The book is an instruction book, and not a descriptive 
grammar. Since it is an instruction book, everything in it 
is made subservient to the imparting of a reading acquaint- 
ance with the language. In a descriptive grammar, for 
example, the rules may be formulated with a lapidary 
succinctness which would here be out of place. The effort 
is made here to enter upon those explanations which the 
fifteen years’ experience of the author in teaching New 
Testament Greek has shown to be essential. In a descrip- 


Vil 


Vill PREFACE 


tive grammar, moreover, the illustrations would have to be 
limited to what can actually be found in the New Testa- 
ment, but in the present book they are reduced so far as 
possible to an ideally simple form, which does not always 
appear in the New Testament books. In this way the 
vocabulary at every point can be confined to what the 
student has actually studied, and confusing footnotes can 
be avoided. It is highly important that only one gram- 
matical point should be considered at a time. An introduc- 
tion of illustrations taken from the New Testament would 
often so overlay the explanation with new words and 
with subsidiary usages unfamiliar to the student that the 
specific grammatical point under discussion would be alto- 
gether obscured. Of course, however, the effort has been 
made not to introduce into the illustrations any usages ex- 
cept those which are common in the New Testament idiom. 


The character of the book as an instruction book has also 
determined the choice and order of the material. The 
treatment has been limited to a few essential points, and no 
attempt has been made to exhibit the real richness and 
flexibility of the New Testament language, which can be 
discovered only through reading. This limitation may in 
places give rise to criticism, as for example in connection 
with the treatment of participles. The author is well aware 
of the fundamentally non-temporal character of the tenses 
in the participle, and also of the great variety in the shades 
of thought which the participle can express. But after all 
it is highly important for the beginner to understand clearly 
the distinction between the present and the aorist participle, 
and that distinction can be made clear at the beginning 
only through the proper use of our temporal mode of 
thought. Only when what is simple and usual has been 
firmly impressed upon the student’s mind by patient repeti- 
tion can the finer and more difficult points be safely touched. 


PREFACE ix 


The treatment of the participle, moreover, has been thrust 
as far forward as possible in the book, in order that ample 
time may be allowed for practising the usages which it 
involves. Experience shows that in learning to read New 
Testament Greek, the participle is almost the crux of the 
whole matter. 


Special attention has been given to the exercises. Until 
the very last few lessons (and then only in the Greek- 
English exercises) the sentences have not for the most part 
been taken from the New Testament, since the book is 
intended as an instruction book in Greek and not as a 
stimulus to memory of the English Bible. At a later stage 
in the study of New Testament Greek, the student’s 
memory of the English Bible is not an unmixed evil, for 
repeated reading of already familiar passages will often fix 
the meaning of a word in the mind far better than it could 
ever be fixed by the mere learning of a vocabulary. But 
in the early stages, such assistance will do far more harm 
than good. In the exercises, the effort has been made to 
exhibit definitely the forms and grammatical usages which 
have just been discussed in the same lesson, and also to 
keep constantly before the mind, in ever new relationships, 
the most important usages that have been discussed before. 

The vocabularies have been limited to words which are 
very common in the New Testament or which require 
special explanation. Everywhere the effort has been made 
to introduce the words in the illustrations and exercises. 
The learning of lists of words, unless the words so learned 
are actually used, is a waste of time. 

The author desires to express appreciation of the pioneer 
work which has been done in this country by Professor 
John Homer Huddilston, Ph.D., in his Hssentzals of New 
Testament Greek, First Edition, 1895, and also of the larger 
English book of Rev. H. P. V. Nunn, M.A., entitled The 


Χ PREFACE 


Elements of New Testament Greek, First Edition, 1918. 
The two books by John Williams White, The Beginner’s 
Greek Book, 1895, and The First Greek Book; 1896, have 
also been consulted with profit, especially as regards the 
form of presentation. Among reference works, the new 
grammar of J. H. Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament 
Greek, edited by Wilbert Francis Howard, especially Part 
ii of Vol. II, on -Accidence, 1920, and the work by E. D. 
Burton on Moods and Tenses in New Testament Greek, 1906, 
have been found particularly useful. Acknowledgment 
is also to be made to Blass-Debrunner, Grammatik des 
neutestamentlichen Griechisch, 1913, and to the convenient 
summary of classical usage in Goodwin’s Greek Grammar. 
And both the Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament 
of Grimm-Thayer and Moulton and Geden’s Concordance to 
the Greek Testament have been found absolutely indispen- 
sable throughout. The advanced student will find much 
useful material in the large work of A. T. Robertson, A 
Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Histori- 
cal Research, 1914. 


The author is deeply grateful to Professor Edward 
Capps, Ph.D., LL.D., of Princeton University, who, in 
the most gracious possible way, has examined the proof 
of the book throughout, and (of course without becoming 
at all responsible for any faults or errors) has rendered 
invaluable assistance at many points. Much encourage- 
ment and help have also been received from the wise 
counsel and unfailing kindness of the Rev. Professor 
William Park Armstrong, D.D., of Princeton Theological 
Seminary. 


VIII. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


Present Active Indicative. 2c eae 
The Second Deelension. Order of Words. Movable v. 
sUhestiirste eclension nec, ee es oe ee 


.. The Article. Adjectives of the First and Second De- 


clension. Agreement. Use of the Article. At- 
tributive and Predicate Positions of Adjectives. 
Substantive Use of Adjectives................-...22------------- 
Masculme Nouns of the First Declension. Preposi- 


Demonstrative Pronouns. Further Uses of avros.. 
Present Middle and Passive Indicative. ὑπό with 
the Genitive. The Dative of Means. Deponent 
Verbs. Compound Verbs. The Position of ov. 
Various Gases swith: Verbs 1222, cities ees ek 
Imperfect Active Indicative. Imperfect Indicative of 
CLULLPEPA CCENt OLE OTL (Leen ee ee τὸ 
Imperfect Middle and Passive Indicative. Singular 
Verb with Neuter Plural Subject. Uses of καί 
STIL οὐδέ a δ SS EA a 
Future Active and Middle Indicative 
First Aorist Active and Middle Indicative. Con- 
πὐτ το ΠΒ WILT LOT EUG) ee eee ee 
Second Aorist Active and Middle Indicative -............ 
Aorist Passive Indicative. Future Passive Indicative 
pPhesunirds eclension ΠῚ μ᾿ 
Present Participles. Use of Participles ....................... 
Aorist Participles Active and Middle. Use of Parti- 
ciples (continued). The Negatives οὐ and μή... 
Aorist Passive Participle. Genitive Absolute .......... 
EHOLS UID ILE CLIV GH VLODE emetic rey tee et es 
The Present and Aorist Infinitives. The Articular In- 
finitive. Indirect Discourse. Proper Names ......... 


ΧΙ 


190 


ΧΙ TABLE OF CONTENTS 
LESSON 
XX ITE: Contract: Verbs icc ον See 
XXIV. Future and First Aorist Active and Middle of Liquid 
ΨΟΡΒ δεν δῶν aS TeNdlin Ih eo es eee aa ey 
XXV. More Nouns of the Third Declension. Adjectives 
of the Third Declension in -7s, -€s -..................-...- 
XXVI. Declension of πᾶς, πολύς, εἷς, and Numerals. 
Attributive and Substantive Uses of Prepositional 
Phrases and of the Genitive. Accusative of Extent 
of Time and Spaces. πο eee 
XXVIII. Interrogative, Indefinite and Relative Pronouns. De- 
liberative Questions. Conditional Relative Clauses 
AX VIII. The Imperative Mood 2200 oe 
XXIX. The Perfect Tense. Βουοπχοίλίω.... 
XXX. Comparison of Adjectives. Declension of μείζων. 
Genitive of Comparison and Use of 4. Adverbs. 
Genitive with Adverbs of Place. Genitive of Time. 
Genitive of the Articular Infinitive Expressing 
Purpose. Dative of Respect. Accusative of Speci- 
fication. Dative of Time. Possessive Adjectives. 
μὴ Used as a Conjunction. ἵνα with the Sub- 
junctive in Various Uses. μή with the Indicative 
in Questions Expecting a Negative Answer............ 
XXXI. Conjugation of δίδωμι. Second Aorist of γινώσκω. 
The Article before μέν and δέ. The Aorist Partici- 
ple Denoting the Same Act as the Leading Verb. 
First Aorist Endings on Second Aorist Stems ........ 
XXXII. Conjugation of τίθημι, ἀφίημι, δείκνυμι and 
ἀπόλλυμι. Accusative and Infinitive in Result 
Clauses. The Subjunctive After ἕως... 
XXXIII. Conjugation of ἵστημι and οἶδα. The Optative 
Mood. Conditions Contrary to Fact. Uses of 
VOVO abe he ake Pen EY SE σον 
Paradigms τ τορι ἐν ee 
Vocabularies =o το τ εν 
Index........... 


183 


192 


200 


210 


a aie "στ ον, χα Se ὙΌΣ Ὁ ee 5 
[ee ie law any ON es eR nS REN Om Be eee Ge Ὁ τ 


Sr γεν, τς εν ee γα τὰν δ; ὰ o eg ee ee sein Se nt Ti ee ee ee ΡΟ ΎΡ ee eee te ee ee ——e 
ΟΣ Se ee ke RS eae UN eee eee ee yy ee GR ak en tie Mae, ee ket ee σαν  χ δ gs bee 


INTRODUCTION 


During the classical period, the Greek language was 
divided into a number of dialects, of which there were three 
great families—the Doric, the Aeolic, and the Ionic. In 
the fifth century before Christ, one branch of the Ionic 
family, the Attic, attained the supremacy, especially as the 
language of prose literature. The Attic dialect was the 
language of Athens in her glory—the language of Thucy- 
dides, of Plato, of Demosthenes, and of most of the other 
great prose writers of Greece. 


Various causes contributed to make the Attic dialect 
dominant in the Greek-speaking world. First and foremost 
must be put the genius of the Athenian writers. But the 
political and commercial importance of Athens was also not 
without its effect. Hosts of strangers came into contact 
with Athens through government, war and trade, and the 
Athenian colonies also extended the influence of the mother 
city. The Athenian Empire, indeed, soon fell to pieces. 
Athens was conquered first by Sparta in the Peloponnesian 
war, and then, in the middle of the fourth century before 
Christ, along with the other Greek cities, came under the 
domination of the king of Macedonia, Philip. But the 
influence of the Attic dialect survived the loss of political 
power; the language of Athens became also the language of 
her conquerors. 

Macedonia was not originally a Greek kingdom, but it 
adopted thé dominant civilization of the day, which was 
the civilization of Athens. The tutor of Philip’s son, Alex- 
ander the Great, was Aristotle, the Greek philosopher; and 
that fact is only one indication of the conditions of the time. 
With astonishing rapidity Alexander made himself master 
of the whole eastern world, and the triumphs of the Mace- 


1 


2 INTRODUCTION 


donian arms were also triumphs of the Greek language in 
its Attic form. The empire of Alexander, indeed, at once 
fell to pieces after his death in 828 B.C.; but the kingdoms 
into which it was divided were, at least so far as the court 
and the governing classes were concerned, Greek kingdoms. 
Thus the Macedonian conquest meant nothing less than 
the Hellenization of the East, or at any rate it meant an 
enormous acceleration of the Hellenizing process which had 
already begun. 


When the Romans, in the last two centuries before 
Christ, conquered the eastern part of the Mediterranean 
world, they made no attempt to suppress the Greek lan- 
guage. On the contrary, the conquerors to a very consider- 
able extent were conquered by those whom they con- 
quered. Rome herself had already come under Greek 
influence, and now she made use of the Greek language in 
administering at least the eastern part of her vast empire. 
The language of the Roman Empire was not so much Latin 
as it was Greek. 

Thus in the first century after Christ Greek had become 
a world language. The ancient languages of the various 
countries did indeed continue to exist, and many districts 
were bilingual—the original local languages existing side 
by side with the Greek. But at least in the great cities 
throughout the Empire—certainly in the East—the Greek 
language was everywhere understood. Even in Rome itself 
there was a large Greek-speaking population. It is not sur- 
prising that Paul’s letter to the Roman Church is written 
not in Latin but in Greek. 

But the Greek language had to pay a price for this enor- 
mous extension of its influence. In its career of conquest it 
experienced important changes. The ancient Greek dia- 
lects other than Attic, although they disappeared almost 
completely before the beginning of the Christian era, may 


INTRODUCTION 3 
have exerted considerable influence upon the Greek of the 
new unified world. Less important, no doubt, than the 
influence of the Greek dialects, and far less important than 
might have been expected, was the influence of foreign lan- 
guages. But influences of a more subtle and less tangible 
kind were mightily at work. Language is a reflection of the 
intellectual and spiritual habits of the people who use it. 
Attic prose, for example, reflects the spiritual life of a small 
city-state, which was unified by an intense patriotism and 
a glorious literary tradition. But after the time of Alex- 
ander, the Attic speech was no longer the language of a 
small group of citizens living in the closest spiritual associa- 
tion; on the contrary it had become the medium of exchange 
for peoples of the most diverse character. It is not sur- 
prising, then, that the language of the new cosmopolitan 
age was very different from the original Attic dialect upon 
which it was founded. 


This new world language which prevailed after Alex- 
ander has been called not inappropriately ‘‘the Koiné.” 
The word ‘“‘Koiné” means ‘‘common”’; it is not a bad desig- 
nation, therefore, for a language which was a common 
medium of exchange for diverse peoples. The Koiné, then, 
is the Greek world language that prevailed from about 


300 B.C. to the close of ancient history at about A.D. 500. 


The New Testament was written within this Koiné 
period. Linguistically considered, it is united in a very 
close way with the Greek translation of the Old Testament 
called the “‘Septuagint,’”’ which was made at Alexandria in 
the centuries just preceding the Christian era, and with 
certain Christian writings of the early part of the second 
century after Christ, which are ordinarily associated under 
the name ‘‘Apostolic Fathers.”’ Within this triple group, it 
is true, the language of the New Testament is easily su- 
preme. But so far as the bare instrument of expression 


4 INTRODUCTION 
is concerned the writings of the group belong together. 


Where, then, within the development of the Koiné is this 
whole group to be placed? 


It has always been observed that the language of the New 
Testament differs strikingly from the great Attic prose 
writers such as Thucydides or Plato or Demosthenes. That — 
fact is not surprising. It can easily be explained by the 
lapse of centuries and by the important changes which the 
creation of the new cosmopolitanism involved. But an- 
other fact is more surprising. It is discovered, namely, 
that the language of the New Testament differs not merely 
from that of the Attic prose writers of four centuries before, 
but also from that of the Greek writers of the very period 
within which the New Testament was written. The Greek 
of the New Testament is very different, for example, from 
the Greek of Plutarch. 


This difference used sometimes to be explained by the 
hypothesis that the New Testament was written in a Jew- 
ish-Greek dialect—a form of Greek very strongly influenced 
by the Semitic languages, Hebrew and Aramaic. But in 
recent years another explanation has been coming increas- 
ingly into vogue. This other explanation has been given an 
important impetus by the discovery, in Egypt, of the ‘‘non- 
literary papyri.”’ For the most part the Koiné had until 
recently been known to scholars almost exclusively through 
literature. But within the past twenty or thirty years 
there have been discovered in Egypt, where the dry air has 
preserved even the fragile writing-material of antiquity, 
great numbers of documents such as wills, receipts, petitions 
and private letters. These documents are not “literature.” 
Many of them were intended merely to be read once and 
then thrown away. They exhibit, therefore, not the 
polished language of books but the actual spoken language 
of everyday life. And on account of their important 


INTRODUCTION 5 


divergence from the language of such writers as Plutarch 
they have revealed with new clearness the interesting fact 
that in the Koiné period there was a wide gap between the 
language of literature and the language of every day. The 
literary men of the period imitated the great Attic models 
with more or less exactitude; they maintained an artificial 
literary tradition. The obscure writers of the non-literary 
papyri, on the other hand, imitated nothing, but simply 
expressed themselves, without affectation, in the language 
of the street. 


But it is discovered that the language of the New Testa- 
ment, at various points where it differs from the literature 
even of the Koiné period, agrees with the non-literary pa- 
pyri. That discovery has suggested a new hypothesis to 
account for the apparent peculiarity of the language of 
the New Testament. It is now supposed that the impres- 
sion of peculiarity which has been made upon the minds of 
modern readers by New Testament Greek is due merely 
to the fact that until recently our knowledge of the spoken 
as distinguished from the literary language of the Koiné 
period has been so limited. In reality, it is said, the 
New Testament is written simply in the popular form of 
the Koiné which was spoken in the cities throughout the 
whole of the Greek-speaking world. 


This hypothesis undoubtedly contains a large element of 
truth. Undoubtedly the language of the New Testament is 
no artificial language of books, and no Jewish-Greek jargon, 
but the natural, living language of the period. But the 
Semitic influence should not be underestimated. The New 
Testament writers were nearly all Jews, and all of them 
were strongly influenced by the Old Testament. In par- 
ticular, they were influenced, so far as language is con- 
cerned, by the Septuagint, and the Septuagint was influ- 
enced, as most ancient translations were, by the language of 


6 INTRODUCTION 


the original. The Septuagint had gone far toward pro- 
ducing a Greek vocabulary to express the deepest things of 
the religion of Israel. And this vocabulary was profoundly 
influential in the New Testament. Moreover, the origin- 
ality of the New Testament writers should not be ignored. 
They had come under the influence of new convictions of a 
transforming kind, and those new convictions had their 
effect in the sphere of language. Common words had to be 
given new and loftier meanings, and common men were 
lifted to a higher realm by a new and glorious experience. It 
is not surprising, then, that despite linguistic similarities in 
detail the New Testament books, even in form, are vastly 
different from the letters that have been discovered in 
Egypt. The New Testament writers have used the com- 
mon, living language of the day. But they have used it in 
the expression of uncommon thoughts, and the language 
itself, in the process, has been to some extent transformed. 
The Epistle to the Hebrews shows that even conscious art 
could be made the instrument of profound sincerity, and 
the letters of Paul, even the shortest and simplest of them, 
are no mere private jottings intended to be thrown away, 
like the letters that have been discovered upon the rubbish 
heaps of Egypt, but letters addressed by an apostle to the 
Church of God. The cosmopolitan popular language of the 
Graeco-Roman world served its purpose in history well. It 
broke down racial and linguistic barriers. And at one point 
in its life it became sublime. 


- — 


—— a ἂτα, _ —— 


Ne ee ee ee 


LESSONS 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
LESSON I 


The Alphabet 


1. The Greek alphabet is as follows: 


Capital 
Letters 


DaMOeRBHEMUROMNZSrP RM OONEPHWE 


Small 
Letters 


Ὃ HROMVYE HFT SDSITMMA OLA τὸ 8 


bo 


Name 
Alpha 
Beta 
Gamma 
Delta 
Epsilon 
Zeta 
Eta 
Theta 
Tota 
Kappa 
Lambda 
Mu 
Nu 
Xi 
Omicron 
Pi 
Rho 
Sigma 
Tau 
Upsilon 
hi 
Chi 
Psi 
Omega 


Pronunciation 
a as in father 
b 
g as in gol! 
d 
e as in get 
dz 
a as in late 
th 
i as in pit, ee as in feet 


as in obey 


che δε δ τὸ On page ΞΡ τεῦ bs 


French τὶ or German ti 
ph 

German ch in Ach 

ps 

Ο as in note 


1Before another Ὕ or ΚΟΥ xX, Ὕ is pronounced like ng. 


2 At the beginning of a word p is written p, rh. 


ὃς is written at the end of a word, elsewhere o. 


10 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


2. The student is advised to learn the small letters 
thoroughly, in connection with the first lesson, leaving the 
capital letters to be picked up later, as they occur. It 
should be observed that sentences are begun with small 
letters, not with capitals. Before the formation of the 
letters is practised, guidance should be obtained from the 
teacher, since it is impracticable to copy exactly the 
printed form of the letters, and since bad habits of penman- 
ship ought by all means to be avoided. For example, 
β and p should be formed without lifting the pen and by 
beginning at the bottom. In these matters the help of a 
teacher is indispensable. 


3. The Greek vowels are as follows: 


Short Long 
a a 
n 
Oo ω 
ι t 
υ υ 


It will be noted that a, ε, and νυ can be either long or 
short. The long a and v are pronounced very much like 
the corresponding short letters, except that the sound is 
held longer; the short tis pronounced like 1 in p7é and the 
long c like ee in feet. 

€ is always short, and ἡ is the long of it; o is always 
short, and wis the long of it. This clear distinction in ap- 
pearance between the long and short e and o makes the 
matter of quantity very much easier in Greek than it is in 
Latin. ν- 

ι and v are called close vowels; and the others open 
vowels. 


4. A diphthong is a combination of two vowels in a 
single syllable. The second letter of a diphthong is always 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 1 


a close vowel. The first letter is always an open vowel 
except in the case of uw. The common diphthongs are as 
follows: 


at, pronounced like ai in azsle 

εἰ, pronounced like ἃ in fate (thus εἰ and ἢ are pro- 
nounced alike) 

ot, pronounced like oi in οἱ 

av, pronounced like ow in cow 

ev, pronounced like eu in feud 

ov, pronounced like oo in food 


vt, pronounced like ee in queen 


The diphthongs nv and wv (pronounced by drawing the 
sounds of each letter closely together) are rare. When t 
unites with long a, ἢ or ὦ to form one sound, the t is writ- 
ten under the other letter instead of after it, and is called 
iota subscript. Thus a, ἢ, w. This iota subscript has no 
effect whatever upon the pronunciation; a being pronounced 
like long a, ῃ like ἡ, ῳ like w. 


5. A vowel or diphthong at the beginning of a word 
always has a breathing. The breathing stands over a vowel; 
and in the case of a diphthong it stands over the second of 
the two component vowels. 

The rough breathing (‘) indicates that an h-sound is to 
be pronounced before the initial vowel or diphthong; the 
smooth breathing (’) indicates that no such h-sound is to 
be pronounced. Thus ἐν is to be pronounced en, and ἑν 
is to be pronounced hen; ov is to be pronounced 00, and 
ov is to be pronounced hoo. 


6. There are three accents, the acute (‘), the circumflex 
(7), and the grave (‘). These accents, like the breathings, 
stand over a vowel, and, in the case of a diphthong, over 
the second of the two component vowels. When a breath- 
ing and an accent stand over the same vowel, the breathing 


12 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


comes first, except in the case of the circumflex accent, 
which stands over the breathing. Thus οἴκου, οἶκος. The 
use of the accents will be studied in Lesson II. Here it 
should simply be observed that the stress in pronunciation 
is to be placed on the syllable that has any one of the 
accents. , 


Phe Punctuation 


There are four marks of punctuation: the comma (,) 
and the period (.), both written on the line and corre- 
sponding to the comma and the period in English; the 
colon, which is a dot above the line (:), and takes the 
place of the English colon and semicolon; and the question- 
mark (;) which looks like an English semicolon. 


8. Exercise 


After learning to write the small letters of the alphabet 
and give the names of the letters in order, the student 
should practise pronouncing Greek words and sentences 
found anywhere in the book. Throughout the entire study, 
great care should be devoted to pronunciation, and the 
Greek sentences should always be read aloud both in the 
preparation of the lessons and in the work of the classroom. 
In this way the language will be learned not only by the 
eye, but also by the ear, and will be fixed much more 
firmly in the memory. The student should try to read the 
Greek sentences with expression, thinking of the meaning 
as he reads. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 13 


LESSON II 


Accent 


9. The Greek accents indicated in ancient times not 
stress (what we call accent), but musical pitch. But since 
it is impossible for us to reproduce the original pronuncia- 
tion, the best we can do is to place the stress of the voice 
upon the syllable where the accent occurs, and give up any 
distinction in pronunciation between the acute, the circum- 
flex and the grave. Having adopted this method of pro- 
nunciation, we should adhere to it rigidly; for unless some 
one method is adhered to, the language can never be fixed 
in the memory. It is also important to learn to write the 
accents correctly, since the accents serve to distinguish 
various forms from one another and are therefore a great 
help and not a hindrance in the learning of the language. 


10. Preliminary Definitions 


The last syllable of a word is called the ultima; the one 
before that, the penwlt; and the one before that, the ante- 
penult. 

Thus, in the word λαμβάνομεν, the ultima is -μεν, the 
penult is -vo-, and the antepenult is -βα-. 

Syllables containing a long vowel or a diphthong are long. 
But final at and ou (that is, at and oc coming at the very end 
of a word) are considered short so far as accent 15 concerned. 

Thus the last syllable of ἀνθρώπους is long because it 
contains the diphthong ov ; the last syllable of ἄνθρωποι 
is short because the ot is here final ou; the last syllable of 
ἀνθρώποις is long because here the or has a letter after it and 
so, not being final ou, is long like any other diphthong. 

It will be remembered that ε and o are always short, and 
nand w always long. The quantity (long or short) of a, 


@ 


14 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


t, and v, must be learned by observation in the individual 
cases. 


11. General Rules of Accent 


1. The acute (’) can stand only on one of the last three 
syllables of a word; the circumflex (7) only on one of the last 
two; and the grave (ἢ) only on the last. 

Examples: This rule would be violated by ἄποστολος, for 
here the accent would stand on the fourth syllable from the 
end. It would also be violated by πιστεῦομεν, for here the 
circumflex would stand on the third syllable from the end. 

2. The circumflex accent cannot stand on a short 
syllable. 

3. If the ultima is long, 

(a) the antepenult cannot be accented, 

(b) the penult, if it is accented at all, must have the 
acute. 

Examples: Rule 3a would be violated by ἀπόστολῳ or 
ἀπόστολου, because in these cases the ultima is long ; but 
it is not violated by ἀπόστολε or ἀπόστολοι, because here 
the ultima is short. Rule 80 would be violated by δοῦλου or 
δοῦλων, but is not violated by δοῦλος or δοῦλοι. 

4. Ifthe ultimais short, a long penult, if itis accented at 
all, must have the circumflex. 

Examples: This rule would be violated by δούλε or δούλοι ; 
but it is not violated by δούλου, because here the ultima is 
not short, or by vids, because here, although a long penult 
comes before a short ultima, the penult is not accented at 
all. The rule does not say that a long penult before a short 
ultima must have the circumflex, but only that if it is 
accented at all it must have the circumflex rather than 
some other kind of accent. 

5. A long ultima can have either the acute or the 
circumflex. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 15 


Examples: ἀδελφοῦ and ἀδελφού both conform to the gen- 
eral rules of accent. Further observation, based on other 
considerations, is necessary in order to tell which is right. 

6. An acute accent on the last syllable of a word is 
changed to the grave when followed, without intervening 
mark of punctuation, by other words in a sentence. 

Examples: ἀδελφός is right where ἀδελφός stands alone; 
but ἀδελφός ἀποστόλου violates the rule—it should be 
ἀδελφὸς ἀποστόλου. 


12. It should be observed that these general rules of 
accent do not tell what the accenting of any individual word 
is to be; they only tell what it cannot be. In other words, 
they merely fix certain limits within which the accenting of 
Greek words must remain. What the accent actually is, 
within these limits, can be determined in part by the 
special rules which follow, but in very many cases must be 
learned by observation of the individual words. Thus if 
we have a form Avoyevov to accent, the general rules 
would permit λυομενού or λυομενοῦ or λυομένου ; any other 
way of accenting would violate the general rules. But 
which of the three possibilities is actually to be chosen is a 
matter for further observation. Or if we have a form 
mpocwrov to accent, the general rules would permit 
πρόσωπον, προσῶπον OY προσωπόν. 

There are two special rules which help to fix the accent 
of many words more closely than it is fixed by the general 
rules. They are as follows: 


13. Rule of Verb Accent 


Verbs have recessive accent. 

Explanation: The rule means that, in verbs, the accent 
goes back as far as the general rules of accent will permit. 
This rule definitely fixes the accent of any verb form; it is 
not necessary to know what verb the form is derived from 


16 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


or to have any other information whatever. Knowing that 
it is a verb form, one needs only to look at the ultima. If 
the ultima is short, an acute must be placed on the ante- 
penult (supposing the word to have as many as three 
syllables); if the ultima is long, an acute must be placed on 
the penult. 

Examples: Suppose a verb form ἐγινωσκου is to be 
accented. In accordance with the rule of verb accent, the 
accent is trying to get as far back as the general rules of 
accent will permit. But ἔγινωσκου would violate Rule 1; 
and, since the ultima is long, éyivwaoxov would violate 
Rule 3a. Therefore the penult must be accented. But 
ἐγινῶσκου would violate Rule 3b. Therefore ἐγινώσκου is 
correct. On the other hand, if a verb form ἐγινωσκε is to 
be accented, although éywwoxe is forbidden by Rule 1, 
ἐγίνωσκε 15 permitted; and since verbs have recessive 
accent, that accenting, ἐγίνωσκε, is correct, and ἐγινῶσκε or 
ἐγινωσκέ would be wrong. If the verb has only two syl- 
lables, Rule 4 often comes into play. Thus if the verb form 
owe is to be accented, the rule of recessive verb accent 
decrees that the former of the two syllables shall be ac- 
cented. But Rule 4 decrees that the accent shall be not 
σὠζε but σῶζε. 


14. Rule of Noun Accent 

In nouns, the accent remains on the same syllable as in 
the nominative singular, so nearly as the general rules of 
accent will permit. 

Explanation: This rule differs from the rule of verb 
accent in that it does not of itself fix the accent of noun 
forms. The accent on the nominative singular (the form 
given in the vocabularies) must be learned by observation 
for every noun separately, just as the spelling of the word 
must be learned. So much is merely a part of the learning 
of the vocabularies. But when once the accent on the 


4 : id . 
ee ee ee a ὅν 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 17 


nominative singular has been given, the accent on the other 
forms of the noun is fixed by the rule. 

Examples: 

(1) If there be a noun λογος, neither the general rules 
of accent in §11 nor the rule of noun accent will deter- 
mine whether the accent is λόγος or Aoyds. But once 
it has been determined that the accent is λόγος, then the 
accent on the other forms of the noun can be determined. 
The other forms, without the accent, are λογου, Aoyw, λογον, 
oye, λογοι, λογων, λογοις, λογους. On every one of these 
forms the acute will stand on the penult; since (a) the rule 
of noun accent decrees that the accent remains there if the 
general rules of accent permit, and since (b) the general rules 
of accent never forbid the accent to be placed on a penult, 
and since (c) Rule 2 decrees that only an acute accent can 
stand on a short syllable. 

(2) In the case of a noun οἶκος, its various forms being 
after the analogy of λόγος above, (a) and (b) of the consid- 
erations mentioned above with regard to λόγος still hold. 
But (c) does not hold, since here the penult is not short but 
long. In this case, Rules 3b and 4 will determine when the 
accent is acute and when it is circumflex; when the ultima 
is long, the accent (on the penult) will be acute, and when 
the ultima is short, the accent (on the penult) will be cir- 
cumflex. Thus οἶκος, οἴκου, οἴκῳ, οἶκον, οἶκε, οἶκοι, οἴκων, 
οἴκοις, οἴκους. 

(3) In the case of ἃ noun ἄνθρωπος the accent is trying 
in every other form to get back to the antepenult, in ac- 
cordance with the rule of noun accent, since it is the ante- 
penult which is accented in the nominative singular. But 
where the ultima is long, the accent cannot get back to the 
antepenult, since that would violate Rule 3a. The nearest 
syllable to the antepenult which it can reach in these cases 
is the penult. The rule of noun accent decrees that that 


18 NEW. TESTAMENT GREEK 


nearest syllable is the one upon which the accent must 
stand. But since the ultima is long in these cases, Rule 3b 
decrees that the accent (upon the penult) shall be an acute 
not a circumflex. Thus ἄνθρωπος, ἀνθρώπου, ἀνθρώπῳ, 
ἄνθρωπον, ἄνθρωπε, ἄνθρωποι, ἀνθρώπων, ἀνθρώποις, ἀνθρώπους. 

(4) In the case οἵ a noun ὁδός the accent will stand in 
every form upon the ultima, since the general rules of accent 
never prevent the accent from standing on an ultima. If 
the ultima is short the accent must of course be acute. But 
if the ultima is long, the accent, so far as the general rules 
are concerned, can be either acute or circumflex. In these 
cases, therefore, the rules so far given will not determine 
which accent is to be used. Thus ὁδός, ὁδόν, ὁδέ, ὁδοί. 
But whether 6600, 66@, ὁδών, ὁδοίς, ὁδούς, or ὁδοῦ, ὁδῷ, 
ὁδῶν, ὁδοῖς, ὁδοῦς are correct must be left for future de- 
termination. The decision is part of the learning of the 
declension of this particular class of nouns. 


15. Exercises 


(In all written exercises, the breathings and accents 
should be put in immediately after each word has been 
written just as the 1’s are dotted and the t’s crossed in 
English. Itis just as wrong to wait until the end of a whole 
paradigm or a whole sentence to add the breathings and 
accents as it would be to wait similarly in English before one 
crosses the t’s.) 


I. Write the following verb forms with the accent, and 
then pronounce them: 

1. ἐλυομεν, ἐλυομην, ἔλυσω. 2. ἐἔλυου, ἔλυε, ἐἔλυσαμην. 
3. διδασκε, διδασκονται, διδασκομεθα (the final a is short). 
4. λνε (the v here, as in all these forms beginning with Qu, is 
long), Avov, λυουσι (the final vis short). 5. Avoat, λυσω, λυετε. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 19 


II. Accent the following forms of the nouns whose 
nominative singular is (1) ἀπόστολος, (2) κώμη, (3) πλοῖον: 

1. ἀποστολοις, ἀποστολους, ἀποστολου, ἀποστολοι, ἀποσ- 
Tohw. 2. κωμαις, κωμαι, κωμας (a long), κωμῃ. 3. πλοια 
(final a short), πλοιων, πλοιοις, πλοιου, πλοιῳ, πλοιον. 


III. Are the following words accented correctly, so 
far as the general rules of accent are concerned? If not, tell 
in each case what rule (or rules) has been violated. Then 
accent each of the words in all the ways which the general 
rules of accent would permit. 

1. ἔδιδομεν, ὥραι, πρόφηταις. 2. δόξῃ, ἐρῆμου, οὖρανον. 
3. ἔρημος, βουλαί, λὺε. 


[Note: The student should apply the principles of accent in the study 
of all subsequent lessons, observing how the rules are followed, and 
never passing by the accenting of any word in the paradigms or exer- 
cises until it is thoroughly understood. In this way, correct accenting 
will soon become second nature, and the various logical steps by which 
it is arrived at will no longer need to be consciously formulated.] 


20 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON ΠῚ 


Present Active Indicative 


16. Vocabulary 


(The vocabularies should be learned after the paradigms 
and explanatory parts of the lessons, but before the exer- 
cises.) 


βλέπω, I see. λαμβάνω, I take. 


γινώσκω, I know. λέγω, 1 say. 
γράφω, I write. λύω, 1 loose, I destroy. 
διδάσκω, I teach. ἔχω, 1 have. 


17. The Greek verb has tense, voice, and mood, like the 
verb in other languages. The present tense (in the indica- 
tive) refers to present time; the active voice represents the 
subject as acting instead of being acted upon; the zndicative 
mood makes an assertion, in distinction, for example, from 
a command or a wish. 


18. The present active indicative of the verb λύω, 1 
loose, is as follows: 
Sing. Plur. 


1. λύω, TL loose or I 
am loosing. 
2. Aves, thou loosest or 
thou art loosing. 
3. λύει, he looses or 
he zs loosing. 


1. λύομεν, we loose or 

we are loosing. 
2. λύετε, ye loose or 

ye are loosing. 
3. λύουσι, they loose or 

they are loosing. 


19. It will be observed that the distinctions between 


first person (person speaking), second person (person spoken 
to), third person (person spoken of), and between singular 
and plural numbers, which in English are indicated for the 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 21 


most part by subject-pronouns, are indicated in Greek by 
the endings. Thus no pronoun is necessary to translate we 
loose into Greek; the we is sufficiently indicated by the 
ending -ομεν. 


20. The part of the verb which remains constant 
throughout the conjugation and has the various endings 
added to it is called the stem. Thus the present stem of 
λύω is Av-. The present stem of a verb can be obtained 
by removing the final w from the form given in the vocabu- 
lary. Thus the present stem of λέγω, I say, is λεγ-. The 
conjugation of the present active indicative of any verb in 
the vocabulary can be obtained by substituting the present 
stem of that verb for λυ- and then adding the endings -w, 
“ELS, -El, -OMEV, -ETE, -ουσι, as they are given above. 

The primary personal endings, which would naturally 
stand in the tenses called primary tenses', were, it seems, 
originally as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. -μι 1. -μεν 
2. “-σι 2. -τε 
τὶ ὃ. - -ν»τὶ 


Between the stem and these personal endings was placed a 
variable vowel which before μ and v was o and before other 
letters «. But.in the present active, at least in the singu- 
lar, this scheme is not carried out, and the beginner is ad- 
vised for the present simply to regard -w, -εἰς, -€L, τομεν, 
-ετε, -ovot as the endings which by their addition to the 
stem indicate the various persons and numbers. 


21. In the present tense there is in Greek no distinction 
between J loose, which simply represents the action as 
taking place in present time, and I am loosing, which calls 


1The primary tenses are the present, the future, and the perfect; the 
secondary tenses are the imperfect, the aorist, and the pluperfect. 


Ze NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


attention to the continuance of the action. Both of these 
ideas, therefore, should be connected with the Greek form 
λύω. The distinction between the two will become ex- 
ceedingly important when we pass over to past time; for 
there Greek makes the distinction even more sharply than 
English. 


22. The second person, you loose or you are loosing, in 
English may of course be either singular or plural, and may 
be translated by the student either by Aves or by λύετε 
except where the context makes plain which is meant. 
Where it is desired, in the exercises, to indicate whether 
singular or plural is meant, the archaic forms thou loosest, 
etc., and ye loose, etc., will be used. 


23; Exercises 
(All English-Greek exercises should be written.) 


1. βλέπεις, γινώσκεις, λαμβάνεις. 2. γράφει, ἔχει, λέγει. 
3. λύει, διδάσκει, βλέπει. 4. λαμβάνομεν, ἔχομεν, γινώσκομεν. 
ὅ. βλέπετε, λέγετε, γράφετε. 6. διδάσκουσι, λαμβάνουσι, 
λύουσι. 7. γινώσκετε, γινώσκεις, γινώσκομεν. 8. βλέπομεν, 
διδάσκουσι, λέγει. 9. ἔχεις, βλέπουσι, λαμβάνομεν. 


II. 1. Weare knowing, we see, we are seeing. 2. They 
are loosing, they loose, he looses. 3. He is loosing, ye have, 
thou knowest. 4. I am taking, we know, they say. 5. He 
has, we are writing, they see. 


[The teacher should continue such drill orally, until the student can 
recognize the Greek words rapidly both by sight and by sound, and 
translate the English sentences rapidly into Greek.] 


a «ν 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 23 


The Second Declension. Order of Words. Movable ν. 
24. Vocabulary 
ἀδελφός, ὁ, a brother. ἱερόν, τό, a temple. 
ἄνθρωπος, ὁ, a man. καί, conj., and. 
3 it e ’ ε 
ἀπόστολος, ὁ, an apostle. λόγος, 6, a word. 
δοῦλος, ὁ, a slave, a servant. νόμος, ὃ, a law. 
δῶρον, τό, a gift. οἶκος, ὁ, a house. 
θάνατος, ὁ, a death. vids, ὃ, @ son. 


25. There are three declensions in Greek. The second 

declension is given before the first for purposes of con- 
venience, since it is easier, and has a larger number of 
common nouns. | 


26. There is no indefinite article in Greek, and so ἀδελφός 
means either brother or a brother (usually the latter). Greek 
has, however, a definite article, and where the Greek article 
does not appear, the definite article should not be inserted 
in the English translation, Thus ἀδελφός does not mean 
the brother. In the plural, English, like Greek, has no 
indefinite article. ἄνθρωποι, therefore, means simply men. 
But it does not mean the men. 


27. The noun in Greek has gender, number, and case. 


28. There are three genders: masculine, feminine, and 
neuter. 

The gender of nouns must often be learned by observation 
of the individual nouns. Butnearly all nouns of the second 
declension ending in -os are masculine; and all nouns of 
the second declension in τὸν are neuter. The gender is 
indicated in the vocabulary by the article placed after the 


24 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


noun. The masculine article, 6, indicates masculine 
gender; the feminine article, 7, feminine gender; and the 
neuter article, 76, neuter gender. 


29. There are two numbers, singular and plural. Verbs 
agree with their subject in number. 


30. There are five cases; nominative, genitive, dative, 
accusative, and vocative. 


31. The declension of ἄνθρωπος, 6, a man, is as follows: 


Singular Plural 
Nom. ἄνθρωπος, a man. N.V. ἄνθρωποι, men. 
Gen. ἀνθρώπου, of a man. G. ἀνθρώπων, of men. 
Dat. ἀνθρώπῳ, toorforaman. D. ἀνθρώποις, to or for men. 
Acc. ἄνθρωπον, a man. A. ἀνθρώπους, men. 


Voc. ἄνθρωπε, man. 


32. The student should observe carefully how the 
principles of accent apply to this noun and all the others. 
In oral practice and recitations the stress in pronunciation 
should be placed carefully on the syllables where the accent 
appears. 


33. The stem of a noun is that part of the noun which 
remains constant when the various endings are added. The 
stem of ἄνθρωπος is ἀνθρωπο-, and all other second-declen- 
sion nouns, like ἄνθρωπος, have stems ending in o. The 
second declension, therefore, is sometimes called the o- 
declension. But this final o of the stem becomes so much 
disguised when the endings enter into combination with it, 
that it is more convenient to regard ἀνθρωπ- as the stem 
and -os, -ov, etc., as the endings. It should at any rate be 
observed, however, that o (with the long of it, w) is the 
characteristic vowel in the last syllable of second-declen- 
sion nouns. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 25 


34. The subject of a sentence is put in the nominative 
case. Thus ἀπόστολος γινώσκει means an apostle knows. 

The object of a transitive verb is placed in the accusative 
case. Thus βλέπω λόγον means I see a word. 


35. The genztive case expresses possession. Thus λόγοι 
ἀποστόλων means words of apostles or apostles’ words. But 
the genitive has many other important uses, which must be 
learned by observation. The functions of the Latin ablative 
are divided, in Greek, between the genitive and the dative. 


36. The dative case is the case of the indirect object. 
Thus λέγω λόγον ἀποστόλοις means I say a word to apostles. 
But the dative has many other important uses which must 
be learned by observation. 


37. The vocative case is the case of direct address. Thus 
ἀδελφέ, βλέπομεν means brother, we see. In the plural the 
vocative case in words of all declensions is in form like the 
nominative. The vocative plural may therefore be omitted 
in repeating paradigms. 


38. Learn the declension of λόγος, 6, a word, and of 
δοῦλος, 6, a servant, in $557. These nouns differ from 
ἄνθρωπος only in that the accent is different in the 
nominative singular and therefore the application of the 
general rules of accent works out differently. 


39. The declension of vids, 6, a son, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur 
N. υἱός N.V. υἱοί 
G. υἱοῦ G. υἱῶν 
D. vid 1). υἱοῖς 
Α. υἱόν Α. υἱοὺς 
Ν. υἱέ 


26 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


40. Here the rule of noun accent decrees that the accent 
must be on the ultima in all cases, because it was there in 
the nominative singular. But which accent shall it be? 
The general rules of accent answer this question where the 
ultima is short; for of course only an acute, not a circumflex, 
can stand on a short syllable. But where the ultima is 
long, the general rules of accent will permit either an acute 
or a circumflex. A special rule is therefore necessary. It 
is as follows: 

In the second declension, when the ultima is accented at 
all, it has the circumflex in the genitive and dative of both 
numbers, elsewhere the acute. 

Explanation: The “‘elsewhere’”’ really refers only to the 
accusative plural, because in the nominative and vocative 
singular and plural and in the accusative singular the general 
rules of accent would forbid the circumflex, the ultima 
being short in these cases. 


41. The declension of δῶρον, τό, a gift, is as follows: 


are. Plur. 

N.V. δῶρον - N.V. δῶρα 
G. δώρου G. δώρων 
D. δώρῳ D. δώροις 

A. δῶρον A. δῶρα 


42. It will be observed that δῶρον is a neuter noun. In 
all neuter nouns, of all declensions, the vocative and 
accusative of both numbers are like the nominative, and 
the nominative, vocative and accusative plural always end 
in short a. 


43. Order of Words 


The normal order of the sentence in Greek is like that 
in English—subject, verb, object. There is no’ special 


ee ee ee Ὁ 


ee ee ene © 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 27 


tendency, as in Latin, to put the verb at the end. But 
Greek can vary the order for purposes of emphasis or 
euphony much more freely than English. Thus the sentence, 
an apostle says a word,is in Greek normally ἀπόστολος λέγει 
λόγον. But λέγει ἀπόστολος λόγον and λόγον λέγει ἀπόστολος 
are both perfectly possible. The English translation must 
be determined by observing the endings, not by observing 
the order. 


44. Movable v 


When the ουσι of the third person plural of the verb 
comes either before a vowel or at the end of a sentence, a ν, 
called movable v,is added to it. Thus βλέπουσιν ἀποστόλους. 
Sometimes the movable v is added even before a word that 
begins with a consonant. Thus either λύουσι δούλους or 
λύουσιν δούλους is correct. It must not be supposed that 
this movable ν occurs at the end of every verb form ending 
in a vowel when the next word begins with a vowel. On 
the contrary, it occurs only in a very few forms, which must 
be learned as they appear. 


45. Exercises 


I. 1. ἀδελφὸς βλέπει ἄνθρωπον. 2. δοῦλος γράφει 
λόγους. 3. ἀπόστολοι διδάσκουσιν ἄνθρωπον. 4. ἀπόστολοι 
λύουσι δούλους. 5. δοῦλος λαμβάνει δῶρα. 6. λαμβάνουσιν 
υἱοὶ οἴκους. 7. δούλους καὶ οἴκους λαμβάνουσιν ἀδελφοί. 8. 
βλέπομεν ἱερὰ καὶ ἀποστόλους. 9. δούλους βλέπετε καὶ 
ἀδελφούς. 10. γράφεις λόγον ἀποστόλῳ. 11]. διδάσκει ἄν- 
θρωπον. 12. ἀδελφὸς λέγει λόγον ἀποστόλῳ. 13. ἀδελφὸς 
ἀποστόλων γινώσκει νόμον. 14. δοῦλοι γινώσκουσι νόμον καὶ 
λαμβάνουσι δῶρα. 15. γινώσκουσιν ἄνθρωποι θάνατον. 10. 
λαμβάνομεν δῶρα καὶ ἔχομεν ἀδελφούς. 17. ἀποστόλοις καὶ 
δούλοις λέγομεν λόγους θανάτου. 18. ἀδελφοὶ καὶ δοῦλοι 


28 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


γινώσκουσιν καὶ βλέπουσιν ἱερὰ καὶ δῶρα. 19. γράφει 
ἀπόστολος νόμον καὶ λέγει λόγους υἱοῖς δούλου. 20. υἱοὶ 
ἀποστόλων λέγουσι λόγους καὶ λύουσι δούλους. 


II. 1. Α βουνϑῃηῦ is writing alaw. 2. A son sees words. 
3. Brothers are loosing servants. 4. Sons take gifts. 5. An 
apostle sees a servant and a gift. 6. Servants and sons are 
saying a word to a brother. 7. We see gifts and servants. 
8. Men see words and gifts of a brother and houses of 
apostles and sons. 9. Words and laws we write to brethren; 
a word of death we say to a servant. 10. A son is seeing 
temples and houses. 11. Ye know death. 12. Thou takest 
an apostle’s gift (= a gift of an apostle). 13. Thou art 
writing a brother’s word to a servant. 14. I loose servants 
and say words to sons and brothers. 15. A son sees death. 
16. They know laws and teach servants of an apostle. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 29 


LESSON V 


The First Declension 


46. Vocabulary 

ἀλήθεια, ἡ, truth. ζωή, ἡ, life. 

βασιλεία, ἡ, a kingdom. ἡμέρα, ἡ, a day. 
γραφή, ἡ, a writing, a Scripture. καρδία, ἡ, a heart. 
δόξα, ἡ, glory. παραβολή, ἡ, a parable. 
εἰρήνη, ἡ, peace. ὃ φωνή, ἡ, α vorce. 
ἐκκλησία, ἡ, α church. ψυχή, ἡ, a soul, a life. 
ἐντολή, ἡ, @ commandment. ὥρα, ἡ, an hour. 


47. All nouns of the first declension ending in a or ἢ 
are feminine. 


48. The declension of ὥρα, ἡ, an hour, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 

N. V. ὥρα N.V. ὧραι 
 G. ὥρας G. wpa 
D. dpa D. ὥραις 
A. ὥραν A. @pas 


49. The stem of ὥρα is wpa-, and the first declension is 
sometimes called the a- declension, because its stems end 
in a. Since, however, the final vowel of the stem enters 


30 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


into various combinations with the endings it is more 
convenient for the beginner to regard wp- as the stem and 
-a, -as, etc., as the endings. It should be noticed that a 
is characteristic of this declension as o is of the second 
declension. 


50. It should be observed that the a in the nominative, 
genitive, and accusative singular, and in the accusative 
plural is long. 


51. The genitive plural shows an exception to the rule 
of noun accent. The rule of noun accent would require the 
accent to remain on the same syllable as in the nominative 
singular. But nouns of the first declension have a circum- 
flex on the ultima in the genitive plural no matter where 
the accent was in the nominative singular. 


52. Thedeclension of βασιλεία, ἡ, a kingdom, is exactly 
like that of ὥρα, since here also there is a long accented 
penult in the nominative singular followed by a long a in 
the ultima. 


53. The declension of ἀλήθεια, ἡ, truth, is as follows: 


Sing Plur. 

N. V. ἀλήθεια N. V. ἀλήθειαι 
G. ἀληθείας G. ἀληθειῶν 
D. ἀληθείᾳ D. ἀληθείαις 
A. ἀλήθειαν A. ἀληθείας 


This noun has a short a in the ultima in the nominative 
singular, and when in the first declension the a is short in 
the nominative singular it is also short in the accusative 
singular. In the accusative plural the a is long in all first- 
declension nouns. The accent follows the noun rule every- 
where except in the genitive plural (see $51). 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 31 


54. The declension of δόξα, ἡ, glory, is as follows: 


Sing. y Plur. 

N. V. δόξα N. V. δόξαι 
G. δόξης G. δοξῶν ) | 
D. δόξῃ D. δόξαις 
Α. δόξαν Α. δόξας ἑ 


55. The ain the nominative singular of first-declension 
nouns is changed to ἡ in the genitive and dative singular 
except after ε, ει, or p. 


56. The declension of γραφή, ἡ, a writing, a Scripture, 
is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
N. V. γραφή N. V. γραφαί 
G. γραφῆς | G. γραφῶν 
D. γραφῇ D. γραφαῖς 
A. γραφήν A. γραφάς 


57. When a first-declension noun ends in ἢ in the 
nominative singular, the 7 is retained throughout the 
singular. But the plurals of all first-declension nouns are 
alike. 


58. In the first declension (exactly as in the second, see 
§40), when the ultima is accented at all, it has the circumflex 
in the genitives and datives of both numbers, elsewhere the 
acute. 


59. Exercises 


I. 1. ψυχὴ βλέπει ζωήν. 2. βασιλεία γινώσκει ἀλήθειαν. 
3. ἄνθρωπος γὙράφει ἐντολὰς καὶ νόμους. 4. ἀπόστολοι λαμ- 
βάνουσι δούλους καὶ δῶρα καὶ ἐκκλησίας. 5. ἀπόστολοι kal, 


32 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἐκκλησίαι βλέπουσι ζωὴν καὶ θάνατον. 6. vids δούλου λέγει 
παραβολὴν ἐκκλησίᾳ. 7. παραβολὴν λέγομεν καὶ ἐντολὴν καὶ 
νόμον. ὃ. βασιλείας γινώσκετε καὶ ἐκκλησίας. 9. ἐκκλησίαν 
διδάσκει ἀπόστολος καὶ βασιλείαν δοῦλος. 10. νόμον καὶ πα- 
ραβολὴν γράφει ἄνθρωπος ἐκκλησίᾳ. 1]. καρδίαι ἀνθρώπων 
ἔχουσι ζωὴν καὶ εἰρήνην. 12. φωνὴ ἀποστόλων διδάσκει ψυχὰς 
δούλων. 13. ὥρα ἔχει δόξαν. 14. φωναὶ ἐκκλησιῶν διδάσκουσι 
βασιλείας καὶ ἀνθρώπους. 15. βλέπεις δῶρα καὶ δόξαν. 10. 
γράφει ἐκκλησίᾳ λόγον ζωῆς. 17. λέγει καρδίαις ἀνθρώπων 
παραβολὴν καὶ νόμον. 18. γράφει ἐκκλησίᾳ υἱὸς ἀποστόλου. 


II. 1. A kingdom takes glory. 2. Churches are saying 
parables to hearts of men. 3. A heart of a man is teaching 
an apostle, and a voice of an apostle is teaching a 
servant. 4. We have writings of apostles. 5. Churches 
have peace and glory. 6. A day sees life and death 7. 
Apostles take temples and kingdoms. 8. We see houses 
and temples and churches. 9. A servant says a parable to 
hearts of men. 10. We know voices of churches and words 
of truth. 11. A voice of an apostle says a parable to souls 
of men. 


Pe Oe ee ee γον δ ee ΝΥ ἕψῃ ν ὐὐνγ. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON VI 


The Article. Adjectives of the First and Second 
Declension. Agreement. Use of the Article. 
Attributive and Predicate Positions of Adjec- 
tives. Substantive Use of Adjectives. 


60. Vocabulary 
ἀγαθός, ἡ,ὁν, adj., good. κύριος, ὃ, α lord, the Lord. 
ἄλλος,η,ο, adj., other. puKkpos,a,ov, adj., small, little. 
dixatos,a,ov, adj., righteous. _—vexpds,a,0v, adj., dead. 
ἐγείρω, I raise up. | ὁ, ἡ, τό, ατῦὺ., be. 
ἔρημος, ἡ, a desert. ὁδός,ἡ, α road, a way. 
ἔσχατος,η,ον, adj., last. mioTOs,n,ov, adj., farthful. 


Kakos,7,0v, adj., bad. 


KaNos,7,Ov, adj., good, beautiful. πρῶτος, ἡ, ov, adj., first. 


It will be observed that ἔρημος and ὁδός are feminine, 
though nearly all nouns of the second declension ending in 


-os are masculine. 


61. The declension of the adjective ἀγαθός, good, is as 


follows: 
Sing. 

Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. 
.ayabos ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν N.V. ἀγαθοί 
. ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθῆς ἀγαθοῦ G. ἀγαθῶν 
.ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῇ ἀγαθῷ D. ἀγαθοῖς 
. ἀγαθόν ἀγαθήν ἀγαθόν Α. ἀγαθούς 


> ld 


. ἀγαθέ ἀγαθὴ ἀγαθόν 


«».Ὀῶ 2 


Plur. 
Fem. Neut. 


ἀγαθαί ἀγαθά 
ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν 
ἀγαθαῖς ἀγαθοῖς 
ἀγαθάς ἀγαθά 


94 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


This declension, like all declensions of adjectives, and 
of the article, etc., is to be learned across and not in 
vertical columns—that is, the nominative singular is to be 
given in all three genders before the genitive is given, and 
the genitive singular is to be given in all three genders 
before the dative is given, and so on. 

It will be observed that the masculine of the adjective 
ἀγαθός is declined exactly like a masculine noun of the 
second declension, the feminine exactly like a feminine noun 
in 7 of the first declension, and the neuter exactly like a 
neuter noun of the second declension. 


62. Learn the declension of μικρός, small, and of 
δίκαιος, righteous (in §§569, 570). Note that long a not ἢ 
stands in the feminine of these adjectives when the preced- 
ing letter is p or a vowel (compare §55). The accent in the 
genitive plural feminine of all adjectives of the second and 
first declension follows the regular noun rule and not the 
special rule for nouns of the first declension (§51). 


63. The declension of the article is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
Mase. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
N. ὁ ἡ τό N. οἱ αἱ τά 
G τοῦ τῆς τοῦ G. τῶν τῶν τῶν 
τῷ τῇ τῷ D. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 
Α τόν τήν τό ΔΑ. τοὺς τάς τά 


64. The forms 6, ἡ, οἱ, ai are proclitics. A proclitic 
is a word that goes so closely with the following word as 
to have no accent of its own. 


65. Note that except for (1) these irregular proclitic 
forms, (2) the form τό in the nominative and accusative 
singular (instead of τόν), and (3) the absence of the vocative, 
the article is declined like the adjective ἀγαθός. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 35 


66. Agreement 


Adjectives, including the article, agree with the nouns 
that they modify, in gender, number, and case. 


Examples: (1) ὁ λόγος, τοῦ λόγου, τῷ λόγῳ, βλέπω τὸν 
λόγον, οἱ λόγοι, τῶν λόγων, τοῖς λόγοις, βλέπω τοὺς λόγους. 
(2) τὸ δῶρον, τοῦ δώρου, etc. (3) ἡ ὥρα, τῆς ὥρας, τῇ ὥρᾳ, 
βλέπω τὴν ὥραν, ai ὧραι, etc. (4) ἡ ὁδός (see 860), τῆς 
ὁδοῦ, τῇ ὁδῷ, βλέπω τὴν ὁδόν, αἱ ὁδοί, τῶν ὁδῶν, ταῖς ὁδοῖς, 
βλέπω τὰς ὁδούς. (5) καλὸς λόγος, etc., καλὴ ὥρα, καλὴ ὁδός, 
etc. 


67. Use of the Article 


The use of the article in Greek corresponds roughly 
to the use of the definite article in English. Thus λόγος 
means a word; ὁ λόγος means the word; λόγοι means 
words; ot λόγοι means the words. The differences between 
the Greek and the English use of the article must be learned 
by observation, as they occur. For the present, the 
presence or absence of the Greek article should always be 
carefully indicated in the English translation. 


Attributive and Predicate Use of Adjectives 


68. Adjectives are used in two distinct ways: (1) 
attributively, (2) predicatively. 

In the phrase the good word, the adjective good is an 
attributive adjective; it tells what word we are mentioning. 
We are not mentioning all words or any word, but only the 
good word. 

In the sentence, the word is good, the adjective good is a 
predicate adjective; with the verb zs it makes an assertion 
about the subject, the word. 


69. In Greek, the distinction between the attributive 
and the predicate adjective is of vastly more importance 


36 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


than in English; indeed, as will be observed later, some-of — 
the most important.and characteristic parts of Greek gram=. 
mar are based upon this distinction. 


70. The good word can be expressed in two common 
ways in Greek—either by ὁ ἀγαθὸς λόγος or by ὁ λόγος ὁ 
ἀγαθός. It will be observed that what is characteristic ~ 
about this atiributive position of the Greek adjective is that 
the adjective comes immediately after the article. The 
former of the two alternatives, 6 ἀγαθὸς λόγος, is just like 
English; it has the order (1) article, (2) attributive adjec- 
tive, (3) noun, and is a literal translation of the good word. 
The latter of the two alternatives, ὁ λόγος ὁ ἀγαθός, means 
literally the word—namely the good one. But it is of course 
vastly commoner than this cumbersome usage is in English, 
and like 6 ἀγαθὸς λόγος should be translated simply the good 
word. 


71. The word is good can be expressed in two ways in 
Greek—either by ὁ λόγος ἀγαθός or by ἀγαθὸς ὁ λόγος (the 
simple copula, meaning 18, can be omitted). What is char-_ 
acteristic about this predicate position of the adjective in 
Greek is that the adjective does not come immediately after 
the article. 


72. The matter can be summarized as follows: 


Attributive Position 


᾿ ἀγαθὸς λόγος 
of the Adjective 


or = the good word. 
(ὁ λόγος ὁ ἀγαθός 
ὁ λόγος ἀγαθός 
or = the word is good. 
ἀγαθὸς ὁ λόγος 
73. The student should fix this distinction in his mind 
by thoughtful reading aloud of the above and similar 
phrases, until ἀγαθὸς ὁ λόγος, for example, comes to mean to 


Predicate Position 
of the Adjective 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 37 


_ him, even without conscious translation, good (is) the 
word, and comes to be dissociated entirely from the. idea 
the good word. If this advice be heeded, a solid foundation 
_ will have been laid for the mastery of a large part of Greek 
syntax. 
74. It should be observed that the distinction between 
the attributive and the predicate position of the adjective 
can be made in Greek only when the noun has the article. 
ἀγαθὸς λόγος or λόγος ἀγαθός (the noun here not having the 
article) may mean either a good word (attributive) or ὦ 
word 18 good (predicate). 


75. Substantive Use of the Adjective 


The adjective may be used as a noun, especially with the 
article. 

Examples: (1) ἀγαθός may mean a good man; ἀγαθή, a 
good woman; ἀγαθόν, a good thing; ἀγαθοί, good men; 
ἀγαθαί, good women; ἀγαθά, good things. (2) ὁ ἀγαθός 
means the good man; ἡ ἀγαθή, the good woman; τὸ ἀγαθόν, 

the good thing; ot ἀγαθοί, the good men; at ἀγαθαί, the good 
women; τὰ ἀγαθά, the good things. 

Sometimes, in the plural masculine, the English language, 
like Greek, can use the adjective as a noun without adding 
the word men. Thus οἱ ἀγαθοί may be translated the good 
meaning the good men or the good people; οἱ νεκροί, the dead, 
meaning the dead people, etc. 


76. Exercises 

I. 1. ἀγαθὴ ἡ ἐκκλησία καὶ ἡ βασιλεία κακῆ. 2. ἡ κακὴ 
καρδία τῶν ἀνθρώπων γινώσκει θάνατον. 3. οἱ ἀπόστολοι 
βλέπουσι τοὺς μικροὺς οἴκους καὶ τὰς κακὰς ὁδούς. 4. οἱ δοῦ- 
λοι οἱ κακοὶ λύουσι! τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀποστόλου. ὅ. οἱ κακοὶ 


1 λύω sometimes means I destroy. 


38 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


λύουσι τὸ ἱερόν. 6. ὁ κύριος τῆς ζωῆς! ἐγείρει τοὺς νε- 
κρούς. 7. οἱ λόγοι τῆς ἀληθείας διδάσκουσι τοὺς ἄλλους 
ἀποστόλους. 8. οἱ δίκαιοι λαμβάνουσι τὰ δῶρα τοῦ κυρίου 
A) 4 « A 4 \ 3 A \ > , 
τὰ καλά. 9. ὁ κακὸς βλέπει τὴν ἔρημον Kal τοὺς ἐσχάτους 
οἴκους. 10. πρῶτοι οἱ δοῦλοι: ἔσχατοι οἱ κύριοι. 11. τῇ 
ἐκκλησίᾳ τῇ μικρᾷ γράφει ὁ κύριος λόγον ἀγαθόν. 12. τοὺς 
A , bd UA 39 e nN « , 
πιστοὺς βλέπει ὁ πιστός. 13. ἔσχατοι οἱ δοῦλοι οἱ κακοί" 
πρῶτοι οἱ υἱοὶ οἱ ἀγαθοί. 14. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἐσχάτου ἀδελφοῦ 
βλέπει τὰς καλὰς ἐκκλησίας τοῦ κυρίους 15. ἄλλην παραβο- 
λὴν λέγομεν τῇ κακῇ βασιλείᾳ. 10. πρώτη ἡ ἐκκλησία" ἐσ- 
χάτη. ἡ ἄλλη βασιλεία. 17. ταῖς πισταῖς λέγει ὁ κύριος 
παραβολὴν καλὴν καὶ τοῖς πιστοῖς. 18. ὁ ἀγαθὸς γράφει 
ἀγαθά: ὁ κακὸς κακά. 19, ἀγαθὸς ὁ δοῦλος καὶ λέγει καλά. 
20. ἡ ἀλήθεια πιστὴ καὶ ἡ ὥρα κακή. 


II. 1. To the first church the Lord writes the first 
parable. 2. The good woman sees the ways of the desert. 
3. The good things are first and the bad things last. 4. 
Death is bad and lifeis good. 5. The Lord of the kingdom 
raises up the faithful men and the faithful women. 6. The 
good know the bad, and the bad the good. 7. The good 
words we say to the Church, and the bad words we write to 
the brethren. 8. Thou seest the good days of the Lord of 
life. 9. The roads are good and the men bad. 10. The first 
gift is last and the last (gift) first. 11. The good servants 
know the truth and the glory of the Lord. 12. The last day 
takes the bad servants. 13. The men are destroying the 
beautiful temples and the small houses. 14. The righteous 
have another house. 15. The church is taking the other 
house. 16. I know the other ways. 17. The Lord is saying 
the other parable to the first church. 


1 Abstract nouns, and nouns such as ζωῆ, often have the article 
where it is omitted in English. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 39 


LESSON VII 
Masculine Nouns of the First Declension 
Prepositions 

77- Vocabulary 
ἄγγελος, ὁ, an angel, a mes- κόσμος, 6, a world. 

senger. λίθος, ὁ, a stone. 
ἄγω, I lead. μαθητής, ὁ, a disciple. 
ἀπό, prep. with gen., from. μένω, I remain. 


βάλλω, 1 throw, I cast, I put. pera, prep. with gen., with; 
j διά, prep. with gen., through; with acc., after. 


with acc., on account of. οὐρανός, 6, heaven. 
eis, prep. with acc., znto. ! πέμπω, I send. 
ἐκ (ἐξ before vowels), prep. πρός, prep. with acc., to. 
with gen., out of. προφήτης, ὃ, a prophet. 
ἐν, prep. with dat., in. τέκνον, τό, a child. 


θεός, ὁ, a god,God (When it ° ,Τόπος, 6, a place. 
means God, θεός may have 
the article). φέρω, I bear, I bring. 


78. Nouns of the first declension ending in -ys are 
masculine. 


79. The declension of προφήτης, ὃ, a prophet, is as 


follows: 
Sing. Plur. 
N. προφήτης N. V. προφῆται 
G. προφήτου G. προφητῶν 
1). προφήτῃ D. προφήταις 
A. προφήτην Α. προφήτας 
V. προφῆτα 


40 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


It will be observed that although προφήτης is masculine 
it is a true first-declension noun, being just like a feminine 
noun of the first declension except in the nominative, 
genitive, and vocative singular. 


μαθητής is declined like προφήτης, except for the accent. 


Prepositions 


80. Prepositions express relationship. Thus in the sen- 
tence, the book is in the desk, the preposition 7n expresses a 
certain relationship between the book and the desk. In the 
sentence, the book 18 on the desk, a different relationship is 
expressed (by the preposition on). 

In English, nouns standing after prepositions are always 
in the same case (the ‘objective’ case). But in Greek 
different prepositions take different cases. 


81. The preposition ἐν, meaning in, always takes the 
dative case. Thus zn the house is expressed by ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ ; 
in the truth by ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, etc. The preposition εἰς, 
meaning znto, on the other hand, always takes the accusa- 
tive. Thus into the house is expressed by eis τὸν οἶκον. 
Finally, the preposition ἀπό always takes the genitive. 
Thus from the house is expressed by ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴκου. 


82. These three prepositions illustrate the general prin- 
ciple that the genitive is the case of separation, the dative 
the case of rest if a place, ‘and the accusative the case_of 
motion toward a place. Prepositions expressing separation 
naturally take the genitive, prepositions expressing rest in a 
place naturally take the dative, and prepositions expressing 
motion toward a place naturally take the accusative. 


83. But a very great number of usages of prepositions 
cannot be reduced to any such general rule. Thus many 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 41 


prepositions that do not express any idea of separation take 
the genitive. 


84. It should be observed that ἐν, eis, and ἐκ are all 
proclitics (see § 64). 


85. ἐν, eis, ἐκ, and ἀπό each take only one case, and 
πρός 15 not commonly used with any case except the ac- 
cusative. But many other prepositions take several cases. 
Those that take several cases often have quite a different 
meaning when used with one case from their meaning when 
used with another case. Thus διά with the genitive means 
through; διά with accusative, on account of: μετά with the 
genitive means with; μετά with the accusative, after. 


86. In studying the vocabularies it is quite insufficient 
to learn how the prepositions are to be translated, but it is 
also necessary to learn with what case they are construed 
in any particular meaning. Thus it is quite insufficient to 
say that ἐν means πη. What should rather be said is that 
*‘éy-with-the-dative” means in. The phrase “éy-with-the- 
dative’ should form in the student’s mind one absolutely 
indivisible idea; ἐν should never be thought of apart from its: 
case. In the same way, but still more obviously, it is 
insufficient to say that μετά means with or after. What 
should rather be said is that ‘werd-with-the-genitive’’ 
means with, and that ‘“‘ywerd-with-the-accusative” means 
after. This same method of study should be applied to all 
prepositions. 


87. A further important principle is that of precision in 
learning the meanings of prepositions. It is true that no 
one English word or phrase is capable of translating in all in- 
stances a single Greek preposition. Sometimes, for example, 
ἐν with the dative cannot be translated by zn in English. 
But the proper method is to learn first the usual meaning 


42 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


before proceeding to the unusual. A reversal of this 
method will lead to hopeless confusion. Let the student, 
therefore, so far as prepositions are concerned, adhere for 
the present rigidly to the translations given in the vocabu- 
laries. In that way a feeling for the really fundamental 
meaning of the prepositions will be formed, and further on 
the derived meanings can be studied without confusion. 


88. Finally, the importance of this subject should be 
noticed. Few things are more necessary for a correct under- 
standing of the New Testament than a precise acquaint- 
ance with the common prepositions. The prepositions 
therefore should always be singled out from the vocabularies 
for special attention, and when new prepositions are 
learned the old ones should be reviewed. 


89. Exercises 


I. 1. οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν προφητῶν μένουσιν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ. 
2. οἱ κακοὶ βάλλουσιν λίθους εἰς τὸν οἶκον τῶν μαθητῶν. 38. 
ὁ θεὸς πέμπει τοὺς ἀγγέλους εἰς τὸν κόσμον. 4. ὁ προφήτης 
πέμπει τοὺς μαθητὰς τοῦ κυρίου ἐκ τῶν οἴκων εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν. 
ὃ. ὁ θεὸς ἐγείρει τοὺς νεκροὺς ἐκ θανάτου. 6. λαμβάνετε τὰ 
καλὰ δῶρα ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων. 7. ἄγομεν τὰ τέκνα ἐκ τῶν οἴκων. 
8. μετὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους πέμπει ὁ θεὸς τὸν υἱόν. 9. μετὰ τῶν 
3 , 4 ς , \ , Ψ A 9 A Ψ 
ἀγγέλων ἄγει ὁ κύριος τοὺς δικαίους εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν. 10. διὰ 
τῶν ὁδῶν τῆς ἐρήμου φέρουσιν οἱ δοῦλοι τὰ δῶρα εἰς ἄλλον 
τόπον. 1]. διὰ τῶν γραφῶν τῶν προφητῶν γινώσκομεν τὸν 
\ A [2 mn a“ 3 , e , ‘ 
κύριον. 12. διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐγείρει ὁ κύριος τοὺς νε- 

, je \ \ 9 \ 9 ς 
κρούς. 13. φέρουσιν τοὺς νεκροὺς εἰς τὴν ἔρημον. 14. οἱ 
μαθηταὶ διδάσκουσι τὰ ἀγαθὰ τέκνα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ. 15. ὁ 
κύριος λέγει παραβολὴν τοῖς μαθηταῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ. 16. διὰ 
τὴν ἀλήθειαν βλέπουσιν οἱ προφῆται τὸν θάνατον. 17. ἀπὸ 
τῆς ἐρήμου ἄγουσιν οἱ μαθηταὶ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς δούλους καὶ τοὺς 
υἱοὺς τῶν προφητῶν πρὸς τοὺς μικροὺς οἴκους τῶν μαθητῶν. 


7 
’ 
‘ 
ἢ 
: 
: 
Ἷ 
: 
" 
᾿ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 43 


18. διὰ τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ φέρομεν τὰ κακά. 19. διὰ 
τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἀδελφῶν βλέπει κακά. 20. καλὸς ὁ οὐρανός" 
κακὸς O κόσμος. 


II. 1. 1ὰ the world we have death, and in the Church 
life. 2. The prophets lead the righteous disciples of the 
Lord into the way of the desert. 3. The child is throwing 
a stone into the little house. 4. The man is saying a good 
word to the disciples and is leading the disciples to the 
Lord.! 5. The disciples are remaining in the church and 
are saying a parable to the other prophets. 6. Through 
the voice of the prophet the Lord is teaching the disciples. 
7. On account of the Church the disciples and the apostles 
write good words to the brethren. 8. On account of the 
children the prophet is sending the evil men into the desert. 
9. After the Lord the apostle sees the disciple. 10. The 
prophets are teaching the disciples with the children. 11. 
They are bringing the disciples to the Lord. 12. The Lord 
is remaining with the prophet in another place. 13. The 
righteous are leading the disciples through the desert to the 
Lord. 14. We see the days of the Son of God in the evil 
world. 15. Evil are the days; good are the churches. 16. 
Through the word of the Lord, God raises the dead. 


_1Care should be taken to distinguish the two ways in which the Eng- 
lish word ¢o is used in this sentence. 


44 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON VIII 


Enclitics. Personal Pronouns. Present Indicative of εἰμί. 


90. Vocabulary 
αὐτός, ἡ, 0, pron., he. éyw, pron., 1. 
δέ, conj., but, and. εἰμί, 1 am. 


σύ, pron., thou. 


91. The conjunction 6€is postpositive—that is, it cannot 
stand first in its clause. Ordinarily it stands second. 

Example: ὁ δοῦλος γινώσκει TOV ἀπόστολον, ὁ δὲ ἀπόστολος 
βλέπει τὸν κύριον, the servant knows the apostle and the 
apostle sees the Lord. 


Enclitics 


92. An enclitic is a word that goes so closely with the 
preceding word as to have normally no accent of its own. 

Enclitics are thus to be distinguished from proclitics, 
which go so closely with the following words as to have no 
accent of their own (see §64). Proclitics give rise to no 
special rules of accent; they simply have no accent and 
produce no changes in the accenting of preceding or follow- 
ing words. But the case is very different with enclitics, 
which give rise to the following rules: 


I. Accenting of the word before an enclitic: 


(1) The word before an enclitic does not change an 
acute on the last syllable to a grave. 


Example: ἀδελφὸς μου is incorrect; ἀδελφός μου 15 correct. 
(2) If the word before an enclitic has an acute on the 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 45 


antepenult, or a circumflex on the penult, it takes an addi- 
tional accent (an acute) on the ultima. 

Examples: ἄνθρωπός pov, δῶρόν σου, ἄνθρωπός ἐστιν, 
δῶρόν ἐστιν. 

(3) Ifthe word before an enclitic is itself a proclitic or an 
enclitic it has an acute on the ultima. 

Examples: εἴς με, ἄνθρωπός pov ἐστιν. 


\ 


II. Cases in which an enclitic has an accent of its 
own: 


(1) An enclitic of two syllables retains its own accent 
when it follows a word that has an acute on the penult. 


Example: ὥρα ἐστίν is correct because ἐστίν is an enclitic 
of two syllables. ὥρα μου, on the other hand, is correct be- 
cause μου is an enclitic of only one syllable. 


(2) An enclitic retains its accent when there is empha- 
sis on the enclitic or when the enclitic begins a clause. 


93. It may help to fix these rules in the memory, if the 
enclitic in every case be regarded as forming one word with 
the word that precedes it and then the general rules of 
accent be applied. ‘These enclitic rules may then be re- 
garded as attempts to avoid violations of the general rules. 
Thus if ἄνθρωποσεστιν or ἄνθρωποσμου or ἄνθρωποσμε be 
regarded as one word the accenting of that word violates 
the general rule that the accent cannot get further back than 
the antepenult; and δῶρονμου violates the general rule 
that the circumflex cannot get further back than the penult. 
Something, therefore, needs to be done. And what is 
actually done is to put in an additional accent to break up 
the long series of unaccented syllables. Following out a 
similar principle, the accent of ὥραεστιν would become 
ὥράεστιν. But two acutes were not desired in immediate 
juxtaposition in a single word. Therefore in this case an 


40 NEW TESTAMENT 


GREEK 


alternative way out of the difficulty was adopted, and the 
enclitic was made to retain its own accent. 

It should be observed, however, that this way of con- 
sidering the matter will not quite work out in all cases; for 
ὥραμου, for example, would violate the general rule that the 
accent cannot stand on the antepenult if the ultima is long. 


Personal Pronouns 


04. The declension of the personal pronoun of the first 


person is as follows: 


Sing. 
N. ἐγώ, I. N 
G. ἐμοῦ or μου, of me. G. 
1). ἐμοί or pot, to or for me. D 
A. ἐμέ or pe, me. A 


Plur. 


. ἡμεῖς, WE. 


ἡμῶν, of US. 


. ἡμῖν, to or for us. 
. ἡμᾶς, US. 


The forms ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, éué.are the forms used when 
emphasis is desired. The unemphatic forms, pov, μοι, με, 


are enclitic. 


95. The declension of the personal pronoun of the second 


person is as follows: 


Sing. 
N. σύ, thou. 
G. σοῦ, of thee. 
D. σοί, to or for thee. 
A. σέ, thee. 


ΞΘ 2 


The forms σοῦ, σοί, and σέ are enclitic except when they 
are emphatic. When they are emphatic, they aaa the 


accents given in the paradigm. 


Plur. 


. ὑμεῖς, Ye. 

. ὑμῶν, of you. 

. ὑμῖν, to or for you. 
ὑμᾶς, you. 


ES ae ee Te ae Oe μα 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 47 


96. ‘The declension of the personal pronoun of the third 
person is as follows: 


Sing. 
M. Ἐ, Ν. 
Ν. αὐτός, he. αὐτή, she. αὐτό, τί. 
G. αὐτοῦ, of him. αὐτῆς, of her. αὐτοῦ, of τί. 
1). αὐτῷ, toorforhim. αὐτῇ, to or for her. αὐτῷ, toorfor τί. 
A. αὐτόν, him. αὐτήν, her. αὐτό, τί. 
Plur. 
M. ΕΒ, Ν. 
N. αὐτοί, they. αὐταί, they. αὐτά, they. 
G. αὐτῶν, of them. αὐτῶν, of them. αὐτῶν, of them. 
1). αὐτοῖς, to or for αὐταῖς, to or for αὐτοῖς, to or for 
them. them. them. 
A. αὐτούς, them. αὐτάς, them. αὐτά, them. 


It will be observed that the declension of αὐτός is like 
that of ἀγαθός (omitting the vocative), except for the form 
- avroin the nominative and accusative singular neuter. 


97. The Use of Pronouns 


(1) A pronoun is a word that stands instead of a noun. 

Example: The sentence, J see the disciple and teach him, 
means the same thing as I see the disciple and teach the dis- 
ciple. The pronoun him stands instead of the second occur- 
rence of the noun disciple. 

(2) The noun for which a pronoun stands is called its 
antecedent. 

Thus in the sentence, I see the disciple and teach him, the 
antecedent of him is disciple. 

(3) A pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and 
number. 


48 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Examples: 

\a) βλέπω τὸν μαθητὴν καὶ διδάσκω αὐτόν, I see the disci- 
ple and teach him. Here μαθητὴν is the antecedent of αὐτόν, 
and since μαθητὴν is of masculine gender and singular num- 
ber αὐτόν also is masculine singular. 

(Ὁ) μένω ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ καὶ γινώσκω αὐτόν, I remain in the 
house and know it. Here οἴκῳ is the antecedent of αὐτόν, 
and since οἴκῳ is of masculine gender and singular number 
αὐτόν also is masculine singular. In English the neuter 
pronoun 1} is used, because the noun house, like all nouns 
denoting inanimate objects, is neuter in English. But in 
Greek the word for house is masculine, and therefore the 
masculine pronoun is used in referring to it. Hence the 
translations, he, she, etc., given in the paradigm above for 
the masculine and feminine of the Greek pronoun of the 
third person are correct only when the antecedents are 
nouns denoting persons. In other cases, the pronouns will 
be neuter in English even when they are masculine or 
feminine in Greek. It will be observed, further, that the 
pronoun does not agree with its antecedent in case, but 
only in gender and number. In the sentence just given the 
antecedent οἴκῳ is dative after the preposition ἐν, whereas 
αὐτόν has its own construction, being the object of the verb 
γινώσκω. 

(c) ἡ ἐκκλησία διδάσκει ἐμέ, καὶ ἔγὼ διδάσκω αὐτήν, the 
Church teaches me and I teach tt. 

(d) βλέπω τοὺς μαθητὰς Kal διδάσκω αὐτούς, I see the dis- 
ciples and teach them. 

(6) βλέπω τὰ τέκνα Kal διδάσκω αὐτά, I see the children 
and teach them. It will be observed that in English in the 
plural the personal pronoun is the same in form for all 
three genders, whereas in Greek it varies. 


(| (4) The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative 
|\case unless there is emphasis upon them. 


ee ee ee eee 


7 eee “ὐν ἡ, 


_ 


EE Se a re ae 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 49 


(a) The reason for this rule is that the ending of the verb 
indicates sufficiently whether the subject is first, second, or 
third person. Thus λέγω means 1 say. The ἐγώ, there- 
fore, is not put in unless there is emphasis upon it. 


| (b) Emphasis is usually caused by contrast. Thus in 
| the sentence ἐγὼ λέγω, σὺ δὲ γράφεις, ] say, but you write, 
eyw and ov are emphatic because they are contrasted with 
each other. And in the sentence ἐγὼ λέγω, “1 say,’ the 
natural inference is that some one else does not say. The 
insertion of the emphatic ἐγώ naturally suggests an implied 
(though here not an expressed) contrast. 


(c) αὐτός is almost never used as a personal pronoun in 
the nominative case. The place of it, in the nominative, 15. 
taken usually by certain other words, and it itself has in the | 
nominative case a use distinct from its use as a personal || 
pronoun. These matters will be reserved for future study. 

(5) To express possession the unemphatic forms of the 
personal pronouns should be used, and the English phrases 
my word and the like should be turned around into the form, 
the word of me, before they are translated into Greek. 

Examples: My word, ὁ λόγος μου; thy word, ὁ λόγος σου; 
his word, ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ; her word, ὁ λόγος αὐτῆς; 18 word, 

ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ; their word, 6 λόγος αὐτῶν. 

If it is desired to emphasize the possessive idea—e. g., | 
“my word’’—a possessive adjective, which will be learned | 
later, is ordinarily used instead of the genitive of the per- | 
sonal pronoun. | 


(6) After prepositions, the emphatic forms of the personal 
pronouns are ordinarily used. 

Examples: ἐξ ἐμοῦ, not ἔκ μου ; am’ éuod,! not ἀπό μου; δι᾽ 
ἐμοῦ, not διά pov; ἐν ἐμοί, not ἔν μοι. But πρός με is com- 
mon. 


1The final vowel of prepositions is frequently elided before words 
that begin with a vowel. ‘The elision is marked by an apostrophe. 


δ0 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Present Indicative of εἰμί 


08. The present indicative of the verb εἰμί, J am,is as 
follows: 


Sing. 1. eiui, Lam. Plur. 1. ἐσμέν, we are. 
2. εἶ, thou art. 2. éoré, yeare. 
ὃ. ἐστί(ν), he 18. 3. εἰσί(ν), they are. 


All these forms except εἶ are enclitic. The accents given 
in the paradigm occur only when required by the rules given 
above in §92. 

ἐστί(ν) and εἰσί(ν) have the movable ν (see §44). 


99. The verb εἰμί takes a predicate nominative, not an 
accusative, to complete its meaning. 

fxamples: ὁ ἀπόστολος ἄνθρωπός ἐστιν, the apostle is a 
man; 6 ἀπόστολός ἐστιν ἀγαθός, the apostle is good. 

In the sentence, the apostle says the word, it is asserted 
that the apostle does something to the word; the word is 
therefore the object of the action denoted by the verb, and 
stands in the accusative case. But in the sentence, the 
apostle is a man, it is not asserted that the apostle does any- 
thing toa man. A man, therefore, stands here not in the 
accusative case but in the predicate nominative. 


100. Exercises 


I. 1. of μαθηταί cov γινώσκουσι τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ 
ἄγουσι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν εἰς αὐτήν. 2. διδάσκω τοὺς ἀδελ- 
gots μου καὶ λέγω αὐτοῖς παραβολήν. 3. ἄγει ὁ κύριός μου 
πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ. 4. δι᾽ ἐμὲ βλέπεις σὺ τὸν θάνατον, 
σοὶ δὲ ἔγὼ λέγω λόγους κακούς. ὅ. διὰ σοῦ ἄγει ὁ θεὸς τοὺς 
πιστοὺς εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ καὶ dv’ αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄλλους. 
6. δι᾿ ἡμᾶς μένει ὁ κύριος ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ. 7. ἔγὠ εἰμι δοῦλος, σὺ 
δὲ ἀπόστολος. 8. ἀγαθός ἐστιν ὁ κύριος καὶ ἀγαθοί ἐστε 


se 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 51 


ὑμεῖς. 9. μαθηταί ἐστε τοῦ κυρίου καὶ ἀδελφοὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων 
αὐτοῦ. 10. ὁ ἀπόστολος πιστός ἐστιν, οἱ δὲ δοῦλοι αὐτοῦ κα- 
κοί. Ll. ἡ ἐκκλησία πιστή ἐστιν, ἡμεῖς δὲ βλέπομεν αὐτήν. 
12. βλέπομέν σε καὶ λέγομέν σοι παραβολήν. 18. δοῦλοι ἐσμέν, 
δούλους δὲ διδάσκομεν. 14. οἱ δοῦλοι ἡμῶν βλέπουσιν ἡμᾶς, 
ἡμεῖς δὲ διδάσκομεν αὐτούς. 15. ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν! λαμβάνει ὁ ἀδελ- 
φός μου δῶρα καλά, καὶ πέμπει αὐτὰ πρός με διὰ τῶν δούλων 
αὐτοῦ. 10. γινώσκομεν τὴν ὁδόν, καὶ δι᾽ αὐτῆς ἄγομέν σε εἰς 
τὸν οἶκον ἡμῶν. 17. μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἡμῶν βλέπομεν τοὺς 
μαθητὰς τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν. 18. μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας τὰς κακὰς 
βλέπομεν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν. 19. μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν" 
βλέπεις αὐτόν. 20. μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐσμεν ἐν τοῖς οἴκοις ὑμῶν. 


II. 1. Your servants are in the house of the Lord. 2. 
My house is in the desert. 3. The prophet knows his dis- 
ciples and brings them into his houses. 4. Through my 
word ye have glory. 5. On account of our children ye see 
evil days. 6. In our days the world is evil. 7. God knows 
our souls and brings them out of death. 8. Ye are our sons 
and we are your disciples. 9. We are in the kingdom of 
God with Thy faithful disciples. 10. We say a parable to 
thee, but thou sayest another word to us. 11. The way is 
bad, but we lead the children in it. 12. My brother takes 
gifts from you, but ye write an evil word to him. 13. My 
house is bad, but your disciples bring the children out of it. 
14. My disciples are leading their brethren to me. 15. I 
see and know my sons and lead them to my Lord. 16. God 
knows his Church and leads it out of death into his kingdom. 
17. Thy commandments are good and righteous, and lead 
us into life. 18. Our Lord is sending His apostles to me. 
19. We are sending our servants into your house, but ye are 
taking our gifts from us. 20. Ye are good, but your dis- 
ciples are evil. 

1 Before the rough breathing, the 7 of ἀπ᾽ becomes @. 

2 Before the rough breathing, τ of μετ᾽ becomes θ, 


52 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
LESSON IX 
Demonstrative Pronouns. Further Uses of αὐτός. 

101. . Vocabulary 

9 , e “ ; 

ἀγάπη, ἡ, love. νῦν, adv., now. | 

ἁμαρτία, ἡ, a sin, sin. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, Dron., ι 

βαπτίζω, I baptize. this. | 

διδάσκαλος, ὁ, a teacher. οὕτως, adv., thus, so. ; 

ἐκεῖνος, ἢ, 0, pron., that. πονηρός, a, ov, adj., evil. : 

ἐπαγγελία, ἡ, a promise. πρόσωπον, τό, a face. : 

εὐαγγέλιον, τό, a gospel. | 

κρίνω, I judge. χαρά, ἡ, JOY. ; 
ὲ 


102. ‘Th declension of οὗτος, this, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M. Ee N. M. Te N. 
οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο. οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 


Ν 
“ , Uj U ld , 
τούτου ταὐύτης τούτου G. τούτων τούτων τούτων 
τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ D. τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο A. τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα 


Pan Sle 


The puzzling variations between ov and av in the first 
syllable of this word may be fixed in the memory if it be 
observed that an o-vowel (in the diphthong ov) stands in 
the first syllable where an o-vowel (0 or the long of it, w) 
stands in the second syllable, and an a-vowel (in the diph- 
thong av) stands in the first syllable where an a-vowel (a or 
the closely related vowel η) stands in the second syllable. 


103. The declension of ἐκεῖνος, that, is like the declension 
of adjectives in -os,-7,-ov, except that ἐκεῖνο stands instead of 
ἐκεῖνον in the nominative and accusative singular neuter. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 53 


104. Use of οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος 


1. οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος are frequently used with nouns. 
When they are so used, the noun with which they are used 
has the article, and they themselves stand in the predicate, 
not in the attributive, position (see §§68-74). 

Examples: This word, οὗτος ὁ λόγος or ὁ λόγος οὗτος; that 
word, ἐκεῖνος ὁ λόγος or ὁ λόγος ἐκεῖνος; I see this church, 
βλέπω ταύτην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν (or τὴν ἐκκλησίαν ταὐτην); these 
words, οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι ΟΥ̓ οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι; those words, ἐκεῖνοι οἱ 
λόγοι or οἱ λόγοι ἐκεῖνοι; this good word, οὗτος ὁ καλὸς λόγος 
Or ὁ καλὸς λόγος οὗτος. 

2. οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος are frequently used by themselves, 
without nouns. 

Examples: οὗτος, this man (or this person); αὕτη, this 
woman; τοῦτο, this thing; οὗτοι, these men; αὗται, these 
women ; ταῦτα, these things. 


105. Further Uses of αὐτός. 


In addition to its use as a personal pronoun of the third 
person, αὐτός is also used as follows: 

1. It has an intensive use with nouns. When so used 
it stands in the predicate position. 

Examples: αὐτὸς ὁ ἀπόστολος or ὁ ἀπόστολος αὐτός, the 
apostle himself; αὐτὴ ἡ ἐκκλησία or ἡ ἐκκλησία αὐτή, the 
church itself ; αὐτὸ τὸ δῶρον or τὸ δῶρον αὐτό, the gift rtself. 

2. It is often used with nouns to mean same. When so 
used it stands in the attributive position. 

Examples: ὁ αὐτὸς ἀπόστολος OY 6 ἀπόστολος ὁ αὐτός, the 
same apostle ; ἡ αὐτὴ ἐκκλησία or ἡ ἐκκλησία ἡ αὐτή, the same 
church, etc. 

3. In its intensive use it often goes with pronouns or with 
the unexpressed subject of a verb. 

Examples: αὐτὸς ἔγὼ λέγω or αὐτὸς λέγω, I myself say; 


δ4 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


αὐτὸς σὺ λέγεις or αὐτὸς λέγεις, thou thyself sayest; αὐτὸς 
λέγει, he himself says; αὐτὴ λέγει, she herself says; αὐτὸ 
λέγει, τὶ 2tself says; αὐτοὶ ἡμεῖς λέγομεν or αὐτοὶ λέγομεν, 
we ourselves say; αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς λέγετε OF αὐτοὶ λέγετε, Ye ψοιιγ- 
selves say ; αὐτοὶ λέγουσιν, they themselves say. 


106. The principal uses of adjectives and of the pro- 
nouns studied thus far may be reviewed as follows: 


ὁ καλὸς λόγος. 
or 


ε 


ὁ λόγος ὁ καλός. 


The good word 


la 


καλὸς ὁ λόγος. 
or 
ὁ λόγος καλός. 


The word 18 good = 


wwe ae 


οὗτος ὁ λόγος. 
or 
ὁ λόγος οὗτος. 


This word zee 


pee 


ἐκεῖνος ὁ λόγος. 
or 
ὁ λόγος ἐκεῖνος. 


ie ὁ λόγος. 


That word τὸς 


The word ttself or 


ὁ λόγος αὐτός. 


ὁ αὐτὸς λόγος. 
The same word = 


My word = ὁ λόγος μου. 
His word = ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ. 
I see him = βλέπω αὐτόν. 
I see this man = βλέπω τοῦτον. 


I see these things = βλέπω ταῦτα. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 55 


107. Exercises 


I. 1. οὗτοι οἱ διδάσκαλοι κρίνουσιν αὐτὸν τὸν ἀπόστολον. 

2 e \ > \ 4 7 \ > \ \ 3 ign , 

. ὁ δὲ αὐτὸς διδάσκαλος ἔχει τὴν αὐτὴν χαρὰν ἐν TH καρδίᾳ 
αὐτοῦ. ὅ. νῦν λαμβάνω αὐτὸς τὸ αὐτὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἀπὸ τοῦ 
κυρίου μου. 4. οὗτος βλέπει ἐκεῖνον καὶ κρίνει αὐτόν. ὅ. 
μετὰ ταῦτα ἔχετε αὐτοὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ κυρίου ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις 
ὑμῶν. 6. οὗτοι ἔχουσι χαράν, ἐκεῖνοι δὲ ἔχουσιν ἁμαρτίαν. 
7. αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἡ φωνὴ τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ. 8. οὕτως γινώ- 
σκομεν τοῦτον καὶ βλέπομεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ. 9. λαμβά- 
νομεν ταῦτα τὰ δῶρα ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ καὶ βλέπομεν αὐτόν. 10. 
αὐτὸς βαπτίζεις ἐκεῖνον καὶ εἶ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ. Il. εἰς τὴν 
αὐτὴν ἐκκλησίαν ἄγομεν τούτους τοὺς διδασκάλους ἡμῶν τοὺς 
ἀγαθούς. 12. αὐτὸς ἔγὼ ἔχω ταύτην τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ 
κυρίου μου. 13. αὕτη βλέπει τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῆς. 
14. αὐτὴ γινώσκει αὐτὴν τὴν ἀλήθειαν. 15. ἀγαθή ἐστιν ἡ 
3 , 3 > \ o bd ᾿ ᾽ a , 9 
ἐπαγγελία σου καὶ ἀγαθὴ εἶ αὐτή. 10. ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν μαθη- 
ταὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ διδασκάλου. 17. οὗτός ἐστιν διδάσκαλος 
3 , 2 “ A t - td \ 9 \ 
ἐκείνου, ἐκεῖνος δὲ τούτου. 18. οὗτος διδάσκει τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς 

A 9 la 3 3 U \ \ ΜΕ ? 3 , 4 
καὶ αὐτός ἐστιν ἀγαθός. 19. μετὰ Tas ἡμέρας ἐκείνας διδά- 
σκαλοί ἐσμεν τούτων τῶν δούλων. 20. μετὰ τῶν πιστῶν 
3 > , 9 , ε Ne A lA e@ , 
ἔχομεν ἐπαγγελίας ἀγαθάς, of δὲ πονηροὶ βλέπουσιν ἡμέρας 
κακάς. 


II. 1. These churches know the Lord Himself. 2. The 
same disciples know Him and see Hisface. 3. Those teach- 
ers Judge the same churches and lead them into the same 
joy. 4. We ourselves have this sin in our hearts. 5. This 
is the love of our God. 6. These are the faithful churches of 
our Lord. 7. The apostle himself baptizes his brothers and 
leads them to thee. 8. Through this gospel we have life. 
9. On account of these teachers we see death. 10. He 
Himself knows us and from Him we receive this promise. 
11. On account of the same gospel we ourselves send these 
apostles to you. 12. Into this world he sends the Lord him- 


56 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


self. 13. I see this man and the brethren see him. 14. 
Now we are baptizing those disciples of our Lord and are 
sending the same disciples into the desert. 14. My dis- 
ciples know my voice and bring these things to me. 15. 
Through these things we bring the same gospel into the 
same world. 16. We are disciples of the Lord, but ye are 
disciples of the evil one. 17. Thissin leads our children into 
death. 18. The sins of these churches are leading other 
men into the same sins. 19. His disciples have this sin in 
their hearts and are teaching men so. 20. I know the sins 
of the disciples and the disciples themselves. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 57 


LESSON X 


Present Middle and Passive Indicative. ὑπό with the 
Genitive. The Dative of Means. Deponent Verbs. Com- 
pound Verbs. The Position of ov. Various Cases with 
Verbs. 


108. Vocabulary 


ἀλλά, conj., but (stronger διέρχομαι, dep., I go through. 
adversative than δέ). εἰσέρχομαι, dep., I go in, I 
ἀκούω, 1 hear (may take the enter. 
genitive, but also takes ἔρχομαι, dep., I come, I go. 


the accusative). ὅτι, conj., that, because. 
ἁμαρτωλός, ὁ, a sinner. — ov (οὐκ before vowels, οὐχ 
ἀποκρίνομαι, dep., I answer before the rough breath- 
(takes the dative). ing), proclitic, not. 
apxw, I rule (takes the gen- πορεύομαι, dep., I go. 
itive); middle, I begin. σώζω, I save. 
γίνομαι, dep., I become (takes ὑπό, prep. with gen., by (ex- 
a predicate nominative, pressing agent); with ac- 
not an accusative). cusative, under. 


109. There are three voices in Greek: active, middle and 
passive. 

The active and the passive voices are used as in English. 

The middle voice represents the subject as acting in 
some way that concerns itself, or as acting upon some- 
thing that belongs to itself. 

(1) Rarely the middle has the force which a verb followed 
by a reflexive pronoun in the objective case has in English. 
Thus λούω means 1 wash, and λούομαι means 1 wash myself. 


58 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


But usually the force of the middle is much more subtle. 
Sometimes, therefore, it is impossible to make any differ- 
ence in an English translation between active and middle. 
In the case of some verbs, on the other hand, the differ- 
ence in meaning is so great that in an English translation 
it is necessary to use one verb for the active and an entirely 
different verb for the middle. For example, ἄρχω means 
7 rule, and ἄρχομαι (middle) means I begin. 


(2) The middle of λύω does not occur in the New 
Testament. But it is very important to learn it, since it 
will enable the student to recognize the middle of other 
verbs. The translations given in the paradigms for the 
middle of λύω serve to indicate, in a rough sort of way, the 
fundamental meaning of the middle voice, rather than the 
actual meaning of the middle voice of this particular verb. 


(3) In the present tense the middle and passive voices 
are exactly alike in form, though in certain other tenses 
they are entirely distinct. In the exercises in this lesson, 
the forms which might be either middle or ‘passive should 
be regarded as passive. 


110. The Present Middle Indicative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 

1. λύομαι, TL loose (or 1. λυόμεθα, we loose (or 
am loosing) are loosing) 
for myself. for ourselves. 

2. λύῃ, thou loosest 2. λύεσθε, ye loose (or 

»(or art loosing) are loosing) 
for thyself. for yourselves. 


3. λύεται, helooses (oris 8. λύονται, they loose (or 
loosing) for are loosing) 
himself. for themselves. 


“ 
ἂν Ser 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 59 


111. The personal endings in the middle and passive of 
the so-called primary tenses are -μαι, -σαι, -Tat, -μεθα, -σθε, 
-vrat. Between the stem and the personal endings is 
placed, in the present tense, the variable vowel o /e (o stand- 
ing before μ and ν, ε before other letters). The second per- 
son singular, λύῃ, is a shortened form instead of λύεσαι. 


112. The Present Passive Indicative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. λύομαι, TL am being 1. λυόμεθα, we are being 
loosed. loosed. 
2. Avy, thou art 2. λύεσθε, ye are being 
being loosed. loosed. 
3. λύεται, hers beiny 3. λύονται, they are being 
loosed. loosed. 


113. The present active indicative, Avw, it will be re- 
membered, can be translated either I loose or I am loosing. 
The passive of I loose, in English, is I am loosed; the passive 
of I am loosing is I am being loosed. Both I am loosed 
and I am being loosed might, therefore, have been given 
in the translation of λύομαι (passive). But I am loosed 
is so ambiguous that the student is advised, at least in the 
earlier lessons, to adopt the alternative translation. J am 
loosed may mean I am now in a loosed condition, in which 
case it indicates a present state resultant upon a past action 
and would be translated, not by the present tense, but by 
the perfect tense in Greek. 

Example: σώζομαι means I am being saved. It repre- 
sents the action as taking place at the present time. It 
could also be translated J am saved in such a sentence as 
every day I am saved from some new trouble. Here I am 


1An alternative form for λύῃ is λύει. But the former seems to be 
preferred in the New Testament. 


00 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


saved is present because it indicates customary action. 
But in the majority of cases 1 am saved means I am in a 
saved condition resultant upon an action that took place in 
the past. And in these cases the English sentence I am 
saved would be translated by the perfect tense, not by the 
present tense in Greek. It will be seen, therefore, that the 
translation I am loosed for λύομαι, though it is not wrong 
(since λύομαι may sometimes be translated in this way), 
would be misleading. 


114. ὑπό with the Genitive 


The preposition ὑπό with the genitive expresses the 
agent by which an action is performed. This usage occurs 
principally with the passive voice. 

Example: ὁ ἀπόστολος λύει τὸν δοῦλον means the apos- 
tle looses the servant. If the same thought be expressed 
by the passive voice, the object of the active verb becomes 
the subject of the passive and the subject of the active 
verb becomes ὑπό with the genitive. Thus ὁ δοῦλος λύεται 
ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀποστόλου means the servant is being loosed by the 
apostle. 


115. The Dative of Means 


The simple dative without any preposition sometimes 
expresses means or znstrument. 

Examples: 

(1) ἐγείρονται τῷ λόγῳ τοῦ κυρίου, they are being raised 
up by (by means of) the word of the Lord. Compare 
ἐγείρονται ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου, they are being raised up by the 
Lord. ‘The comparison will serve to distinguish ὑπό with 
the genitive (expressing the active personal agent) from 16 
dative expressing means. 

(2) ἄγομεν τοὺς δούλους μετὰ τῶν υἱῶν αὐτῶν λόγοις κα- 


; 
/ 

‘ 

2 
a 
᾿ 
a 
te 
ἢ 
§ 
i 
? 
Ῥ. 
q 
ie 
oy 
2 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 61 


dots, we are leading the servants with their sons with good 
words. This example will serve to distinguish the dative 
expressing means from μετά with the genitive expressing 
accompaniment. The two ideas, though they are logi- 
cally quite distinct, happen often to be expressed by the 
same preposition, with, in English. μετά with the genitive 
means with in the sense of in company with; the dative 
means with in the sense of by means of. 


116. Deponent Verbs 


Many verbs have no active forms, but only middle or 
passive forms with active meaning. These verbs are called 
deponent. 

Example: πορεύομαι is passive in form, like λύομαι, but it 
is active in meaning, like λύω. It means simply 1 go or 
Iam going. 


117. Compound Verbs 


Prepositions are frequently prefixed to verbs. ‘The mean- 
ing of the verb is modified by the preposition in a way 
that is often easily understood from the common meaning 
of the preposition. Sometimes, however, the matter is not 
so simple; sometimes the meaning of the compound verb 
cannot easily be determined from the separate meanings 
of its two component parts. 

Example: ἐκ means out of, and πορεύομαι means I go. 
Hence ἐκπορεύομαι means I go out. But the meaning of 
ἀποκρίνομαι, I answer, is not easily derived from the mean- 
ings of its component parts. 


118. The Position of ov 


The negative, ov, precedes the word which it nega- 
tives. And since in the great majority of cases the nega- 


62 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


tive in a sentence negatives the verb, the normal place of 
ov is immediately before the verb. 

Examples: οὐ λύω, 1 do not loose, or I am not loosing; ov 
λύομαι, I am not being loosed. 


119. Various Cases With Verbs 


Many verbs take the genitive case and many the dative 
case to complete their meaning, where the corresponding 
verbs in English take a direct object. 

Examples: ἀκούω τῆς φωνῆς, 1 hear the voice (but ἀκούω 
may also take the accusative); ἀποκρίνομαι τῷ ἀποστόλῳ, 
I answer the apostle. 


120. Exercises 


I. 1. λύονται οὗτοι οἱ δοῦλοι ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου. 2. τῷ λόγῳ 

τοῦ κυρίου ἀγόμεθα εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ θεοῦ. 38. οὐκ ἀκού- 
an a “ U aN 1 95} 9 a ” 
ETE τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ προφήτου, ἀλλ΄! ἐξέρχεσθε Ex τοῦ οἴκου 
αὐτοῦ. 4. τῷ λόγῳ αὐτοῦ τοῦ κυρίου γίνεσθε μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. 
5. ἐκεῖνοι οἱ ἀγαθοὶ διδάσκαλοι οὐκ εἰσέρχονται εἰς τοὺς οἴκους 
“ ς ἊΝ > ’ « ε A € A a“ 
τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν. 6. ob βαπτίζονται of ἁμαρτωλοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν 
9 3 7 90 3 t a 9 \ 9} 
ἀποστόλων, ἀλλ΄ ἐξέρχονται ἐκ τούτων τῶν οἴκων πρὸς ἄλλους 
διδασκάλους. 7. λέγετε ἐκείνοις τοῖς ἁμαρτωλοῖς ὅτι σώὠζεσθε 
ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν. 8. ἄρχει αὐτὸς ὁ 
θεὸς τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ. 9. εἰρήνην ἔχει ἡ ἐκκλησία, ὅτι 
σώζεται ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῆς. 10. οὐκ ἀποκρινόμεθα τῷ 
ἀποστόλῳ ὅτι οὐ γινώσκομεν αὐτόν. 11]. οὐχ ὑπὸ τῶν μαθη- 
τῶν σὠζῃ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν σου, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ. 
’ > “ 


12. οὐ πορεύῃ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ τῇ κακῇ, ἀλλὰ σώζῃ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρ- 


« 
\ « 


τιῶν σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἀκούουσι τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ κυρίου. 
13. μετὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν αὐτοῦ ἄγεται εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ 
θεοῦ τῇ φωνῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων. 14. οὐ γίνῃ μαθητὴς τοῦ κυ- 
ρίου, ὅτι οὐκ εἰσέρχῃ εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν αὐτοῦ. 


1The final vowel of ἀλλά is often elided before a word that begins 
with a vowel. ‘The elision is marked by an apostrophe. 


toe 5 


\ 
& 
᾿ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK | 63 


II. 1. These churches are being saved by God from 
death. 2. I am being saved by Him and am being taught 
by His word. 3. We are becoming disciples of the good 
apostle, but ye are not hearing his voice. 4. I am a sinner, 
but am being taught by the apostles of the Lord. 5. I 
am an evilservant, but thou art becoming a teacher of this 
church. 6. The evil men say to those churches that our 
brethren do not see the face of the Lord. 7. The world is 
being destroyed by the word of our God. 8. We know the 
Lord because we receive good gifts from Him and are being 
taught by Him in parables. 9. Thou art writing these 
things to thy brethren and art being saved from thy sin. 
10. He is teaching others and is himself being taught by 
this apostle. 11. That disciple is not answering this 
prophet, because he does not know his words. 12. Thou 
art saying to this church that thou art a bad servant. 
13. You are abiding in that temple, because you are not 
servants of the Lord. 14. We do not see the faces of 
our Lord’s disciples,! because we are not in their houses. 
15. In our Lord’s house are joy and peace. 16. God rules 
this world by His word. 17. These sinners are not enter- 
ing into the Lord’s house, but are going out into the desert. 
18. These words are being written by God to his faithful 


churches. 


1The phrase should be turned around into the form, the disciples of 
our Lord, before it is translated into Greek. A similar transposition 
should be made in other similar phrases. 


64 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XI 


Imperfect Active Indicative. Imperfect Indicative 
of εἰμί... Accent of éort(v). 


121. Vocabulary 


αἴρω, I take up, I take away. 

ἀναβαίνω, [ go up (ava-means 
up). 

ἀποθνήσκω, I die. 

ἀποκτείνω, I kill. 

ἀποστέλλω, I send (πέμπω 15 
the general word for send, 
while ἀποστέλλω means 1 
send with a commission). 

ἄρτος, 6, a piece of bread, a 
loaf, bread. 

Baivw, I go (the simple verb 
does not occur in the New 
Testament, but the com- 
pounds with various prep- 
ositions are exceedingly 
common). 

ἐσθίω, I eat. 

κατά, prep. with gen., against; 
with acc., according to 
(κατά, of whichthe original 
meaning was down, has 


many meanings in the 
New Testament). 
καταβαίνω, I go down. 
μέν... δέ, on the one hand... 
on the other (used in con- 
trasts, the μέν often be- 
ing best left untranslated 
and the δέ being then 
best translated by θυ). 
οὐκέτι, adv., no longer. 
παρά, prep. with gen., from; 
with dat., beszde, an the 
presence of; with acc., 
alongside of. 
παραλαμβάνω, I receive, I 
take along. 
σύν, prep. with dat., with (a 
close synonym of μετά 
with gen.). 
συνάγω, I gather together. 


τότε, adv., then. 


ee Ὁ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 65 


122. In present time there is no special form of the verb 
in Greek to indicate continued action—there is no distinc- 
tion in Greek between J loose and I am loosing. But in 
| past time the distinction is made even more sharply than 
| in English. 

The tense which in the indicative is used as the simple 


past tense is called the aorist. It will be studied in Les- 
son XIV. 


The tense which denotes continued action in past time is 
called the imperfect. 
The aorist active indicative of λύω means I loosed, etc., 
whereas the imperfect active indicative means I was loos- 
| ing,etc. This distinction should be carefully observed. 


123. The imperfect active indicative of λύω is as fol- 


| lows: 

Sing. Plur. 
1. ἔλυον, TL was loosing. 1. ἔλύομεν, we were loosing. 
2. ἔλυες, thou wast loosing. 2. ἐλύετε, ye were loosing. 
ὃ. ἔλυε(ν), he was loosing. 3. ἔλυον, they were loosing. 


124. The imperfect indicative, like the indicative of the 
other secondary tenses (see §20, footnote), places an aug- 
ment at the beginning of the stem of the verb. 


: 125. In verbs that begin with a consonant the augment 
consists in an é- prefixed to the stem. 


Examples: ἔλυον, I was loosing; ἐγίνωσκον, I was knowing. 


126. In verbs that begin with a vowel, the augment 
consists in the lengthening of that vowel. But a lengthens 
not to long a but to 7. 

Examples: The imperfect of ἐγείρω is ἤγειρον ; of ἀκούω, 
ἤκουον ; of αἴρω, ἦὖρον. 


66 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


127. The personal endings in the active of the second- 
ary tenses are as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. -ν 1. -μεν 
2. -ς 2. -τε 
3. none: 3. -v (or -cav) 


128. The variable vowel (placed between the stem and 
the personal endings) is, in the imperfect as in the present, 
o before μ and v and ε before other letters. 


129. The third person singular, é\ve(v), has the mova- 
ble ν (under the conditions mentioned in §44). 


130. It will be observed that the first person singular 
and the third person plural are alike in form. Only the 
context can determine whether é\voy means I was loosing 
or they were loosing. 


Augment of Compound Verbs 


131. In compound verbs (see §117), the augment comes 
after the preposition and before the stem. If the preposition 
ends with a vowel, that vowel is usually dropped both be- 
fore a verb that begins with a vowel and before the aug- 
ment. 

Examples: The imperfect of ἐκβάλλω is ἐξέβαλλον ; of 
ἀποκτείνω, ἀπέκτεινον ; Of ἀπάγω, ἀπῆγον. 

132. It should be observed that the accent does not go 
back of the augment. Thus ἀπῆγον is correct, not ἄπηγον. 


133. Imperfect Indicative of εἰμί 


The imperfect indicative of εἰμί is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἤμην, I was. 1. ἦμεν, we were. 
2. ns, thou wast. 2. ἦτε, ye were. 
3. ἦν, he was. 3. ἦσαν, they were. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 67 


134. Accent of ἔστι(ν). 


After οὐκ and certain other words the third person 515 
gular present indicative of εἰμί is accented on the first 
syllable. This does not apply to the other forms of εἰμί. 
Thus οὐκ ἔστιν, but οὔκ ἐσμεν, etc. 


135. Exercises 


I. 1. ἠκούομεν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐκείναις Tals ἡμέραις, 
νῦν δὲ οὐκέτι ἀκούομεν αὐτῆς. 2. ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς τοῦ κυρίου 
ἔλεγε παραβολὴν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ. 3. ἀπέκτεινον οἱ 
δοῦλοι τὰ τέκνα σὺν τοῖς μαθηταῖς. 4. τότε μὲν κατέβαινον 
εἰς τὸν οἶκον, νῦν δὲ οὐκέτι καταβαίνω. ὅ. παρελαμβάνετε τὸν 
9 \ “ \ 9 r 3 2 A) \ 9 ia 
ἄρτον παρὰ τῶν δούλων Kal ἠσθίετε αὐτόν. 6. διὰ τὴν ἀλήη- 
θειαν ἀπέθνησκον οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις. 7. 
συνῆγεν οὗτος ὁ ἀπόστολος εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοὺς μαθητὰς 
τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν. ὃ. νῦν μὲν διδασκόμεθα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων, 

, \ > 4 ς la] \ bd , « Uj e La) 
τότε δὲ ἐδιδάσκομεν ἡμεῖς THY ἐκκλησίαν. 9. ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν 
ἦρε τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν. 10. τότε μὲν ἀνέβαινον εἰς τὸ ἱερόν, 
νῦν δὲ οὐκέτι ἀναβαίνουσιν. 11]. πονηροὶ ἦτε, ἀγαθοὶ δὲ ἐστέ. 
12. ὑμεῖς μέν ἐστε ἀγαθοί, ἡμεῖς δέ ἐσμεν πονηροί. 13. τότε 
7? > fa) € fa) A 90 ld ς / la Φ a 
ἤμην ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ ἐδίδασκέ με ὁ κύριος. 14. λέγομεν ὑμῖν 
eo 3 ἴων ” ς “ x 15 IST NA 3 \ 5] ; ne 
ὅτι ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ ὑμῶν ἦμεν. . ἐξέβαλλες αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ te- 

“ ᾽ , € ᾽ \ / 3 la) ld 
pov. 16. ἀπέστελλον οἱ ἄνθρωποι τοὺς δούλους αὐτῶν πρός 
με. 17. ὁ κύριος ἀπέστελλεν ἀγγέλους πρὸς ἡμᾶς. 18. ἐν 

“ “ > Ae e / Ψ ν᾽ 3 “ an > 
τῷ κόσμῳ ἦν Kal ὁ κόσμος οὐκ ἔβλεπεν αὐτόν. 19. δοῦλος ἧς 
τοῦ πονηροῦ, ἀλλὰ νῦν οὐκέτι εἶ δοῦλος. 20. τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ 
δῶρον τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καλὸν δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν. 


II. 1. The servant was saying these words against 
them. 2. According to the word of the apostle, they were 
going up into the temple. 3. The Lord was in His temple. 
4. They were killing our children. 5. Ye were dying in 
those days on account of the kingdom of God. 6. Thou 
wast taking away the sins of Thy disciples. 7. The prophet 


68 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


was sending the same servants into the small house. 8. We 
are no longer sinners, because we are being saved by the 
Lord from the sin of our hearts. 9. I was receiving this 
bread from the apostle’s servants. 10. Then he was writ- 
ing these things to his brethren. 11. In that hour we were 
in the desert with the Lord. 12. They are good, but they 
were evil. 13. Thou wast good, but we were sinners. 
14. Then I was a servant, but now I amason. 15. The 
sons of the prophets were gathering these things together 
into the temple. 16. Now I am being sent by the Lord to 
the children of the disciples, but then I was sending the 
righteous men into the desert. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 69 


LESSON XII 


Imperfect Middle and Passive Indicative 
Singular Verb with Neuter Plural Subject 
Uses of καί and οὐδέ 


136. Vocabulary 
ἀπέρχομαι, dep., I go away. οὐδέ, conj., and not, nor, not 
βιβλίον, τό, a book. even; οὐδέ . . οὐδέ, neither 
δαιμόνιον, τό, α demon. 5 6 OOP: 
δέχομαι, dep., I receive. οὔπω, adv., not yet. 
ἐκπορεύομαι, dep., I go out. περί, prep. with gen., con- 
ἔργον, τό, a work. cerning, about; with acc., 
ἔτι, adv., still, yet. around. 
θάλασσα, ἡ, a lake, a sea. πλοῖον, τό, a boat. 
Kat, conj., and, also, even; Kat συνέρχομαι, dep., I come to- 
. καί, both . . and. gether. 

ὑπέρ, prep. with gen., τη be- 

κατέρχομαι, dep., [ go down. half of; with acc., above. 


137. As in the present tense, so also in the imperfect, 
the middle and passive voices are alike in form. 


138. The imperfect middle indicative of λύω is as fol- 
lows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἐλυόμην, I was loosing 1. ἔἐλυόμεθα, we were loosing 
for myself. for ourselves. 
2. éd\vov, thou wast loosing 2. ἔλύεσθε, ye were loosing 
for thyself. for yourselves. 
3. ἐλύετο, he was loosing 3. ἔλύοντο, they were loosing 


for himself. | for themselves. 


70 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


139. The personal endings in the middle of the secondary 
tenses are as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. -μην 1. -μεθα 
2. -σο 2. -σθε 
8. -To 3. -ντὸ 


140. The variable vowel, as in the active of the imper- 
fect, and in all three voices of the present, is o before pu 
and v and e before other letters. 


141. In the second person singular, ἐλύου is a short- 
ened form for an original ἐλύεσο. 


142. Great care should be taken to pronounce clearly 
both the long vowel in the ultima of the form ἐλυόμην and 
the accent on the penult. 


143. The imperfect passive indicative of λύω Is as 
follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἐλυόμην, I was being 1. ἐλυόμεθα, we were being 
loosed. loosed. 
2. ἐλύου, thou wast being 2. ἔλύεσθε, ye were being 
loosed. loosed. 
3. ἐλύετο, he was being 3. ἐλύοντο, they were being 
loosed. loosed. 


144. Verbs which are deponent in the present are also 
deponent in the imperfect. 

Example: The imperfect indicative of ἔρχομαι, I come, is 
ἠρχόμην, I was coming. 


145. The Neuter Plural Subject 


A neuter plural subject may have its verb in the singular. 
Examples: τὰ δαιμόνια ἐξέρχεται, the demons go out; 
ταῦτά ἐστι τὰ καλὰ δῶρα, these are the good gifts. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 71 


This strange idiom, however, is by no means invariable 
in New Testament Greek; the neuter plural subject often 
has its verb in the plural like any other plural verb. 


Example: τὰ τέκνα σώζονται, the children are being saved. 


Uses of καί and οὐδέ 


146. The simple connective use of καί, where it means 
and, has already been studied. But καί has other uses. 
Frequently it means also or even. When it is thus used, it 
stands before the word with which it is logically connected. 
In the case of also, the English order is the reverse of the 
Greek order; in the case of even, it is the same as the Greek 
order. 


Examples: τοῦτο δὲ καὶ éyw λέγω, but this I also say; 
γινώσκουσι καὶ Ta τέκνα τὸν νόμον, even the children know 
the law. 


147. οὐδέ, like καί, 15 often simply connective and means 
and not or nor. But like καί it has other uses. It often 
means not even. 


Examples: τοῦτο δὲ ov λέγω ἐγὼ οὐδὲ λέγουσιν αὐτὸ ot 
ἄλλοι, but this I do not say, nor do the others say it (simple 
connective use of οὐδέ); τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ βλέπουσιν οὐδὲ οἱ 
μαθηταί, not even the disciples see the glory of God. 


148. Finally, καί. . . καί and οὐδέ. . . οὐδέ are used cor- 
relatively, and mean, respectively, both . . . and, and ne- 
ther... nor. 


Examples: (1) τοῦτο λέγουσιν καὶ ot ἀπόστολοι καὶ ot 
δοῦλοι, both the apostles and the servants say this; (2) τοῦτο 
λέγουσιν οὐδὲ οἱ ἀπόστολοι οὐδὲ οἱ δοῦλοι, neither the apos- 
tles nor the servants say this. 


72 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


149. Exercises 


I. 1. ἐγράφοντο οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι ἐν βιβλίῳ. 2. ἐδιδασκόμην 
ς ᾽ ’ nN 3 na 7 a la) 3 ᾽ , a 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν βιβλίων τῶν προφητῶν. 3. ἐν ἐκείναις Tals 
€ , Cy a) t A pests?) 3 a 452 , \ 9 
ἡμέραις καὶ ἐδιδασκόμεθα ὑπ΄ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐδιδάσκομεν τοὺς ἄλ- 
λους, ἀλλὰ νῦν οὐδὲ διδασκόμεθα οὐδὲ διδάσκομεν. 4. ἀπήρ- 
XOVTO οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν. ὅ. ἐξεπορεύετο πρὸς 
, A e 9 3 A “A 9 2 9 , ov 
αὐτὸν ἡ ἐκκλησία, ἀλλὰ νῦν οὐκέτι ἐκπορεύεται. 6. οὔπω 
βλέπομεν τὸν κύριον ἐν τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἐδιδασκόμεθα 
ὑπ᾽’ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταῖς κακαῖς. 7. ἐλέγετο ἐν τῷ 
ἱερῷ καλὸς λόγος περὶ τούτου τοῦ ἀποστόλου. ὃ. περὶ αὐτὸν 
ἐβλέπετο ἡ δόξα αὐτοῦ. 9. ἐφέρετο τὰ δῶρα καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 
πονηρούς. 10. ἐδέχου τὰ βιβλία ἀπὸ τῶν προφητῶν. 11. 
συνήρχοντο οἱ μαθηταὶ πρὸς τοῦτον. 12. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πονη- 
pov πονηρά ἐστιν. 13. οὐδὲ αὐτὸς πονηρὸς οὐδὲ τὰ ἔργα πο- 
νηρά. 14. ὑπὲρ τῆς ἐκκλησίας αὐτοῦ ἀπέθνησκεν ὁ κύριος. 
15. οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον αὐτοῦ οὐδὲ δοῦλος 
ὑπὲρ τὸν κύριον αὐτοῦ. 10. ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ ἤγου πρὸς τὸν κύριον 
διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης. 17. ἐξήρχεσθε ἐκ τῶν οἴκων ὑμῶν. 18. 
an \ Ud 3 \ nN U bd a“ > “ 
ταῦτα τὰ δαιμόνια ἐξήρχετο διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ. 19. ἠκού- 
οντο καὶ ἤκουον" ἀκούονται καὶ ἀκούουσιν. 20. ἠρχόμην πρὸς 
τὸν κύριον, ἦγον δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους. 


II. 1. Those words were being heard by the same 
apostle, but now they are no longer being heard. 2. These 
books were being written by him in behalf of his servants. 
3. I was not yet being taught by this man, but I was lead- 
ing the others to him. 4. Ye are not above me nor am I 
above you. 5. Thou wast sending others to him and wast 
being sent by him to others. 6. The demons were going 
out of the children. 7. Ye were coming in and going out 
in the church. 8. We were not yet going away to the 
sinners, but were still hearing the voice of the apostle and 
were being taught concerning the Lord out of the books 
of the prophets. 9. They were going down to the sea 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 73 


and were going through it in boats. 10. Neither the evil 
nor the good were answering the Lord. 11. We were both 
seeing and hearing these disciples. 12. Thou wast being 
saved by the word of the Lord. 138. Not by your works 
but by the Lord were ye being saved from your sins. 14. 
Not even the good are saved by works. 15. Through the 
word of the Lord we were becoming good disciples. 16. 
Thou wast not dying in behalf of him, but he was dying in 
behalf of thee. 


74 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


| LESSON XIII 
Future Active and Middle Indicative 


150. 


ἀναβλέπω, fut. ἀναβλέψω, I 
look up, I receive my sight. 

βήσομαι, I shall go, dep. fut. 
of βαίνω. 

γενήσομαι, LI shall become, 
dep. fut. of γίνομαι. 

γνώσομαι, I shall know, dep. 
fut. of γινώσκω. 

διδάξω, 1 shall teach, fut. of 
διδάσκω. 

διώκω, fut. διώξω, I pursue, 
1 persecute. 

δοξάζω, fut. δοξάσω, I glorify. 


Vocabulary 


ἐλεύσομαι, I shall come, I 
shall go, dep. fut. of 
ἔρχομαι. 


ἕξω, I shall have, fut. of ἔχω 
(note the breathing). 
κηρύσσω, fut. knpvéw, I pro- 
claim, I preach. 
λήμψομαι, I shall take, dep. 
fut. of λαμβάνω. 
προσεύχομαι, dep., fut. προ- 
σεύξομαι, I pray. 


τυφλός, ὁ, a blind man. 


151. The present and imperfect tenses, in all three voices, 
are formed on the present stem, to which the personal end- 
ings, being joined to the stem by the variable vowel οἱ ε, are 
added. 

But the future active and middle are formed on the future 
stem, which is formed by adding the tense suffix o to the 
stem of the verb. Thus, while Av- is the stem of the 
verb (which in the case of λύω is also the present stem), 
\vo- is the future stem. 


152. The future, being a primary tense, has primary 
personal endings like the present tense. The variable 
vowel is also the same. Therefore the future active and 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 75 


middle indicative are conjugated exactly like the present 
active and middle, except that the future has λυσ- at the 
beginning instead of λυ-. 


153. It will be remembered that in the present and im- 
perfect tenses the middle and passive are alike in form. 
But in the future the passive is quite different from the 
middle and will be reserved for a subsequent lesson. λύσο- 
μαι, therefore, means I shall loose for myself, but it does 
not mean I shall be loosed. 


154. The future active indicative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. λύσω, TI shall loose. 1. λύσομεν, we shall loose. 
2. λύσεις, thou wilt loose. 2. λύσετε, ye will loose. 
3. λύσει, he will loose. 3. λύσουσι(ν), they will loose. 


155. The future middle indicative of λύω is as follows: ° 


Sing. Plur. 
1. λύσομαι, I shall loose 1. λυσόμεθα, we shall loose 
for myself. for ourselves. 
2. λύσῃ, thou wilt loose 2. λύσεσθε, ye will loose 
for thyself. for yourselves. 
3. λύσεται, he will loose 3. λύσονται, they will loose 
for himself. for themselves. 


156. Future Active and Middle of Stems Ending in a 
Consonant 


When the stem of a verb ends in a consonant, the addi- 
tion of the tense suffix o brings two consonants together. 
The following results then occur: 

(1) 7, B, φ (called labcal mutes because they are pro- 


76 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


nounced by means of the lips) form with the following σ 
the double consonant yw (ps). 

Examples: The future of πέμπω 15 πέμψω, and of γράφω, 
γράψω. 

(2) κ, Ύ, χ (called palatal mutes because they are pro- 
nounced by means of the palate) form with the following 
σ the double consonant & (ks). 

Examples: The future of ἄγω is ἄξω, and of ἄρχω, ἄρξω. 

(3) τ, δ, 6 (called lingual mutes because they are 
formed by means of the tongue) drop out before the σ. 

Example: The future of πείθω is πείσω. 


Formation of the Future Stem and Other Tense Stems of 
Various Verbs 


157. In the case of many verbs the verb stem is different 
from the present stem. 

Examples: (1) The verb stem of κηρύσσω is not κηρυσσ- 
but κηρυκ-. From κηρυκ- the future κηρύξω is formed by 
the rule given in §156. (2) The verb stem of βαπτίζω is 
not βαπτιζ- but βαπτιδ-. From βαπτιδ- the future βαπτίσω 
is formed by the rule given in §156. 


158. In general, the future of a Greek verb cannot cer- 
tainly be formed by any rules; it must be looked up in the 
lexicon for every individual verb, so numerous are the 
irregularities. 


159. The Greek verb is for the most part exceedingly 
regular in deriving the individual forms indicating voice, 
mood, person and number from the basal tense stems. 
But the formation of those basal tense stems from the stem 
of the verb (and still more from the present stem) is often 
exceedingly irregular. The basal tense stems, from which 
all the rest of the verb is formed, are six in number. These . 
Six, given with the personal ending for the first person singu- 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 77 


lar indicative, are called the principal parts. So far, only 
two of the six principal parts of λύω have been learned. 
From the first of the principal parts, λύω, all of the present 
and imperfect in all three voices is formed; from the sec- 
ond, Avow, all of the future active and middle. The 
present and imperfect together form the present system ; 
the future active and middle form the future system. 


160. The regularity of the Greek verb in making the 
individual forms within each tense system from the first 
form of the tense system, and the great irregularity in mak- 
ing the first forms themselves, may be illustrated by the 
very irregular verb ἔρχομαι. The student would certainly 
never have expected that the future of ἔρχομαι would be 
ἐλεύσομαι; but once he has learned from the lexicon that 
ἐλεύσομαι is the first person singular of the future, the third 
plural, ἐλεύσονται, for example, can be derived from it 
exactly as λύσονται is derived from λύσομαι, which in turn 
is derived from λύσω. 


161. From this point on, it will be assumed that the 
student will use the general vocabularies at the back of the 
book. The method of using them may be illustrated as 
follows: 

(1) Suppose it is desired to translate they will begin 
into Greek. The first step is to look up the word begin 
in the English-Greek vocabulary. It is there said that 
begin is expressed by the middle voice of a@pxw. The 
next step is to look up the word ἄρχω in the Greek- 
English vocabulary. With it, in the Greek-English vo- 
cabulary, the principal parts are given. The second 
of the principal parts is the future ἄρξω. It is the fu- 
ture which is desired, because they will begin is future. 
But it is the middle voice of ἄρχω which means begin. 
Therefore we are looking for the future middle indicative 


78 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


(third person plural). That can be derived from ἄρξω 
after the analogy of λύω. If the paradigm of \vw be con- 
sulted, it will be discovered that the future middle indica- 
tive, third person plural, is formed from the second of the 
principal parts by retaining the λυσ- of λύσω and putting 
on -ovrat instead of -w. Treating ἄρξω in the same way, we 
keep ἀρξ- and add-ovrat to it. Thus ἄρξονται is the form 
desired. 

(2) If the form σώσει is found in the Greek-English 
exercises, the student will naturally guess that the second 
o is the sign of the future just as the σ is in λύσει. He 
will therefore look up verbs beginning with ow-. With- 
out difficulty cwfw will be found, and its future (the sec- 
ond of the principal parts) is discovered to be σώσω, of 
which, of course, σώσει is simply the third person singular. 

(3) Similarly, if the student sees a form ἄξω he should at 
once surmise that the o concealed in the double consonant 
ξ isthe o of the future. The present, therefore, will natur- 
ally be &kw or ἄγω or ἄχω. It may be necessary to try all 
three of these in the vocabulary until it be discovered that 
ἄγω is correct. 

Of course these processes will soon become second nature 
and will be performed without thought of the individual 
steps. 


162. The more difficult forms will be listed separately 
in the vocabularies, with references to the verbs from which . 
they come. 


163. But the forms of compound verbs will not be thus 
listed. For example, if the student sees ἀπελεύσεσθε in 
the exercises, he should observe that d7- is evidently the 
preposition ἀπό with its final vowel elided. ‘The simple 
verb form, then, with the preposition removed, is ἐλεύσεσθε. 
The first person singular would be ἐλεύσομαι. This form 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 79 


will be found in the Greek-English vocabulary and will be 
designated as the future of ἔρχομαι. Therefore, since ἐλεύ- 
σεσθε comes from ἔρχομαι, ἀπελεύσεσθε will come from 
ἀπέρχομαι, and that is the verb which the student must 
finally look up. 


164. Deponent Future of Certain Verbs 


Some verbs are deponent in one tense but not in another. 


Examples: βαίνω has a future of the middle form, βήσομαι. 
It is thus deponent in the future but not in the present. 


165. Exercises 


I. 1. ἄξει ὁ κύριος τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν. 
2. γνωσόμεθα καὶ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς καὶ τοὺς πονηρούς. ὅ. λήμψε- 
σθε τὰ πλοῖα ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης. 4. λύσεις τοὺς δούλους. ὅ. 
ἕξουσιν οἱ πονηροὶ οὐδὲ χαρὰν οὐδὲ εἰρήνην. 6. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ 
ὥρᾳ ἐλεύσεται ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου; σὺν τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ. 
7. ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἐστέ, γενήσεσθε δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῦ κυρίου. ὃ. διώ- 
κουσιν οἱ πονηροὶ τοὺς προφήτας, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ 
υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὐκέτι διώξουσιν αὐτούς. 9. προσεύξῃ τῷ θεῷ 
σου καὶ δοξάσεις αὐτόν. 10. τότε γνώσεσθε ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ 
κύριος. 11. ταῦτα γνώσομαι οὐδὲ ἔγὠ. 12. ἄλλους διδάξει 
ὁ δοῦλος, ἀλλ᾽ ἐμὲ διδάξει ὁ διδάσκαλος ὁ πιστός. 13. ἐκεῖνα 
λήμψονται οἱ ἀπόστολοι, ταῦτα δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί. 14. διὰ 
τοῦ λόγου τοῦ κυρίου ἀναβλέψουσιν οἱ τυφλοὶ οὗτοι. 15. ὁ 
προφήτης αὐτὸς γράψει ταῦτα ἐν ταῖς γραφαῖς. 10. ἐλεύ- 
σονται κακαὶ ἡμέραι. 17. ἀπελεύσῃ καὶ σὺ εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς τῶν 
πονηρῶν καὶ διδάξεις οὕτως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. 18. κηρύξουσιν 
καὶ αὐτοὶ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κόσμῳ τῷ κακῷ. 19. 
ἐλεύσεται καὶ αὕτη πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ αὐτὸς διδάξει αὐτήν. 20. 


16 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, the Son of Man. This is the form in 
which the phrase occurs in the gospels as a self-designation of Jesus. 


80 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἐκηρύσσετο TO εὐαγγέλιον ἐν TALS ἡμέραις TALS κακαῖς, κηρύσ- 
σεται δὲ καὶ νῦν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐλεύσεται ὁ κύριος 
αὐτός. 

II. 1. The Church will send servants tome. 2. These 
women will become good. 8. These words I shall write in 
a book. 4. These things will come into the world in those 
days. 5. Now he is not yet teaching me, but in that hour 
he shall both teach me and know me. 6. They were pur- 
suing these women in the evil days, and they will pursue 
them even into the other places. 7. Then will blind men 
pray to the Lord, but evil men will not pray. 8. The gifts 
were being taken by us from the children, but we shall take 
them no longer. 9. We shall pray for (in behalf of) the 
same children in the Church. 10. In this world we have 
death, but in the kingdom of God we shall have both love 
and glory. 11. Then we were being taught by the apostles, 
but in that day we also shall teach. 13. In those days I 
was persecuting you, but now ye shall persecute me. 14. 
Thou wilt not go down to the sea, but wilt pursue these 
women with their children into the desert. 15. They were 
preaching this gospel, but now they will no longer preach 
it. 16. These things are evil, but you will have good 
things in that day. 17. The Lord will come to His Church 
in glory. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 81 


LESSON XIV 


First Aorist Active and Middle Indicative 
Constructions with πιστεύω. 


166. Vocabulary 


ἀπολύω, ἀπολύσω, ἀπέλυσα, 
I release. 

exnpvéa, I preached, I pro- 
claimed, aor. of κηρύσσω. 

ETLOTPEPW, ἐπιστρέψω, ἐπέ- 
στρεψα, I turn, I return. 

ἑτοιμάζω, ἑτοιμάσω, ἡτοίμα- 
σα, I prepare. 

ἤδη, adv., already. | 

θαυμάζω, θαυμάσω, ἐθαύμασα, 


I wonder, I marvel, I won- 
der at. 

θεραπεύω, θεραπεύσω, ἐθερά- 
πευσα, I heal. 

πείθω, πείσω, ἔπεισα, I per- 
suade. 

πιστεύω, πιστεύσω ἐπίστευσα, 
I believe. 

ὑποστρέφω, ὑποστρέψω, ὑπέ- 
στρεψα, I return. 


167. The first aorist is not a different tense from the 
second aorist, which will be studied in the next lesson, but 
first aorist and second aorist are merely two different ways 
of forming the same tense of a verb. Thus the English 
I loved is not a different tense from I threw, but the verb 
love and the verb throw form the ‘“‘preterit’’? (simple past 
tense) in two different ways. 

168. The aorist is like the imperfect in that it refers to 
past time. But the imperfect refers to continuous action 
in past time, while the aorist is the simple past tense. 
Thus the imperfect ἔλυον means I was loosing, while the 
aorist ἔλυσα means I loosed. It will be remembered that 
in present time this distinction between the simple assertion 
of the act and the assertion of continued (or repeated) 
action is not made in Greek (λύω, therefore, means either 
I loose or I am loosing). But in past time the distinction 


82 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


is very carefully made; the Greek language shows no ten- 
dency whatever to confuse the aorist with the imperfect. 


169. It should be observed, however, that the aorist 
tense is often translated by the English perfect. ἔλυσα, 
therefore, may mean I have loosed as well as I loosed. The 
Greek perfect, which will be studied in Lesson XXIX, 
though it is indeed often to be translated by I have loosed, 
has a very different range from that of this English tense. 
Where the English I have loosed merely asserts that the ac- 
tion has taken place in past time without any implications 
as to its present results, it is translated by the Greek aorist. 

Examples: ἠκούσατε τὴν φωνήν μου, ye have heard my 
voice. This sentence merely asserts that the action has 
taken place at some unspecified time in the past. But 
if a then were added, and thus the interval between the 
past action and the present time when the assertion is 
being made were clearly marked, the English would have 
the simple preterit. Thus τότε ἠκούσατε τὴν φωνήν μου 
would be translated then ye heard my voice. 


170. The context will usually determine quite clearly 
whether a Greek aorist is to be translated in English by 
the simple past tense (e.g. I loosed) or by the perfect tense 
(e.g. I have loosed). The former translation should be 
adopted in the exercises unless it is perfectly certain that 
the other is intended. What the student needs to under- 
stand first is that the aorist is the simple past tense. 


171. The first aorist active indicative of λύω is as 
follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἔλυσα, =‘ loosed. 1. ἐλύσαμεν, we loosed. 
2. ἔλυσας, thou loosedst. 2. ἔλύσατε, ye loosed. 
3. ἔλυσε(ν), he loosed. 3. ἔλυσαν, they loosed. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 83 


172. The aorist, being a secondary tense (like the im- 
perfect), has the augment. The augment is the same for 
the aorist as it is for the imperfect (see §§124-126). 

173. The aorist, like the imperfect, has the secondary 
endings. It will be remembered (see §127) that these, in 
the active voice, are as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. -ν 1. -μεν 
2. -ς 2, -τε 
3. none 3. -ν (or -σαν). 


174. It should be observed that in the first aorist the v 
is dropped in the first person singular. 

175. Before these personal endings, there stands, in the 
aorist, not a variable vowel, but the tense suffix, ca, which 
is added to the stem of the verb. Thus, where the future 
has go /e, the first aorist has σα. 

176. In the third person singular this ca is changed to 
σε. &dvoe(v) may have the movable », like the é\ve(v) of 
the imperfect. 

177. The form ἐλύσαμεν---ἰο take it as an example 
—may be divided as follows: é/Ai/ca/uev. ἐ is the aug- 
ment, dv is the stem of the verb, σα is the sign of the first 
aorist, and μὲν is the secondary personal ending in the 
first person plural active. 


178. The first aorist middle indicative of λύω is as 
follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἐλυσάμην, I loosed 1. ἐλυσάμεθα, we loosed 
for myself. for ourselves. 
2. ἔλύσω, thou loosedst 2. ἐλύσασθε, ye loosed for 
for thyself. yourselves. 
3. ἐλύσατο, he loosed 3. ἐλύσαντο, they loosed for 


for himself. themselves. 


84 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


179. As in the future tense so in the aorist tense, the 
passive voice is entirely distinct in form from the middle. 
ἐλυσάμην, therefore, means I loosed for myself, but it does 
not mean I was loosed. 


180. Like the aorist active, the aorist middle has the sec- 
ondary personal endings. It will be remembered (see §139) 
that in the middle these secondary personal endings are as 
follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. -μην 1. -μεθα 
2. -σο 2. -σθε 
3. γτὸ 3. -VTO 


181. These are preceded, as in the active, by the tense 
suffix, ga. No changes occur except in the second person 
singular, where ἐλύσω is a shortened form for an original 
ἐλύσασο. 


182. The form ἐλυσάμεθα ---- ἰο take it as an example 
—is made up as follows: €/Av/od/pyeOa. ἐ is the aug- 
ment, Av is the stem of the verb, oa is the tense suffix, 
μεθα is the secondary personal ending in the first person 
plural middle. 


183. The changes caused by the joining of the oa of the 
first aorist tense suffix to the stems of various verbs are like 
those caused by the oo /e of the future. As in the case of 
the future, however, it cannot be predicted with certainty 
what the aorist of a Greek verb will be. Every verb must 
be looked up in the lexicon separately. For this purpose 
the student should use the general vocabulary at the end 
of the book in the manner described in §§161-168. Only, 
for the aorist active and middle, we shall be interested in 
the third of the principal parts, not in the second. 


i aA AE ΣΤΥ a Se Sale a By i el lle lk tial Oh rae ὙΠῸ ΤΣ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 85 


184. Constructions with πιστεύω 


The verb πιστεύω takes the dative. Thus πιστεύω Ὁ 
ἀνθρώπῳ means I believe the man. 

The verb πιστεύω followed by eis with the accusative 
is to be translated by I believe in or on. Thus πιστεύω 
εἰς τὸν κύριον means I believe in the Lord or I believe 
on the Lord. It must not be supposed, however, that the 
preposition eis with the accusative here really means in 
hike ἐν with the dative. Rather is it to be said that the 
Greek language merely looks at the act of believing in a 
different way from the English; Greek thinks of putting 
one’s faith nto some one.. 


185. Exercises 


I. 1. ἀπέλυσεν ὁ κύριος τὸν δοῦλον αὐτοῦ, ὁ δὲ δοῦλος 
οὐκ ἀπέλυσε τὸν ἄλλον. 2. ἤδη ἐπέστρεψαν οὗτοι πρὸς τὸν 
κύριον, ἐκεῖνοι δὲ ἐπιστρέψουσιν ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταῖς κακαῖς. 
3. ἐπιστεύσαμεν εἰς τὸν κύριον καὶ σώσει ἡμᾶς. 4. καὶ ἐπί- 
στευσας εἰς αὐτὸν καὶ πιστεύσεις. ὃ. ὑπέστρεψας πρὸς τὸν 

᾿ς xe , ! ᾽ \ 3 , ᾽ nN > 3 , 
κύριον Kal ἐδέξατό σε εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν αὐτοῦ. 0. ἐν ἐκείναις 
ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐπορεύεσθε ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς ταῖς κακαῖς. 7. ἐπε- 
στρέψατε πρὸς τὸν κύριον καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν ὑμᾶς. ὃ. ἐκεῖνοι 
πονηροί, ἀλλ’ ἡμεῖς ἐπείσαμεν αὐτούς. 9. ἡτοίμασα ὑμῖν 

> ca) Ψ “ 9 {4 3 \ > ἔ 9 >) 
τόπον ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ. 10. ἐδεξάμην σε εἰς TOV οἶκόν μου, ἀλλ 
οὗτοι οἱ πονηροὶ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο. 11]. ἀνέβλεψαν οἱ τυφλοί. 
12. ἔσωσα ὑμᾶς ἐγώ, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐμὲ οὐκ ἐδέξασθε εἰς τοὺς οἴκους 
ὑμῶν. 14. πονηροὶ ἦσαν αὐτοί, πονηροὺς δὲ ἔπεμψαν εἰς τὴν 
ἐκκλησίαν. 15. ἐδίδαξάς με ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ. 10. τότε ἠκούσαμεν 
ταύτας τὰς ἐντολάς, ἄλλας δὲ ἀκούσομεν ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ. 17. 
᾽ 9 , A ew 9 ’ 3 “ t “ \ OT 
ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH ὥρᾳ ἐξελεύσονται EK τοῦ κόσμου, τότε δὲ ἐδέξαντο 
ἡμᾶς. 18. ἤκουσαν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐθαύμασαν. 19. ἐδέξω σὺ τὸ 
εὐαγγέλιον, οὗτοι δὲ οὐ δέξονται αὐτό. 20. οὐδὲ ἠκούσαμεν 
τὸν κύριον οὐδὲ ἐπιστεύσαμεν εἰς αὐτόν. 


80 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


II. 1. We did not receive the gospel, because we did 
not hear the voice of the apostle. 2. In those days we were 
not believing in the Lord, but this disciple persuaded us. 
3. The sinner turned unto the Lord, and already is being 
taught by Him. 4. The servants have prepared houses 
for you. 5. This blind man believed in the Lord. 6. The 
children wondered, and the disciples believed. 7. Thou 
didst not pray to the Lord, and on account of this He did 
not heal thee. 8. Those evil men pursued these women 
into the desert. 9. I have preached the gospel to them. 
10. Ye persecuted me, but I did not persecute you. 11. 
These blind men glorified the Lord, because he had healed! 
them. 12. Through His disciples He proclaimed His gos- 
pel to the world. 13. The promises are good, and we 
received them. 14. Ye have received the same promises 
and believed on the same Lord. 15. He has not preached 
the gospel nor does be preach it now. 16. That woman 
has neither glorified the Lord nor received the children. 


1The English pluperfect is often to be translated by the Greek aorist. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 87 


LESSON XV 
Second Aorist Active and Middle Indicative 

186. Vocabulary 
γάρ, conj}., postpositive (see ἤνεγκα, I bore, I brought, 

$91), for. Ist aor. of φέρω (conju- 
ἔβαλον, I threw, I cast, 2nd gated like the Ist aor. of 

aor. of βάλλω. Avw, but with -κα instead 
ἔγενόμην, I became, dep. 2nd of -σα). 

aor. of γίνομαι. λείπω, 2nd. aor. ἔλιπον, I 
εἶδον, I saw, 2nd aor. of leave. 

βλέπω (may also be re- ὄψομαι, I shall see, dep. fut. 

garded as 2nd aor. of of βλέπω (may also be re- 

ὁράω). garded as future of ὁράω). 
εἶπον, I said, 2nd aor. of πίπτω, 2η4 aor. ἔπεσον, I fall. 

λέγω. προσφέρω, I bring to (takes 
ἔλαβον, I took, 2nd aor. of the accusative of the thing 

λαμβάνω. that is brought and the 
ἤγαγον, I led, 2nd aor. of dative of the person to 

ἄγω. whom it is brought. Ex- 

ample: προσφέρω Ta τέκνα 

ἦλθον, I came, I went, 2nd τῷ κυρίῳ, I bring the chil- 

aor. of ἔρχομαι. dren to the Lord). 


1In the New Testament, εἶδον has, in the indicative, almost exclu- 
sively first aorist endings, instead of second aorist endings, and in other 
verbs also first aorist endings are often placed on second aorist stems. 
See J. H. Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament Greek, Vol. II, 1920, 
“‘Accidence and Word Formation’’, edited by W. F. Howard, pp. 208f., 
note 1. It is therefore rather a concession to weakness when εἶδον 
etc. are here treated as second aorists throughout. But this procedure 
will probably be better until the nature of the second aorist becomes 
thoroughly familiar to the student. The first aorist endings can after- 
wards easily be recognized when they occur. Compare $521. 


88 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


187. It has already been observed that the second aorist 
is not a different tense from the first aorist, but only a dif- 
ferent way of forming the same tense. Very few verbs, 
therefore, have both a first aorist and a second aorist, just 
as very few verbs in English form their preterit both by 
adding -ed and by making changes within the body of 
the word. 

Thus the preterit of live is lived, and the preterit of rise 
is rose, but live has no preterit love, nor has rise a preterit 
rised. The uses of the tense lzved are exactly the same as 
the uses of the tense rose. So also in Greek the uses of the 
second aorist are exactly the same as the uses of the first 
aorist. 


188. It cannot be determined beforehand whether a 
verb is going to have a first aorist or a second aorist, nor if 
it has a second aorist what the form of that second aorist 
will be. These matters can be settled only by an examina- 
tion of the lexicon for each individual verb. 


189. The second aorist system (consisting of all moods 
of the second aorist active and middle) differs from the 
present system (consisting of all moods of the present and 
imperfect active, middle and passive), not by adding -σα 
or any other tense suffix to the stem of the verb, but by 
differences, as over against the present, within the body of 
the word. Usually these differences mean that the second 
aorist has gotten back nearer to the real, fundamental verb 
stem than the present has. 

Examples: (1) λαμβάνω has a second aorist ἔλαβον, λαβ- 
being the second aorist stem and λαμβαν- the present stem. 
(2) βάλλω has a second aorist ἔβαλον, Bad- being the sec- 
ond aorist stem and βαλλ- the present stem. 


190. Upon the second aorist stem are formed the second 
aorist active and middle. The aorist passive of all verbs 


Se ΤΡ a Le Pe ΡΘΗ ΡΥ ΡΥ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 89 


is different from the aorist middle, whether the aorist middle 
is first aorist or second aorist. ἐλιπόμην, therefore, the 
aorist middle of λείπω, does not mean J was left. In 
order to translate I was left, an entirely different form, the 
aorist passive, would be used. 


191. The second aorist, being a secondary tense, has 
an augment, which is just like the augment of the imperfect. 
Thus a second aorist stem like λιπ- (of λείπω), which be- 
gins with a consonant, prefixes € to make the augment 
(the stem λιπ- thus making ἔλιπον), while a second aorist 
stem like ἐλθ-, which begins with a vowel, lengthens that 


vowel (the stem ἐἔλθ- thus making ἦλθον). 


192. The second aorist, being a secondary tense, has 
secondary personal endings. Between these and the stem 
comes the variable vowel o /e exactly as in the present and 
imperfect. The second aorist indicative, therefore, is con- 
jugated exactly like the imperfect, except that the imperfect 
is formed on the present stem, while the second aorist 
indicative is formed on the second aorist stem. Thus 
ἐλείπομεν means we were leaving (imperfect), whereas 
ἔλίπομεν means we left (second aorist). Sometimes a 
single letter serves to distinguish imperfect from second 
aorist. ἐβάλλομεν, for example, means we were throw- 
ing (imperfect), whereas ἐβάλομεν means we threw (sec- 
ond aorist). 


193. The second aorist active indicative of λείπω, I 
leave, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἔλιπον, I left. 1. ἐλίπομεν, we left. 
2. ἔλιπες, thou leftst. 2. ἐλίπετε, ye left. 
3. €dure(v), he left. 3. ἔλιπον, they left. 


90 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


194. The second aorist middle indicative of λείπω is as 
follows: 


Sing. lar 
1. ἐλιπόμην 1. ἐλιπόμεθα 
2. ἐλίπου 2. ἐλίπεσθε 
3. ἐλίπετο 3. €ALTOVTO 
195. | Exercises 


I. 1. καὶ εἴδομεν τὸν κύριον καὶ ἠκούσαμεν τοὺς λόγους 
αὐτοῦ. 2. οὐδὲ γὰρ εἰσῆλθες εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὐτῶν οὐδὲ εἶπες 
αὐτοῖς παραβολήν. 3d. ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH ὥρᾳ ἐγένοντο μαθηταὶ τοῦ 
κυρίου. 4. οὗτοι μὲν ἔγένοντο μαθηταὶ ἀγαθοί, ἐκεῖνοι δὲ ἔτι 
ἦσαν πονηροί. 5. προσέφερον αὐτῷ τοὺς τυφλούς. 6. ἔπεσον 
ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ οἱ ἄγγελοι οἱ πονηροί. 7. τὰ μὲν δαιμόνια 
ἐξεβάλετε, τὰ δὲ τέκνα ἐθεραπεύσατε. ὃ. τοὺς μὲν πονηροὺς 
συνηγάγετε ὑμεῖς εἰς τοὺς οἴκους ὑμῶν, τοὺς δὲ ἀγαθοὺς ἡμεῖς. 
9. οὐκ ἐκήρυξας τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐγένου 
μαθητής. 10. νῦν μὲν λέγετε λόγους ἀγαθούς, εἶπον δὲ οὗτοι 
τοὺς αὐτοὺς λόγους καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις. 11. ἐπιστεύ- 
σαμεν εἰς τὸν κύριον, οἱ γὰρ μαθηταὶ ἤγαγον ἡμᾶς πρὸς αὐτόν. 
12. ταῦτα μὲν εἶπον ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἐκεῖνα δὲ οὔπω λέγω. 
13. τότε μὲν εἰσήλθετε εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, ἐν ἐκείνῃ δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
εἰσελεύσεσθε εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν. 14. τότε ὀψόμεθα τὸν κύριον ἐν 
τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ: ἐπιστεύσαμεν γὰρ εἰς αὐτόν. 15. ὁ μὲν κύριος 
ἐξῆλθε τότε ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἔτι μένουσιν ἐν 
αὐτῷ. 10. ταύτας τὰς ἐντολὰς ἔλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ κυρίου, ἤμην 
γὰρ μαθητὴς αὐτοῦ. 17. τότε μὲν παρελάβετε τὴν ἐπαγγε- 
λίαν παρὰ τοῦ κυρίου, νῦν δὲ καὶ κηρύσσετε αὐτὴν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ. 
18. ἤλθετε πρὸς τὸν κύριον καὶ παρελάβετε παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ ταῦτα. 
19. συνήγαγεν ἡμᾶς αὐτὸς εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν αὐτοῦ. 20. εἶδον 
οἱ ἄνθρωποι τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ" ἐγένετο γὰρ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπος 
καὶ ἔμενεν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κόσμῳ. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 91 


II. 1. We did not see Him, for we were not yet dis-. 
ciples of Him. 2. The apostle brought the sinners to Him. 
3. Ye did not hear me, but ye came to my disciples. 4. 
Ye entered into this house, but the others went out of it. 
5. The sinners were going into their houses, but the apostles 
saw the Lord. 6. In those days we shall see the Lord, but 
in the evil days we did not see Him. 7. Thy brothers 
were taking gifts from the children, but the apostles took the 
children from them. 8. You became a servant of the 
apostle, but the apostle became to you even a brother. 
9. Ye have become a church of God, for ye have believed 
on His Son. 10. He has gathered together His disciples 
into His kingdom. 11. The faithful teacher said that the 
Lord is good. 12. They believed in the Lord and brought 
others also to Him. 13. They heard the children and 
came to them. 14. We received joy and peace from 
God, because we were already entering into His kingdom. 
15. The disciples say that the apostles saw the Lord and 
received this from Him. 16. You went out into the desert, 
but the apostle said these things to his brethren. 


92 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
LESSON XVI 
Aorist Passive Indicative. Future Passive Indicative 
196. | Vocabulary 
ἀναλαμβάνω, I take up. ἐπορεύθην, I went, aor., pass- 
ἐβλήθην, 1 was thrown, 1 was ive in form, of πορεύομαι. 
cast, aor. pass. of βάλλω. ἠγέρθην, I was raised, aor. 
ἐγενήθην, I became, aor., pass. pass. of ἐγείρω. 
in form, of γίνομαι. ἠκούσθην, I was heard, aor. 
ἐγνώσθην, I was known, aor. pass. of ἀκούω. 
pass. of γινώσκω. nvexOnv, I was borne, I was 
ἐδιδάχθην, I was taught, aor. brought, aor. pass of φέρω. 
pass. of διδάσκω. ἤχθην, 1 was led, aor. pass. 


ἐκηρύχθην, I was preached, I of ἄγω. 
was proclaimed, aor. pass. ὥφθην, I was seen, aor. pass. 


of κηρύσσω. of βλέπω (may also be re- 
ἔληήμφθην, I was taken, aor. garded as aor. pass. of 
pass. of λαμβάνω. ὁράω). 


107. The aorist passive indicative and the future passive 
indicative are formed on the aorist passive stem, which 
appears in the sixth place among the principal parts. The 
fourth and fifth of the principal parts will be studied in a 
subsequent lesson. 


198. The aorist passive stem is formed by adding θε 
to the verb stem. This θεὲ is lengthened throughout the 
indicative to θη. Thus the aorist passive stem of λύω ap- 
pears as λυθη-. 


199. The aorist being a secondary tense, the augment, 
formed exactly as in the case of the imperfect (see §$124- 
126), is prefixed to the tense stem, and the secondary per- 


“ἍΜ... a  ΥΕῚ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 93 


sonal endings are added. These personal endings are of 
the active form (see §127), and are like those which are used 
in the imperfect active indicative except that in the third 
person plural the alternative ending -cav is chosen instead 
of -v. In the aorist passive indicative, the personal end- 
ings are added directly to the tense stem, without any vari- 
able vowel intervening. 


200. The future passive indicative is formed by adding 
-co/e to the aorist passive stem (with its θεὲ lengthened 
to θη), which, however, since the future is a primary not 
a secondary tense, has in the future no augment. ‘To this 
future passive stem, λυθησο [ε, the middle primary end- 
ings are added, and the future passive is conjugated exactly 
like the future middle except that the stem is λυθησο[ε 
instead of λυσο /e. 


201. The aorist passive indicative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἐλύθην, I was loosed. 1. ἐλύθημεν, we were loosed. 
2. ἐλύθης, thou wast loosed. 2. ἐλύθητε, ye were loosed. 
3. ἐλύθη, he was loosed. 3. ἐλύθησαν, they were 


loosed. 


202.. The future passive indicative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. λυθήσομαι, I shall be 1. λυθησόμεθα, we shall be 
loosed. loosed. 
2. λυθήσῃ, thou wilt be 2. λυθήσεσθε, ye will be 
loosed. loosed. 
3. λυθήσεται, he will be 3. λυθήσονται, they will be 


loosed. loosed. 


94 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


203. The uses of the parts of the verb which have been 
studied so far may be summarized as follows: 


1 loose. 
Active. dw = or 
fete I am loosing. 
etek I loose for myself. 
Middle. λύομαι = or 
I am loosing for myself. 
Passive. λύομαι = I am being loosed. 
Teneo Active. ἔλυον = TI was loosing. 
Pete Middle. é\vouny = I was loosing for myself. 
Indicative : Ie ses ι 
Passive. ἐλυόμην = I was being loosed. 
Fut Active. λύσω = 7 shall loose. 
i joa Middle. Avcouat = TI shall loose for myself. 
Passive. λυθήσομαι = I shall be loosed. 
Na Active. ἔλυσα = 7 loosed: 
eae Middle. ἐλυσάμην = I loosed for myself. 
Indicative ie ick 
Passive. ἐλύθην = I was loosed. 


Formation of Aorist Passive Stems of Verbs Whose Verb 
Stems End in a Consonant 


204. Before the θ of the aorist passive tense-suffix, a 
final + or 6 of the verb stem is changed to ¢, a final x 
or y is changed to x, and a final τ, 6, or 6 is changed 
to a. The changes in the case of 7, 8, k, y can be re- 
membered if it be observed that θ is equivalent to th and 
that what the changes amount to is adding on an A to the 
preceding letters so as to make them conform to the th. 


Thus before th, p or ὃ becomes ph, and k or g becomes ch. — 


Examples: The aorist passive of πέμπω is ἐπέμφθην, of 
ἄγω, ἤχθην, of πείθω, ἐπείσθην. 


205. Like the other principal parts, however, the aorist 


ee ΜΉ ee Ὑ ΨῸῸ Το 


tae > pels a ἡ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 95 


passive of a Greek verb cannot be formed with any cer- 
tainty on the basis of general rules, but must be noted for 
each verb separately. 


206. Second Aorist Passive 


Some verbs have a second aorist passive instead of a first 
aorist passive. This second aorist passive is conjugated 
in the indicative exactly like a first aorist passive. But it 
has no @ in the tense stem. 

Example: The second aorist passive indicative of γράφω 
Is ἐγράφην, ἔγράφης, éypadn, ἔγράφημεν, ἔγράφητε, ἐγρά- 


φησαν. 
Aorist and Future of Deponent Verbs 


207. Some deponent verbs have passive, not middle, 
forms. 

Example: The aorist of ἀποκρίνομαι, I answer, is ἀπε- 
κρίθην, 1 answered.! 


208. Some deponent verbs have both middle and passive 
forms. 

Example: The aorist of γίνομαι, I become, is either 
ἐγενόμην, I became, or ἔγενήθην, I became. ἐγενόμην and 
ἐγενήθην mean exactly the same thing, both the middle 
and the passive forms having active meaning. 


200 Exercises 


I. 1. ἐπιστεύσαμεν εἰς τὸν κύριον καὶ ἔγνώσθημεν ὑπ᾽ 
αὐτοῦ. 2. ταῦτα éypady ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις. 3. ἐδιδάξατε τὰ 
τέκνα, ἐδιδάχθητε δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου. 4. ἐλήμφθη- 
σαν οἱ πιστοὶ εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, ἐξεβλήθησαν δὲ ἐξ αὐτοῦ οἱ 
ἄγγελοι οἱ πονηροί. ὃ. ἔγερθήσονται οἱ νεκροὶ τῷ λόγῳ τοῦ 
κυρίου. 6. οὗτοι οἱ τυφλοὶ συνήχθησαν εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν. 
7. ἐξεβλήθη τὰ δαιμόνια: ὃ γὰρ κύριος ἐξέβαλεν αὐτά. ὃ. 
πέμπονται μὲν καὶ νῦν οἱ μαθηταί, ἐπέμφθησαν δὲ τότε οἱ ἀπό- 


τύ occasionally ἀποκρίνομα thas middle forms. 


96 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


στολοι Kal πεμφθήσονται ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ Kal οἱ ἄγγελοι. 
9. εἰσῆλθες εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν καὶ ἐβαπτίσθης. 10. ἐπιστεύθη 
ἐν κόσμῳ, ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ. 11. οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἐσώθησαν 
ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ καὶ ἔγενήθησαν μαθηταὶ τοῦ κυρίου. 12. 
ἐπορεύθημεν εἰς ἕτερον τόπον" οὐ γὰρ δέξονται ἡμᾶς οὗτοι. 
13. ἐδοξάσθη ὁ θεὸς ὑπὸ τοῦ υἱοῦ, ἐδόξασε δὲ αὐτόν. -14. 
τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἐκηρύχθη ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις, κηρυχθήσεται 
δὲ καὶ νῦν. 15. ἑτοιμασθήσεται ἡμῖν τόπος ἐν οὐρανῷ κατὰ 
τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ κυρίου. 10. τὰ τέκνα προσηνέχθησαν τῷ 
κυρίῳ. 17. εἶδον οὗτοι τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ κυρίου καὶ ἤκουσαν 
τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ. 18. ἐν τῷ μικρῷ οἴκῳ ἀκουσθήσεται ἡ φωνὴ 
τοῦ ἀποστόλου. 19. πρῶτός εἰμι τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν, ἐσώθην δὲ 
καὶ €yw. 20. ὀψόμεθα μὲν τοὺς ἀγγέλους, ὀφθησόμεθα δὲ καὶ 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν. 

II. 1. This is the Church of God, but the sinners were 
brought into it. 2. This man was cast out on account of 
the gospel. 3. I was sent to the sinners, but you were be- 
ing sent to your brothers. 4. Thou didst not receive the 
gospel, but the others received it and were saved. 5. 
These words have been written by the apostles. 6. The 
servants will come into the house, but the sons were bap- 
tized in that hour. 7. Ye will see the Lord in heaven, but 
the apostles were taught by Him. 8. The disciples brought 
the blind men to the Lord, but the children were led by 
others. 9. The gifts were being received from the servants, 
but the law was proclaimed to the world. 10. A place 
was prepared for the brethren. 11. We went to the sea, 
but our sons will go into the temple. 12. After these 
things, they were taken up into glory. 13. The Son of 
Man was raised up from the dead? and was glorified. 14. 
The promises of God were heard in the world. 


1The article is often: omitted with κόσμος. See §311. - 
From the dead, ἐκ νεκρῶν. 


ee ee pe et ee ee 


ὡς ἀπ, «- 


* 
= 
7 
2 
¥ 
; 
7 
ἴ 
% 
i 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 97 


LESSON XVII 
The Third Declension 


210. Vocabulary 


ἅγιος, a, ov, adj., holy; οἱ 
ἅγιοι, the saints. 

αἷμα, αἵματος, τό, blood. 

αἰών, αἰῶνος, 6, an age; εἰς 
τὸν αἰῶνα, for ever; εἰς τοὺς 
αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων, for ever 
and ever. 

ἄρχων, ἄρχοντος, ὁ, a ruler. 

γράμμα, γράμματος, τό, a 
letter. 


ἐλπίς, ἔλπίδος, ἡ, a hope. 

θέλημα, θελήματος, τό, α will. 

νύξ, νυκτός, 7, a night. 

ὄνομα, ὀνόματος, TO, α name. 

πνεῦμα, πνεύματος, TO, α 8ρ17- 
at, the Spirit. 

ῥῆμα, ῥήματος, τό, a word. 

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ, flesh. 

σῶμα, σώματος, TO, a body. 


211. The declensions of (1) ἐλπίς, ἐλπίδος, ἡ, a hope, 
(2) νύξ, νυκτός, ἡ, a night, and (8) ἄρχων, ἄρχοντος, ὃ, a 


ruler, are as follows: 


ἐλπίς, ἡ, Stem ἐλπιδ-νύξ, ἡ, stem νυκτ-[ἄρχων, 6,stem ἀρχοντ- 


Sing. N. ἐλπίς vv§g 
G. ἐλπίδος νυκτός 
D. ἐλπίδι νυκτί 
Α. ἐλπίδα νύκτα 
Υ. ἐλπί νύξ 

Plur.N.V. ἐλπίδες νύκτες 
G. ἐλπίδων νυκτῶν 
D. ἐλπίσι(ν) νυξί() 
Α. ἐλπίδας νύκτας 


ἄρχων 
ἄρχοντος 
ἄρχοντι 
ἄρχοντα 
ἄρχων 
ἄρχοντες 
ἀρχόντων 
ἄρχουσι(ν) 
ἄρχοντας 


98 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


212. The case endings in the third declension are as 
follows: 


Sing. Plur, 
N. = -s or none. N. V. -€S 
G. -OS G. -ων 
Ὁ. -t 1D). -σι 
Α. -α Α. -ας 
ΔῊΝ Like nominative 

or none. 


213. These case endings are added to the stem, and the 
stem can be discovered, not from the nominative, as is 
possible in the first and second declensions, but only by 
dropping off the -os of the genitive singular. Thus the 
genitive singular must be known before any third declen- 
sion noun can be declined. 


214. It will be observed that both in the accusative 
singular ending and in the accusative plural ending the 
ais short. The dative plural -σι(ν) may have the mova- 
ble v. (See §44.) 


215. The nominative is formed in various ways, which 
it will probably be most convenient not to try to classify. 


216. The vocative also is formed differently in different 
nouns. It is very often like the nominative. 


217. Inthe dative plural the combination of consonants 
formed by the -σι of the case ending coming after the final 
consonant of the stem causes various changes, which are in 
general the same as those set forth in §156. But where 
two consonants, as vr, are dropped before the following σ, 
the preceding vowel is lengthened, o, however, being length- 
ened not to w but to ov. So in ἄρχουσι(ν), the dative 
plural of ἄρχων. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 99 


218. The gender of third declension nouns, except in 
the case of certain special classes like the nouns in -ya, 
-ματος, cannot easily be reduced to rules, and so must be 
learned for each noun separately. 


219. Thus if the student is asked what the word for 
flesh is, it is quite insufficient for him to say that it is σάρξ. 
What he must rather say is that it is σάρξ, σαρκός, fem- 
inine. Without the genitive singular, it would be im- 
possible to determine the stem; and unless the stem is 
known, of course the noun cannot be declined. And with- 
out knowing the gender, one could not use the word cor- 
rectly. One could not tell, for example, whether ὁ σάρξ 
or ἡ σάρξ or τὸ σάρξ would be correct. 


220. These two difficulties, coupled with the difficulty 
of the dative plural, make the third declension more diffi- 
cult than the first and second. Otherwise the declension 
is easy, when once the case endings have been thoroughly 
mastered and have been distinguished clearly from those 
of the other two declensions. 


221. Monosyllables of the Third Declension 


Monosyllabic nouns of the third declension have the ac- 
cent on the ultima in the genitive and dative of both num- 
bers. In the genitive plural it is the circumflex. 


Example: σάρξ, σαρκός, σαρκῶν. 

This rule is an exception to the rule of noun accent. 
In accordance with the rule of noun accent, the accent 
would remain on the same syllable as in the nominative 
singular so nearly as the general rules of accent would 
permit. : 


100 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


222. Nouns in -μα 


An important class of nouns in -μα, with stems ending in 
-ματ, are declined like ὄνομα. These nouns are all neuter. 
The declension of ὄνομα, ὀνόματος, τό, a name, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
N. A.V. ὄνομα N. A.V. ὀνόματα 
G. ὀνόματος G. ὀνομάτων 
Ὁ. ὀνόματι D. ὀνόμασι() 


Since ὄνομα is a neuter noun, it has its accusative 
and vocative of both numbers like the nominative, and its 
nominative, accusative, and vocative plural ending in a. 


(See §42.) 


223. The declensions of other third-declension nouns 
will be found in §§559-566, and can be referred to as they 
are needed. 


224. Exercises 


I. 1. ἐλπίδα οὐκ ἔχουσιν οὐδὲ τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον. 2. διὰ 
τὴν ἔλπίδα τὴν καλὴν ἤνεγκαν ταῦτα οἱ μαθηταὶ τοῦ κυρίου. 3. 
ταῦτά ἐστιν τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος. 4. ἔγράφη τὰ 
ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τῆς ζωῆς. 5. τῷ 
λόγῳ τοῦ κυρίου ἔσωσεν ἡμᾶς 6 θεός. 0. οἱ ἄρχοντες οἱ πονη- 
pol οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου. 7. ταῦτα εἶπον 
ἐκεῖνοι τοῖς ἄρχουσιν τούτου τοῦ αἰῶνος. ὃ. ὄψεσθε ὑμεῖς τὸ 
πρόσωπον τοῦ κυρίου εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ὄψονται αὐτὸ οἱ 
πονηροί, ὅτι οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. 9. οὐκέτι 
κατὰ σάρκα γινώσκομεν τὸν κύριον. 10. ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ ὑμῶν 
εἴδετε τὸν θάνατον, ἀλλὰ διὰ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος ἔχετε ἐλπίδα 
καλήν. 11. τὸ μὲν γράμμα ἀποκτείνει, ἐν τῷ δὲ πνεύματι 
ἔχετε ζωήν. 12. βλέπομεν τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ κυρίου καὶ ἐν 


| 
: 
x 
; 
3 
x 
4 
f 


-— | 


Ee TOE ae ey ere ee ae Re ee ee ee eee eee 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 101 


νυκτὶ; καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ. 13. ἐδίδαξαν of μαθηταὶ καὶ τοὺς 
ἄρχοντας καὶ τοὺς δούλους. 14. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ νυκτὶ εἴδετε τὸν 
ἄρχοντα τὸν πονηρόν. 15. μετὰ τῶν ἀρχόντων ἤμην ἐν ἐκείνῳ 
τῷ οἴκῳ. 16. μετὰ δὲ ἐκείνην τὴν νύκτα ἦλθεν οὗτος ἐν τῷ 
πνεύματι εἰς τὴν ἔρημον. 17. ταῦτά ἐστιν ῥήματα ἐλπίδος 
καὶ ζωῆς. 18. ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα εἰς τὸ ἱερόν. 
19. ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα ἐκηρύχθη ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ νυκτὶ τοῖς δούλοις 
τοῦ ἄρχοντος. 20. ἠγέρθησαν τὰ σώματα τῶν ἁγίων. 


II. 1. By the will of God we believed on the name of 
the Lord. 2. The rulers did not receive this hope from the 
apostle, because they did not believe in the Lord. 3. We 
shall know the will of God for ever. 4. In this age we 
have death, but in that age hope and life. 5. In our flesh 
we remain in this age, but through the Spirit of God we 
have a good hope. 7. By the will of God we were saved 
from our sins through the blood of the Lord. 8. In those 
days ye saw the rulers. 9. This age is evil, but in it we 
have hope. 10. These words we wrote to the rulers. 
11. We came to the good ruler and to the apostle of the 
Lord. 12. In our bodies we shall see death, but we shall 
be raised up according to the word of God. 13. Ye were 
persecuted by the ruler, but the blood of the Lord saves 
you from sin. 14. We wrote those good words to the evil 
ruler. 15. This night became to them an hour of death, 
but they believed on the name of the Lord. 16. The evil 
spirits were cast out by the word of the Lord. 


1In phrases such as ἐν νυκτί and ἐν ἡμέρᾳ, the article is often 
omitted. 


102 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XVIII 


Present Participles. Use of Participles 


925: _ Vocabulary 
προσέρχομαι, dep., 1 come to, ὧν, οὖσα, bv, being, present 
I go to, with dative. participle of εἰμί (for de- 


clension, see §580). 


226. The declension of λύων, λύουσα, λῦον, loosing, the 
present active participle of Avw, is as follows: 


Sing. 
M. F. N. 
N.V. λύων λύουσα λῦον 
G. λίύοντος λυούσης λύοντος 
10. λίύοντι λυούσῃ λύοντι 
A. λύοντα λύουσαν λῦον 
Plur. 
M. Ἐ. Ν. 
N.V.  Avovres λύουσαι λύοντα 
G. λυόντων λυουσῶν λυόντων 
D. λύουσι(ν) λυούσαις λύουσι(ν) 
A. λύοντας λυούσας λύοντα 


227. This declension, like the declension of other adjec- 
tives, should be learned across, and not down the columns. 
See §61. 


228. It will be observed that the masculine and neuter 
are declined according to the third declension (the masculine 
exactly like ἄρχων) and the feminine according to the 
first declension (like δόξα). The accent in the genitive 


eee el ee oe ee a 


ΝΥΝ να eee ee ee 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 103 


plural feminine follows the noun rule for the first declen- 
sion, not the adjective rule (see §§51, 62). 


229. It will be remembered that in the accusative plural 
the a in the ending is short in the third declension but long 
in the first declension. 


230. The declension of λυόμενος, ἡ, ov, loosing for 
himself, the present middle participle, and of λυόμενος, 7, 
ov, being loosed, the present passive participle of λύω, is as 
follows: 


Sing. 
M. F, N. 
N. V. λυόμενος λυομένη λυόμενον 
G. λλυομένου λυομένης λυομένου 
. λυομένῳ λυομένῃ λυομένῳ 
Α. λυόμενον λυομένην λυόμενον 
| Plur. 
M. F, N. 
N.V. λἀλυόμενοι λυόμεναι λυόμενα 
G. λυομένων λυομένων λυομένων 
1). λυομένοις λυομέναις λυομένοις 
Α. λυομένους λυομένας λυόμενα 


αὖ will be observed that this declension is like that of 
adjectives of the second and first declension. 


231. The present participles are formed on the present 
stem of the verb (see §151). The present participles of any 
regular verb can be made by adding -ων, -ovaa, -ov, and 
-όμενος, -ομένη, -όμενον to the present stem of that verb. 


22. Use οὗ Participles 


The participles are verbal adjectives. Being adjectives, 
they have gender, number, and case; and like other adjec- 
tives they agree in gender, number, and case with the nouns 


104 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


that they modify. On the other hand, since they partake 
of the nature of verbs, (a) they have tense and voice, (b) 
they receive, like other parts of a verb, adverbial modifiers, 
and (c) if they be participles of a transitive verb. they can 
take a direct object. 

Examples: (1)6 ἀπόστολος λέγων ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ βλέπει 
τὸν κύριον, the apostle, saying these things in the temple, 
sees the Lord. Here the participle λέγων, which means 
saying, agrees with ἀπόστολος, which is in the nomina- 
tive case and singular number and is a masculine noun. 
The participle, therefore, must be nominative singular 
masculine. On the other hand, the participle is enough 
of a verb to have tense and voice. It is in the present 
tense because the action which it denotes is represented 
as going on at the same time as the action of the 
leading verb βλέπει; it is in the active voice because 
it represents the apostle as doing something, not as hav- 
ing something done to him. And it has the adverbial 
modifier ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ and the direct object ταῦτα. On 
the other hand, it has no subject, as a finite verb (e.g. 
an indicative) would have; for the noun ἀπόστολος, 
which denotes the person represented as performing the 
action denoted by the participle, is not the subject of the 
participle, but the noun with which the participle, like any 
other adjective, agrees. 

(2) βλέπομεν τὸν ἀπόστολον λέγοντα ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, 
we see the apostle saying these things in the temple. Here 
the noun with which the participle agrees is accusative 
singular masculine. Therefore the participle must also be 
accusative singular masculine. But its direct object and its 
adverbial modifier are the same as in (1). 

(3) προσερχόμεθα τῷ ἀποστόλῳ λέγοντι ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, 
we come to the apostle while he 185 saying these things in 
the temple. Here the participle λέγοντι agrees with a 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 105 


masculine noun in the dative singular and must there- 
fore itself be dative singular masculine. But in this ex- 
ample it is quite impossible to translate the participle 
literally. The translation, we come to the apostle saying 
these things in the temple, would not do at all, for in 
that English sentence the participle saying would be un- 
derstood as agreeing not with the apostle but with the sub- 
ject of the sentence, we. It is necessary, therefore, to give 
up all attempts at translating the participle “‘literally”. In- 
stead, we must express the idea which is expressed by the 
Greek participle in an entirely different way—by the use 
of a temporal clause. When such temporal clauses are 
used to translate a Greek present participle they are usually 
introduced by while. Such a free translation would have 
been better than the literal translation even in Example (1), 
although there the literal translation was not absolutely 
impossible. It would have been rather better to translate 
ὁ ἀπόστολος λέγων ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ βλέπει τὸν κύριον by 
while the apostle ts saying these things τη the temple, he sees 
the Lord. 

(4) διδασκομένῳ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀποστόλου προσέρχονται αὐτῷ οἱ 
δοῦλοι, while he rs being taught by the apostle, the servants 
are coming to him. Here διδασκομένῳ agrees with αὐτῷ, 
which, like τῷ ἀποστόλῳ in the preceding example, is 
dative with the verb προσέρχομαι. διδασκομένῳ is the pres- 
ent passive participle of διδάσκω. 


233. The Tense of the Participle 


The tense of the participle is relative to the time of the 
leading verb. 

The present participle, therefore, is used if the action 
denoted by the participle is represented as taking place 
at the same time as the action denoted by the leading verb, 


106 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


no matter whether the action denoted by the leading verb 
is past, present or future. 

Examples: (1) διδασκομένῳ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀποστόλου προσῆλθον 
αὐτῷ οἱ δοῦλοι, while he was being taught by the apostle, the 
servants came to him. Here the action denoted by the 
participle διδασκομένῳ, though it is past with reference to 
the time when the sentence is spoken or written, is pres- 
ent with reference to the time of the leading verb—that is, 
the teaching was going on at the same time as the coming 
of the servants. Hence the present participle is used. 

(2) πορευομένῳ ἐν TH ὁδῷ προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ 
αὐτοῦ, while he was going in the way, his disciples came to 
him. It will be observed that the participles of the depo- 
nent verb πορεύομαι, like other parts of that verb, are ac- 
tive in meaning though passive in form. Otherwise this 
example is like (1). 

(3) πορευόμενος ἐν TH ὁδῷ εἶδεν τυφλόν, while he was 
going in the way, he saw a blind man. Here it will be 
observed that the participle frequently agrees with the 
unexpressed subject of a verb. Similarly λέγων ταῦτα εἶδεν 
τυφλόν, means while he was saying these things, he saw a 
blind man, and λέγοντες ταῦτα εἴδετε τυφλόν means while 
ye were saying these things, ye saw a blind man. 


234. The Attributive Participle 


The participle, like any other adjective, can stand in the 
attributive position. 


Examples: (1) It will be remembered (see §70) that 6 
ἀγαθὸς ἀπόστολος means the good apostle. In exactly the 
same way ὁ λέγων ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἀπόστολος means the 
saying -these-things-in-the-temple apostle. The participle 
(with its modifiers) is here an adjective in the attributive 
position; it takes the exact place of the attributive ad- 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 107 


jective ἀγαθός in the phrase ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀπόστολος. It is 
more usual, however, to place the attributive participle 
(with its modifiers) in the second of the two alternative 
positions in which the attributive adjective can stand. 
Thus the usual order would be ὁ ἀπόστολος ὁ λέγων ταῦτα 
ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ. Here the λέγων ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ takes the 
exact place of ἀγαθός in the phrase ὁ ἀπόστολος ὁ ἀγαθός, 
which is one of the two ways in which the good apostle can 
be expressed. 

Of course the “‘literal” translation, the saying-these-things- 
in-the-temple apostle, is not good English. The idiomatic 
English way of expressing the same idea is the apostle who 
as saying these things in the temple. 

The difference between this attributive use of the par- 
ticiple and the use which appears in Example (1) in §232 
should be noticed very carefully. In the sentence 6 ἀπό- 
στολος λέγων ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ βλέπει τὸν κύριον, the parti- 
ciple λέγων, being in the predicate, not in the attributive, 
position, goes only somewhat loosely with ὁ ἀπόστολος 
(though it agrees with it), and really modifies also the 
verb $\érec—that is, it tells when the action denoted by 
βλέπει took place. But the addition of the one little word 
ὁ before λέγων makes an enormous difference in the mean- 
ing. When that word is added we have the sentence 6 
ἀπόστολος ὁ λέγων ταῦτα ἐν TH ἱερῷ βλέπει τὸν κύριον, the 
apostle who says these things in the temple sees the Lord. 
Here λέγων stands in the attributive position, and does 
not in any way modify the verb βλέπει; but it tells what 
apostle is being spoken of. Suppose some one asks us what 
apostle we are talking about. We could reply, ‘‘Not the 
good apostle or the bad apostle, or the great apostle or 
the small apostle, but the saying-these-things-in-the-temple 
apostle.” It will be seen that the attributive participle 
identifies the particular apostle that we are talking about. 


108 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


(2) Compare εἶδον τοὺς ἀποστόλους λέγοντας ταῦτα, I 
saw the apostles while they were saying these things or I saw 
the apostles saying these things, with εἶδον τοὺς ἀποστόλους 


τοὺς λέγοντας ταῦτα, I saw the apostles [ a were saying 


| who 
these things. In the latter case the (attributive) participle 
tells what apostles we are talking about. 


235. Substantive Use of the Participle 


The participle, like any other adjective, can be used 
substantively with the article. 

It will be remembered that ὁ ἀγαθός means the good 
man; ἡ ἀγαθή, the good women; τὸ ἀγαθόν, the good thing; 
οἱ ἀγαθοί, the good men, etc. In exactly the same way ὁ 
λέγων ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ means the saying-these-things-in-the- 
temple man. The participle (with its modifiers), just like 
the adjective, tells what man we are talking about. But 
how shall the same idea be expressed in idiomatic English? 


There are various closely related ways—for example, the 
says 


man who is sayin ὴ these things τη the temple, or the one who 


says \ says 
he saying | these things in the temple, or he who ie js | 


these things in the temple. It should be observed, however, 
that none of these English phrases is a literal translation of 
the Greek. The Greek 6 does not mean the man or the one 
or he. It means the, and it is just as simple an article as 
the article in the phrase the cat or the dog or the house. 
But in English we do not use the article with the sub- 
stantive participle. Therefore we have to reproduce the 
idea of the Greek ὁ λέγων by a phrase of which the individ- 
ual parts have absolutely nothing to do with the individual 
parts of the Greek phrase. It is only the total meaning 
of the English phrase which is the same as the total mean- 
ing of the Greek phrase. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 109 


The following examples should also be examined: 

(1) εἶδον τὸν λέγοντα ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, I saw the one 
who was saying these things in the temple. Here the Greek 
uses the present participle because the time of the action de- 
noted by the participle is the same as that of the action 
denoted by the leading verb, even though the action de- 
noted by the leading verb here happens to be in past time. 

(2) εἶδον τοὺς λέγοντας ταῦτα, I saw those who were 
saying these things. 

(3) ὁ ἀδελφὸς τῆς λεγούσης ταῦτα δοῦλός ἐστιν, the 
brother of the woman who is saying these things 18 a servant. 

(4) ὁ πιστεύων eis τὸν ἐγείροντα τοὺς νεκροὺς σώζεται, 
he who believes on the One who raises the dead is being saved. 

(5) τὸ σῶζον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ ἐστιν, 
the thing that saves (or that which saves) men is the will of 
God. 

(6) τὰ βλεπόμενα ov μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, the things that 
are seen do not remain for ever. 


236. The following summary may be found useful: 


Present Participles 


Act. λύων = loosing. 
Mid. λυόμενος = loosing for himself. 
Pass. λυόμενος = being loosed. 


Present Participles with Article 


the man who looses. 
= < the one who looses. 
he who looses. 


Act. ὁ λύων, 
the loosing man 


Mid. 6 λυόμενος, the man who looses for himself. 
the loosing-for- the one who looses for himself. 
himself man he who looses for himself. 


110 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
Pass. ὁ λυόμενος, ; the man who is being loosed. 
the being-loosed = < the one who ts being loosed. 
man l he who is being loosed. 
Act. τὸ λῦον, __ JS the thing that looses. 
the loosing thing δ ὶ that which looses. 


the men who loose. 
= < the ones who loose. 
those who loose. 


Act. ot λύοντες, 
the loosing men 


237. It should be noticed that the English word he in 
the phrase he who looses is not a real—certainly not an ordi- 
nary—personal pronoun, but merely the light antecedent 
of the relative pronoun who. He has no value of its own 
but goes in the closest possible way with who, so as to form 
the phrase he who. The Greek language, rather strangely 
as it may seem to us, possesses no such light antecedent of 
the relative. The ordinary Greek way, therefore, of ex- 
pressing the idea he who looses is to use article with parti- 
ciple and say the loosing man, ὁ λύων. Similarly, the 
English word that in the phrase that which looses, and the 
English word those in the phrase those who loose, are not 
really demonstrative adjectives or pronouns; they do not 
really “point out”? anything. They are very different, for 
example, from the demonstratives in the phrases that house 
across the street or those trees over there on the campus. ‘The 
that and the those in these sentences could be accompanied 
by a pointing finger; they are real demonstratives. But 
the that and the those in the phrases that which looses or 
those that loose are simply light antecedents of the relative, 
and for them the Greek has no equivalent. Such phrases, 
therefore, must be cast into an entirely different mould 
before they can be translated into Greek. 


τα “ΝΣ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK Heb 


238. The English word that has a number of widely dif- 
ferent uses. It is (1) a conjunction, (2) a demonstrative 
adjective or pronoun, (3) a light antecedent of the relative, 
and (4) a relative pronoun like which. 

Example: I know that that which saves the men that receive 
that gospel zs the will of God. Here the first that is a conjunc- 
tion; the second, the light antecedent of the relative; the 
third, a relative pronoun; the fourth, a real demonstrative. 
The Greek language has a different way of expressing each 
of these uses of that. ‘The sentence in Greek would be as 
follows: γινώσκω ὅτι τὸ σῶζον τοὺς δεχομένους ἐκεῖνο TO 
εὐαγγέλιον τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ ἐστιν. 

The two uses of the English word those may be illustrated 
by the sentence, those who believe will receive those good 
men, οἱ πιστεύοντες δέξονται ἐκείνους τοὺς ἀγαθούς. 


239. The importance of this lesson and the two follow- 
ing lessons can hardly be overestimated. Unless the stu- 
dent understands thoroughly the use of participles, it will 
be quite impossible for him ever to master the later lessons 
or to read the Greek Testament. The participle is quite 
the crucial matter in the study of Greek. 


240. Exercises 


I. 1. διωκόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ ἄρχοντος προσευχόμεθα τῷ 
θεῷ. 2. ὁ σὲ δεχόμενος δέχεται καὶ τὸν κύριον. 3. ταῦτα λέ- 
γομεν τοῖς πορευομένοις εἰς τὸν οἶκον περὶ τοῦ ἔγείροντος τοὺς 
νεκρούς. 4. ἐξερχομένοις ἐκ τῆς ἐκκλησίας λέγει ἡμῖν ταῦτα. 
5. αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ διωκόμεναι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων πιστεύουσιν 
εἰς τὸν κύριον. 6. οἱ πιστεύοντες εἰς τὸν κύριον σώζονται. 7. 
γινώσκει ὁ θεὸς τὰ γραφόμενα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τῆς ζωῆς. 8. 
ἐξήλθομεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἄγοντες τὰ τέκνα. 9. εἴδομεν τοὺς 
λαμβάνοντας τὰ δῶρα ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων. 10. οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 


112 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


9 « ld ͵ 3 x “4 > ~ ey ’ 9 
ἄρχων ὁ δεχόμενός με εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ. 1]. ἅγιοί εἰσιν 
3 n 
ot πιστεύοντες εἰς TOV κύριον Kal σωζόμενοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 12. 
τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ σῶζον ἡμᾶς. 18. ἦσαν ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τῷ 
λυομένῳ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἄρχοντος. 14. ἦσαν ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ λνυομένῳ 
ὑπὸ τοῦ ἄρχοντος. 15. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐκκλησία ἡ πιστεύουσα 
εἰς τὸν κύριον. 10. διδασκόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἐπορεύεσθε 
9 ΄“ 4 na ALN , ’ \ 9 3 « ᾽ 
ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ τῇ ἀναβαινούσῃ εἰς τὴν ἔρημον. 17. ἐκηρύχθη ὑπ 
αὐτῶν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τὸ σῶζον τοὺς ἁμαρτωλούς. 18. Todro 
ἐστιν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τὸ κηρυσσόμενον ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ σῶζον 
Ἁ 9 , “5 A 3 A , A 
τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. 19. ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτὸν βαπτίζοντα τοὺς μα- 
θητάς. 20. ἔτι ὄντα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ εἴδομεν αὐτόν. 


II. 1. While he was still in the! flesh the Lord was sav- 
ing those who were believing on Him. 2. While we were 
being taught in the temple we were being persecuted by 
the ruler. 8. Those who are being saved by the Lord know 
Him who saves them. 4. Those who were proclaiming 
these things received, themselves also, the things which 
were being proclaimed by them. 5. She who is receiving 
the Lord into her house sees the face of the One who saves 
her. 6. While He was still teaching in the temple we saw 
Him. 7. While we were teaching in the temple we saw 
the One who saves us. 8. The hope that is seen is not hope. 
9. The Lord said to those who were believing on Him that 
God saves sinners. 10. The brothers of those who perse- 
cute the disciples have not hope. 11. Those who say these 
things do not know the One who saves the Church. 12. We 
were cast out by the ruler who persecutes the Church. 
13. This is the voice which is being heard by those who 
believe in the Lord. 14. While I was remaining in the 
house, I saw the women who were taking gifts from the 
disciples. 15. Being preached by those who believe in the 
Lord, the gospel will lead men into the Church. 16. The 
faithful ones will see the Lord going up into heaven. 

1In such phrases, the article is often omitted in Greek. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 113 


LESSON XIX 


Aorist Participles Active and Middle 
Use of Participles (continued) 
The Negatives ov and μή. 


241. Vocabulary 


ἀγαγών, having led, 2nd aor. 


act. part. of -ayw. 


ἀπέθανον, I died, 2nd aor. 


of ἀποθνήσκω. 


ἀπεκρίθην, 1 answered, aor. 
indic., pass. in form, of 


ἀποκρίνομαι. 


εἰπών, having said, 2nd aor. 


act. part. of λέγω. 


ἐλθών, having come, 2nd aor. 
part. of ἔρχομαι. 
ἐνεγκών, having borne, having 
brought, 2nd aor. act. part. 
of φέρω (the 1st aorist, 
ἤνεγκα; 18 commoner in the 
indicative). 
ἰδών, having seen, 2nd aor. 
act. part. of βλέπω (or 


ὁράω). 


242. The declension of λύσας, λύσασα, λῦσαν, having 


loosed, the aorist active participle of λύω, is as follows: 


M. 
λύσας 
λύσαντος 
λύσαντι 
λύσαντα 


Μ. 
λύσαντες 
λυσάντων 
λύσασι(ν) 
λύσαντας 


Sing. 


F. 
λύσασα 
λυσάσης 
λυσάσῃ 
λύσασαν 


Plur. 


Lhe 
λύσασαι 
λυσασῶν 
λυσάσαις 
λυσάσας 


Ν. 
λῦσαν 
λύσαντος 
λύσαντι 
λῦσαν 


Ν. 
λύσαντα 
λυσάντων 
λύσασι(ν) 
λύσαντα 


114 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


243. Like the present active participle, the aorist active 
participle is declined according to the third declension in 
the masculine and neuter, and according to the first declen- 
sion in the feminine. 


244. The characteristic oa, which, it will be remem- 
bered is the sign of the aorist system (the third of the prin- 
cipal parts), appears throughout. ‘This ca, as in the rest 
of the aorist system, is added to the verb stem. 


245. The augment, however, appears only in the indica- 
tive mood. Thus, although the aorist active indicative 
of λύω is ἔλυσα, the aorist active participle is not ἐλύσας, 
but λύσας, and although the aorist active indicative of 
ἀκούω is ἤκουσα the aorist active participle is not ἠκούσας 
but ἀκούσας. 


246. The declension of λυσάμενος, ἡ, ov, having loosed 
for himself, the aorist middle participle of λύω, is as follows: 


Sing. 
M. oe N. 
N. V. λυσάμενος λυσαμένη λυσάμενον 
G. λυσαμένου λυσαμένης λυσαμένου 
D. λυσαμένῳ λυσαμένῃ λυσαμένῳ 
Α. λυσάμενον λυσαμένην λυσάμενον 
Plur. 
M. F. N. 
N.V. λυσάμενοι λυσάμεναι λυσάμενα 
α. λυσαμένων λυσαμένων λυσαμένων 
10. λυσαμένοις λυσαμέναις λυσαμένοις 
A. λυσαμένους λυσαμένας λυσάμενα 


247. Like the present middle and passive participle, the 
aorist middle participle (the aorist passive is quite differ- 


: 
, 
; 
ἢ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 115 


ent) is declined like an ordinary adjective of the second 
and first declension. 


248. Like the aorist active participle and the rest of 
the aorist system, the aorist middle participle is formed on 
the aorist stem. The characteristic oa appears through- 
out. 


249. The declension of ἰδών, ἰδοῦσα, iddv, having seen, 
the second aorist active participle of βλέπω (it may also be 
regarded as coming from ὁράω), is as follows: 


Sing. 
M. F, N. 
N.V. ἰδών ἰδοῦσα ἰδόν 
(ᾳ. ἰδόντος ἰδούσης ἰδόντος 
Ὠ. ἰδόντι ἰδούσῃ ἰδόντι 
Α. ἰδόντα ἰδοῦσαν ἰδόν 
Plur. 
M. ΒΕ. Ν. 
N.V. ἐἰδόντες ἰδοῦσαι ἰδόντα 
G. ἰδόντων ἰδουσῶν ἰδόντων 
D. ἐἰδοῦσι(ν) ἰδούσαις ἰδοῦσι(ν) 
Α. ἰδόντας ἰδούσας ἰδόντα 


250. It will be observed that the second aorist active 
participle is declined like the present active participle ex- 
cept that it has an irregular accent. The accent on the 
first form does not follow the verb rule of recessive accent, 
but is on the ultima. Thereafter the noun rule is followed, 
the accent remaining on the same syllable throughout, except 
in the genitive plural feminine, where §51 comes into play. 


251. It will be remembered that the augment appears 
only in the indicative mood. It must therefore be dropped 


116 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


from the third of the principal parts before the aorist par- 
ticiple can be formed. In irregular verbs like βλέπω 
(6paw) the dropping of the augment in the second aorist 
sometimes gives difficulty. The third of the principal parts 
of βλέπω (ὁράω) is εἶδον. Without the augment the 
second aorist stem 15 i6-, for ὁ was here irregularly aug- 
mented to e. On the other hand, the second aorist par- 
ticiple of λέγω is εἰπών (εἶπον being the second aor- 
ist indicative), because here eiz- was the second aorist 
stem and being regarded as long enough already was not 
changed at all for the augment. 


252. Except in the case of a few such verbs, where the 
dropping of the augment from the third of the principal 
parts in order to get the aorist stem to which the -wy is 
added to form the participle, might give difficulty, the 
student is expected to perform the necessary processes for 
himself. Thus if a form ἀποθανὼν is found in the exer- 
cises, the student is expected to see that this form is the 
participle of a second aorist of which the indicative (with 
the augment) is ἀπέθανον. This form, since the verb is 
irregular, will be found in the general vocabulary. 


253. The second aorist middle participle is declined 
exactly like the present middle participle, and differs from 
the present middle participle only because it is formed on 
the second aorist stem instead of on the present stem. Thus 
λαβόμενος is the second aorist middle participle of λαμβάνω, 
ἔλαβον being the second aorist active indicative (third of 
the principal parts). 


254. Use of the Aorist Participle 


In accordance with the principle formulated in §233, 
that the tense of the participle is relative to the time of the 
leading verb, the aorist participle denotes action prior to 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 117 


the action denoted by the leading verb, whether the action 
denoted by the leading verb is past, present or future. 


Examples: 

(1) ὁ ἀπόστολος εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ βλέπει τὸν κύριον, 
the apostle having said these things in the temple is seeing 
the Lord. Here εἰπών, the aorist participle, denotes action 
prior to the action denoted by βλέπει. Compare Example (1) 
INES 232. 

(2) εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἀπῆλθεν, having said these things he 
went away. The literal translation of the participle is 
here perfectly possible. But it would be more idiomatic 
English to translate, when he had said these things he went 
away, or after he had said these things he went away. Com- 
pare λέγων ταῦτα ἀπῆλθεν, he went away saying these 
things or while he was saying these things he went away. 
Notice that when a Greek present participle is translated 
by a temporal clause in English, the English word that in- 
troduces the temporal clause is naturally while, and when it 
is an aorist participle that is to be translated into English, 
the English word introducing the temporal clause is nat- 
urally when or after. In the case of the aorist participle, 
the verb in the English temporal clause will often be per- 
fect (“has seen’”’, etc.) or pluperfect (‘“‘had seen’’, etc.)— 
perfect when the leading verb is present or future, and plu- 
perfect when the leading verb is past. 

(3) εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἀπέρχεται, having said these things he 
goes away, or after he has sazd these things he goes away. 

(4) προσῆλθον αὐτῷ εἰπόντι ταῦτα, they came to him 
after he had said these things. Here the literal transla- 
tion of the participle would be absolutely impossible in 
English, because in the English sentence they came to him 
having said these things, the having said would agree not 
with him but with the subject of the sentence, they, and 
the sentence would be a translation, not of προσῆλθον 


118 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


αὐτῷ εἰπόντι ταῦτα but of προσῆλθον αὐτῷ εἰπόντες ταῦτα. 
Compare with προσῆλθον αὐτῷ εἰπόντι ταῦτα the sentence 
προσῆλθον αὐτῷ λέγοντι ταῦτα, which means they came to 
him while he was saying these things. 

(5) ἐλθόντες πρὸς τὸν κύριον ὀψόμεθα αὐτόν, having come 
to the Lord we shall.see Him, or when (or after) we have come 
to the Lord we shall see Him. 


255. The aorist participle can of course be used attribu- 
tively or substantively with the article (see §234, 235). 

Examples: 

(1) ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ ἀκούσας ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἦλθεν εἰς TOV 
οἶκον, the having-heard-these-things-in-the-temple disciple 


went into the house, or the disciple who sane a 4 these 


things in the temple went into the house. On the other hand, 
ὁ μαθητὴς ἀκούσας ταῦτα ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον Would 
mean the disciple, when he had heard these things in the 
temple, went into the house. 

(2) ὁ ἀκούσας ταῦτα ἀπῆλθεν, the having-heard-these- 


he 
things man went away, or [ one | who ‘had pst a| these 
the man 
things went away. On the other hand ἀκούσας ταῦτα ἀπῆλθεν 
would mean having heard these things he went away or when he 
had heard these things he went away. In the former sentence 
ὁ ἀκούσας tells what man we are talking about, while 
ἀκούσας without the article merely adds a detail about a 
person who is designated in some other way or not desig- 
nated at all. 
(3) εἶδον τοὺς εἰπόντας ταῦτα, I saw the having-said-these- 


(those 
things men, or I saw }the ones; who had said these things. 
\the men] 
The student should compare with these examples: the 


corresponding examples given for the present participle. 


a ee ee ee eS oS Pee on 


Se ee ee ee 


ὌΝ ee ee κι :- 


[ 


as 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 119 


256. The Negatives 


ov is the negative of the indicative, μή is the negative 
of the other moods, including the infinitive and the par- 
ticiple. 

Example: ὁ μὴ πιστεύων οὐ σώζεται, the not-believing one 
185 not saved, or he who does not believe is not saved. 
Here μή negatives the participle πιστεύων, and ov negatives 
the indicative σώζεται. 


257. Exercises 


I. 1. λαβόντες ταῦτα παρὰ τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς τὸν 
, 3 U > \ 3} , 5 « 4 
κύριον ἐξήλθομεν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον. 2. πισταί εἰσιν ai δεξάμεναι 
τοὺς διωκομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ ἄρχοντος. 3. εἴδομεν αὐτοὺς καὶ 
ld > “ ᾽ A 3 4 > > “ e ᾽ fd 
μένοντας ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ Kal ἐξελθόντας ἐξ αὐτοῦ. 4. οἱ ἰδόντες 
τὸν κύριον ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἀγαγόντας τὸν μαθητὴν ἐκ τοῦ 
ἱεροῦ. ὅ. ταῦτα εἴπομεν περὶ τοῦ σώσαντος ἡμᾶς. 6. οὗτοί 
εἰσιν οἱ κηρύξαντες τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ διώξαν- 
τες τοὺς πιστεύοντας. 7. προσενεγκόντες τῷ κυρίῳ TOV διωκό- 
μενον ὑπὸ τοῦ ἄρχοντος τοῦ πονηροῦ ἀπήλθετε εἰς ἄλλον τό- 
ial “ , 3 I ᾽ Δ Ul 3. la 
πον. ὃ. προσῆλθον τῷ κυρίῳ ἐλθόντι εἰς TO ἱερόν. 9. ἐπίστευ- 
σας εἰς αὐτὸν εἰπόντα ταῦτα. 10. ταῦτα εἶπον ἐξελθὼν 
9 “ bd / ε \ 3 \ \ I δ) ᾽ y 3 
ἐκ τῆς ἐκκλησίας. 11]. ὁ μὴ ἰδὼν τὸν κύριον οὐκ ἐπίστευσεν εἰς 
3 I “ > € y ᾽ nN 3 “Ὁ « “ la) bp 
αὐτόν. 12. ταῦτα εἶπεν ὁ κύριος ἔτι ὧν ἐν TH ὁδῷ Tots ἐξελ- 
a la) ’ ) a) 
θοῦσιν ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου Kal πορευομένοις μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 13. ἀκού- 
σαντες τὰ λεγόμενα ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν. 
14. εἴδομεν τοὺς γενομένους μαθητὰς τοῦ κυρίου καὶ ἔτι μένοντας 
> Glog / bd “ “ U A li \ Ud a“ 
ἐν TH ἐλπίδι αὐτῶν TH πρώτῃ. 15. τὰ τέκνα τὰ λαβόντα ταῦτα 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἀκουσάντων τοῦ κυρίου εἶδον αὐτὸν ἔτι ὄντα ἐν τῷ 
οἴκῳ. 10. ἰδοῦσαι αὗται τὸν κηρύξαντα τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἐκεῖνο 
4» \ ᾽ \ ᾽ ’ τὰ A io: « 3, 
ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν οἶκον. 17. οἱ ἄγγελοι 
οἱ πεσόντες ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πονηροὶ ἦσαν. 18. ἰδόντες τοὺς 
ἔτι ὄντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἐκήρυξαν αὐτοῖς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ. 


120 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


19. ταῦτα ἀπεκρίθη τοῖς προσενεγκοῦσιν αὐτῷ τὰ τέκνα. 20. 
9 , \ 3 \ / e a“ 
ἀπήλθομεν μὴ ἰδόντες τὸν διδάξαντα ἡμᾶς. 


II. 1. Those who have not seen the apostle do not know 
him. 2. I did not see him who had believed on the Lord. 
3. I saw him after he had believed on the Lord, but ye saw 
him while he was still in the kingdom of the Evil One. 
4. Having heard these things we believed on Him who had 
died in behalf of us. 5. We came to those who were going 
in the way. 6. We shall see the apostle after we have gone 
into this house. 7. Those men said to those who had gone 
into the house that the Lord is good. 8. While we were 
saying these things we were going into our house. 9. 
When they had received these gifts from the ones who had 
brought them, they came together into the church. 10. 
These are the women who received the one who had taught 
them. 11. When these men had seen the Lord, they were 
brought to the rulers. 12. The disciples who had come 
into the church were baptized by the apostles who had seen 
the Lord. 138. The blind man who had received this man 
was with those who were persecuting him. 14. The 
demons that were being cast out said this to him who was 
casting them out. 15. As we were going through the 
desert, we taught those who were with us. 16. We saw 
the servant when he had believed on the Lord and was still 
in the house. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 121 


LESSON XX 


Aorist Passive Participle 
Genitive Absolute 


258. Vocabulary 


ypadeis, having been written, ἱμάτιον, τό, a garment. 
2nd aor. pass. part. of οἰκία, ἡ, a house (a synonym 
γράφω (declined like a 1st of οἶκος). 
aor. pass. part.). παιδίον, τό, a little child. 
ἐκεῖ, adv., there. συναγωγή, ἡ, α synagogue. 
εὐθέως or εὐθύς, adv., ζγηηο- στρατιώτης, ov, ὃ, a soldier. 
diately. φυλακή, ἡ, @ guard, a prison. 


259. The declension of λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν, having been 
loosed, the aorist passive participle of λύω, is as follows: 


Sing. 
M. ΒΕ. Ν. 
N. Υ. λυθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν 
G. λυθέντος λυθείσης λυθέντος 
D. λυθέντι λυθείσῃ λυθέντι 
Α. λυθέντα λυθεῖσαν λυθέν 
Plur.: 
M. τὰ Ν. 
Ν. Ν. λυθέντες λυθεῖσαι λυθέντα 
G. λυθέντων λυθεισῶν λυθέντων 
D. λυθεῖσι() λυθείσαις λυθεϊσι(ν) 
Α. λυθέντας λυθείσας λυθέντα 


122 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


260. Like the present active participle and the aorist 
active participle, the aorist passive participle is declined 
according to the third declension in the masculine and 
neuter, and according to the first declension in the feminine. 


261. The characteristic -θε, which it will be remembered 
is the sign of the aorist passive system (the sixth of the prin- 
cipal parts), appears throughout. ‘This -6e, as in the rest 
of the aorist passive system, is added to the verb stem. 


262. The augment, of course, must be dropped (from 
the sixth of the principal parts) before the aorist passive 
participle can be formed. Compare $§251, 252. 


263. The aorist passive participle has an irregular 
accent, the accent in the nominative singular masculine not 
being recessive. In the other forms of the declension the 
rule of noun accent is followed, except of course in the geni- 
tive plural feminine, where §§51, 228 come into play. 


264. Like the other aorist participles, the aorist passive 
participle denotes action prior to the time of the leading 
verb; and to it applies also all that has been said about the 
attributive and substantive uses of the participle. 


Examples: 
(1) ἐκβληθέντα τὰ δαιμόνια ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἀπῆλθεν εἰς 
τὴν θάλασσαν, the demons, having been cast out by the Lord, 
{ when 


went away into the sea, or | after the demons had been cast 
out by the Lord, they went away into the sea. 

(2) ἐγερθέντι ἐκ νεκρῶν προσῆλθον αὐτῷ, they came to Him 
after He had been raised from the dead. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 1238 


(3) οἱ διδαχθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀποστόλου ἦλθον εἰς τὸν οἶκον, 
the having-been-taught-by-the-apostle men came into the 


the men 

house, or i a who had been taught by the apostle 
those 

came into the house. 


265. The following summary will serve for the review of 
what has been learned thus far about the participles: 


I. The Participles 


Act. λύων = loosing. 
Present 4 Mid. λυόμενος = loosing for himself. 
| Pass. λυόμενος = being loosed. 
Act. λύσας = having loosed. 


Aorist 4 Mid. λυσάμενος 
Pass. λυθείς 


having loosed for himself. 
having been loosed. 


II. Article with Participle 


the man who looses. 
the one who looses. 
he who looses. 


Act. ὁ λύων, 
the loosing man. 


the man who looses for him- 
Mid. ὁ λυόμενος, self. 


the loosing-for- the one who looses for him- 
himself man. self. 


Present 


he who looses for himself. 


Pass. ὁ λυόμενος, the man who ts being loosed. 
the being-loosed the one who is being loosed. 
man. he who is being loosed. 


124 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Act. ὁ λύσας, 
the having-loosed 
man. 


the man who (has) loosed. 
the one who (has) loosed. 
he who (has) loosed. 


: man who (has) loosed 


for himself. 


ME DS ir ne colin (has) loosed for 


Aorist 4 the having-loosed- 


ἐμ τ UN Ee loosed for him- 
self. 
Pies ates: the man who has been roosed. 
a pent ieee = + the one who{ has Deen | loosed. 
δεν Cott [ne who eas loosed. 
266. The Genitive Absolute 


A noun or pronoun with a participle often stands out of 
connection with the rest of the sentence in the construction 
called the genitive absolute. 


Examples: 

(1) εἰπόντων ταῦτα τῶν ἀποστόλων οἱ μαθηταὶ ἀπῆλθον, 
the apostles having said these things, the disciples went 
away. Here εἰπόντων and τῶν ἀποστόλων stand in the 
genitive absolute. ἀποστόλων is not the subject of any 
verb, the subject of the only finite verb in the sentence 
being μαθηταί, nor has it any other connection with the 
framework of the sentence. It is therefore absolute (the 
word means “loosed” or “separated’’). In the English 
translation, the apostles having said is in the absolute case, 
which in English grammar is called the nominative abso- 
lute. But this nominative absolute is very much less com- 
mon in English than the genitive absolute is in Greek. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 125 


Usually, therefore, it is better to translate the Greek geni- 
tive absolute by a clause, thus giving up any attempt 
at a “‘literal” translation. For example, instead of the 
“literal” translation of the sentence just given, it would have 
been better to translate, when (or after) the apostles had 
said these things, the disciples went away. Of course all that 
has already been said about the tense of the participle 
applies to the participle in the genitive absolute as well as 
in other constructions. 


It should be noticed that the genitive absolute is used 
only when the noun or pronoun going with the participle 
is different from the subject of the finite verb. Thus 
in the sentence, εἰπόντες ταῦτα οἱ ἀπόστολοι ἀπῆλθον, the 
apostles, having said these things, went away, or when the 
apostles had said these things they went away, the word 
ἀπόστολοι has a construction in the sentence; it is the subject 
of the leading verb ἀπῆλθον. Therefore it is not “absolute.” 
But in the former example it is not the apostles but some 
one else that is represented as performing the action de- 
noted by the leading verb. Hence, in that former example 
ἀποστόλων is not the subject of the sentence but genitive 
absolute. 


(2) λέγοντος αὐτοῦ ταῦτα οἱ μαθηταὶ ἀπῆλθον, while 
he was saying these things, the disciples went away. Compare 
λέγων ταῦτα ἀπῆλθεν, while he was saying these things he 
went away or he went away saying these things. 


(3) τῶν μαθητῶν διδαχθέντων ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἐξῆλθον εἰς 
τὴν ἔρημον οἱ δοῦλοι, when the disciples had been taught by 
the Lord, the servants went out into the desert. Compare 
οἱ μαθηταὶ διδαχθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἐξῆλθον εἰς τὴν ἔρημον, 
when the disciples had been taught by the Lord, they went 
out into the desert. 


126 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


267. Exercises 


I. 1. πορευθέντος τοῦ ἄρχοντος πρὸς τὸν κύριον οἱ δοῦλοι 
εἶπον ταῦτα τοῖς μαθηταῖς. 2. πορευθεὶς πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὁ ἄρχων 
ἐπίστευσεν εἰς τὸν κύριον. ὦ. πιστευσάντων" ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν 

3 \ 9 \ ς 7 9 ’ \ 
κύριον εὐθὺς ἐπίστευσε Kal ὁ ἄρχων. 4. εἰσελθόντος εἰς τὴν 
οἰκίαν τοῦ ἔγερθέντος ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐθαύμασαν. 
ὃ. ἐκβληθέντος αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῆς συναγωγῆς συνήχθησαν οἱ ἄρχον- 

> , 9 [4 on 9 , ᾿ \ 4« , 

τες. 0. ἐκβληθέντα ἐκ τῆς συναγωγῆς ἐδίδαξεν αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος. 
7. εἰπόντος ταῦτα τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐκήρυ- 
ξαν» τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ. 8. τοῖς θεραπευθεῖσιν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
᾽" ἘΠ 9 , A “ 3 is U 3 \ 
εἴπετε ῥήματα ἐλπίδος Kal ζωῆς. 9. ἐλθόντος τούτου εἰς τὴν 
οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ εὐθέως εἴπομεν τοῖς ἄλλοις τὰ ῥήματα τὰ παρα- 
λημφθέντα ἀπὸ τοῦ κυρίου. 10. βληθέντες εἰς φυλακὴν διὰ τὸ 
εὐαγγέλιον τὸ κηρυχθὲν αὐτοῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀποστόλου ἐδόξασαν 
᾽ν on \ , 3 ! 9 / 9 ial ’ Φ 
ἐκεὶ TOV σώσαντα αὐτούς. 11. ἀναληφθέντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οὐρα- 
νὸν εἰσῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτῶν. 12. ἐδέξασθε 

\ 3 lA bd “ mn \ \ , 3 \ 
τοὺς ἐκβληθέντας EK τῆς συναγωγῆς Kal Tas δεξαμένας αὐτοὺς 
εἰς τὰς οἰκίας αὐτῶν. 138. αὗταί εἰσιν αἱ διωχθεῖσαι καὶ ἔτι 
διωκόμεναι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων. 14. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡ κη- 
ρυχθεῖσα ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδόντων τὸν κύριον. 15. τῶν 
στρατιωτῶν διωξάντων ἡμᾶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ἐδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ 
ὄντες ἐκεῖ. 16. διωχθέντας ἡμᾶς ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν ἐδέ- 
Eavro οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ. 17. εἰσερχομένῳ σοι εἰς τὴν 
οἰκίαν προσῆλθον οἱ ἄρχοντες, εἰσελθόντα' δὲ ἐξέβαλον. 18. 
ταῦτα μὲν εἶπον αὐτοῖς προσφέρουσι τὰ παιδία τῷ κυρίῳ, 
ἐκεῖνα δὲ προσενεγκοῦσιν. 19. πορευομένου μὲν τοῦ κυρίου 
μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ ἔλεγον οἱ ἀπόστολοι ταῦτα, ἐλθόντος 
δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ἐκεῖνα. 20. ταῦτα εἶπον ὑμῖν ἔτι οὖσιν μετ᾽ 
ἐμοῦ. 

II. 1. When the soldiers had taken the garments from 
the children, the disciples were cast out of the house. 

1 What noun or pronoun is naturally to be supplied as that with which 
εἰσελθόντα agrees? 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 127 


2. When the disciples had been cast out of the synagogue, 
they came to us. 3. While we were coming into our house, 
the Lord said these things to the rulers. 4. The Lord said 
those things to you both while ye were with Him in the way 
and after ye had come to the ruler. 5. Those who had heard 
the apostle saying these things saw the house which had 
been destroyed by the soldiers. 6. When the rulers had 
heard the things which were being said by the Lord, they 
persecuted the disciples. 7. While the disciples were being 
persecuted by the rulers, the apostles were going into an- 
other house. 8. Those who went into the house of the ruler 
were my brothers. 9. When our names have been written 
into the book of life, we shall see the Lord. 10. Having 
been brought to the Lord by these disciples we see Him for 
ever. 11. These are the rulers who have become dis- 
ciples of Thee. 12. When the apostle had been cast into 
prison, the disciples who had heard these things went away 
into another place. 13. After those women had been cast 
into prison, we went away into the desert. 14. When 
those who had been cast into prison had seen the man who 
had been raised up, they marvelled and believed on the 
Lord. 15. When the disciples had led to the Lord those who 
had been persecuted on account of Him, those servants came 
to us bringing good gifts. 16. Those who have not received 
this hope from God will not enter into the kingdom of 
heaven. 


128 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXI 
The Subjunctive Mood. 


268. 


ἁμαρτάνω, I sin. 

δικαιοσύνη, ἡ, righteousness. 

ἐάν, conditional particle, 
with subjunctive, τ. 

εἰ, with indicative, 7f. 

εὐαγγελίζομαι, dep. with 
middle forms, I preach 
the gospel, I preach the 
gospel to (with acc. of the 
thing preached and either 
acc. or dat. of the person 
to whom it is preached). 

iva, conj., with subjunctive, 
an order that. 


209. 


Vocabulary 


λαός, 6, a people. 

λοιπός, ἡ, Ov, adj. remaining; 
ot λοιποί, the rest (= the 
remaining persons). 

μακάριος, a, ov, adj., blessed. 

μαρτυρία, ἡ, a witnessing, a 
testimony, α witness. 

μηδέ, and not, nor (with 
moods other than the in- 
dicative); μηδέ...... μηδέ, 
neither. .... nor. 

μηκέτι, no longer (with moods 
other than the indicative). 

ὄχλος, ὁ, a crowd, a multitude. 


The subjunctive mood occurs only in the present 


and aorist tenses (except for very rare occurrences of the 
perfect). It has primary personal endings throughout, 
even in the aorist (which, it will be remembered, is a 
secondary tense). The personal endings are preceded 
throughout by a long variable vowel ὦ /n instead of the short 
variable vowel o/e which occurs in the present indicative. 


270. ‘The present active subjunctive of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 1. Avw Plur. 1. λύωμεν 
2. UNS © 2. λύητε 
3. UN 3. λύωσι(ν) 


] 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 129 


271. The present middle and passive subjunctive of λύω 
is as follows: 


Sing. 1. λύωμαι Plur. 1. λυώμεθα 
2. AUN 2. λύησθε 
3. λύηται 3. λύωνται 


272. It will be observed that these present subjunctive 
forms are like the present indicative forms except that a 
long vowel comes immediately after the stem, while in 
the indicative there is a short vowel—w of the subjunctive 
standing instead of the o of the indicative, and 7 of the sub- 
junctive standing instead of the ε of the indicative. The 
only exceptions are (1) in the present active, third person 
plural, where w in the subjunctive stands instead of ov in 
the indicative, and (2) in the present middle and passive, 
second person singular, where the indicative already has 7 
(in Avy). | 


273. The -wot(v) of the third person plural active may 
have the movable ν. 


274. The aorist active subjunctive is as follows: 


Sing. 1. λύσω Plur. 1. λύσωμεν 
2. λύσῃς 2. λύσητε 
3. λύσῃ 3. λύσωσι(ν) 


275. The aorist middle subjunctive is as follows: 


Sing. 1. λύσωμαι Plur. 1. λυσώμεθα 
2. λύσῃ 2. λύσησθε 
3. λύσηται 3. λύσωνται 


276. It will be observed that the endings (with variable 
vowel) are exactly the same in the aorist active and middle 


130 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


subjunctive as they are in the present active and middle 


subjunctive. But these endings (with variable vowel) are 
in the aorist added to the aorist stem, whereas in the present 
they are added to the present stem. The o makes all the 
difference. . 


277. There is in the aorist subjunctive of course no 
augment (see §245). 


278. ‘The second aorist active and middle subjunctive is 
conjugated exactly like the first aorist subjunctive. Of 


course, however, it is formed on the second aorist stem. 


279. The aorist passive subjunctive is as follows: 


Sing. 1. Avda Plur. 1. λυθῶμεν 
2. λυθῆῇς 2. λυθῆτε 
3. λυθῇ 3. λυθῶσι(ν) 


\ 


280. The aorist passive subjunctive, like the aorist 
passive indicative, has active personal endings. The end- 
ings (with the variable vowel) are exactly like those in the 
present active subjunctive. But the rule of verb accent 
seems to be violated—the accent does not seem to be reces- 
sive. This apparent irregularity is due to the fact that 
there has been contraction, the -θε of the aorist passive stem 
having been contracted with the following vowels in accord- 
ance with the rules which will be given in §316. But for 
present purposes the peculiarity of the accent may simply 
be learned without any further attention being given to the 
reason for it. 


281. Before the aorist subjunctives can be formed from 
the principal parts given in the vocabulary, the augment 
must be dropped in the manner explained ‘in §§251, 252. ἡ 


a 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 131 


282. Present Subjunctive of εἰμί. 


Learn the present subjunctive of εἰμί in §602. 


283. The Tenses in the Subjunctive 


In the subjunctive mood there is absolutely no distinc- 
tion of time between the tenses; the aorist tense does not 
refer to past time and the present subjunctive does not 
necessarily refer to present time. The distinction between 
the present and the aorist concerns merely the manner in 
which the action is regarded. The aorist subjunctive refers 
to the action without saying anything about its continuance 
or repetition, while the present subjunctive refers to it 
as continuing or as being repeated. Thus ἵνα λύσω means 
simple in order that I may loose, while ἵνα λύω means in 
order that I may be loosing, or the like. But ordinarily it is 
quite impossible to bring out the difference in an English 
translation. The present and the aorist subjunctive will 
usually have to be translated exactly alike. The student 
should use the aorist in the exercises unless he sees some rea- 
son for using the present, since the aorist presents the action 
in a simpler way, without any added thought of its duration. 


284. The Negative of the Subjunctive 


The negative of the subjunctive is μή, in accordance with 
the rule given in §256. 


285. The Hortatory Subjunctive 


The first person plural of the subjunctive is used in 
exhortations. 
Example: πιστεύσωμεν eis τὸν κύριον, let us believe on the 


Lord. 


1592 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


286. The Subjunctive in Purpose Clauses 


Purpose is expressed by ἵνα with the subjunctive. 

Examples: (1) ἐρχόμεθα ἵνα ἴδωμεν αὐτόν, we come in 
order that we may see him. (2) ἤλθομεν ἵνα ἴδωμεν αὐτόν, 
we came in order that we might see him. 


287. iva, in order that, with the subjunctive, must be 
distinguished sharply from ὅτι, that, with the indicative. 
The latter introduces indirect discourse. 


Example: Compare λέγουσιν ὅτι γινώσκουσι τὸν κύριον, 
they say that they know the Lord, with τοῦτο λέγουσιν ἵνα 
ἀκούωσιν ot μαθηταί, they say this in order that the disciples 
may hear. 


The Subjunctive in Future Conditions 


288. Future conditions are expressed by ἐάν with the 
subjunctive; other conditions by εἰ with the indicative.} 


Examples: 

(1) ἐὰν εἰσέλθωμεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ὀψόμεθα τὸν κύριον, 1 
we go into the house, we shall see the Lord. Here ἐὰν εἰσ- 
ελθωμεν clearly refers to the future. Compare εἰ μαθηταί 
ἐσμεν τοῦ κυρίου σωθησόμεθα, tf we are disciples of the Lord, 


1This simple rule does not cover all of the facts. For example, it 
takes no account of “‘present general’ conditions, which are expressed, 
like future conditions, by ἐάν with the subjunctive. But present 
general conditions are closely allied to future conditions. In the sen- 
tence, if any one does wrong he suffers, which is a present general con- 
dition, the contemplated possibility of one’s doing wrong stretches out 
into the future; what is meant is that at any time when a man does 
wrong or shall do wrong he will suffer for it. It is perhaps unnecessary, 
therefore, to trouble the beginner with this additional category. In 
general, the simple rule given in the text will serve fairly well for New 
Testament Greek. The exceptions can be noted as they occur. Condi- 
tions contrary to fact will be treated in §551. 


i 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 138 


we shall be saved. Here the meaning is, if it 15 now a fact 
that we are disciples of the Lord, we shall be saved. Hence 
‘2, hier τις ἐσμεν refers to present time. 


(2) ἐὰν διδάσκητε τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς πιστοί ἐστε διδάσκαλοι, 
uf you teach the brethren, you are faithful teachers. Here the 
meaning is, 7f at any time you shall be engaged in teaching 
the brethren, you are faithful teachers. ἐὰν διδάσκητε here 
refers to an indefinite future. Compare εἰ διδάσκετε τοὺς 
ἀδελφοὺς πιστοί ἐστε διδάσκαλοι, 10 you are teaching the 
brethren, you are faithful teachers. Here the meaning is, 
uf the work in which you are now engaged is that of teaching 
the brethren, you are faithful teachers. It should be observed 
that in order to distinguish εἰ with the indicative from ἐάν 
with the subjunctive, it is often advisable to choose the 
periphrastic present in English to translate the present 
indicative after εἰ. Thus ζῇ you are teaching is a present 
condition, while ζῇ you teach is usually a future condition. 


289. The above examples will show that the difference 
between the two kinds of conditions here treated concerns 
only the protaszs (the if-clause). Various moods and tenses 
can stand in the apodoszs (the conclusion) after either kind 
of protasis. A hortatory subjunctive, for example, can stand 
after a simple present condition. For example, εἰ μαθηταί 
ἐσμεν τοῦ κυρίου διδάσκωμεν τοὺς ἀδελφούς, uf we are disciples 
of the Πιογὰ [1. 6., if that is now a fact], let us teach the 
brethren. 


290. It should also be noticed that one cannot always 
tell from the mere form of the English sentence whether a 
condition is present or future. Thus in modern colloquial 
English we often use the present indicative to express a 
future condition. For example, in the sentence, if τέ rains 


134 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


to-morrow, we shall not go to the picnic, of it rains clearly 
refers to the future and would be ἐάν with the subjunctive 
in Greek. It is the meaning of the English sentence, then, 
and not the mere form, which should be noticed in deter- 
mining what the Greek shall be. 


291. } Exercises 


I. 1. ἐὰν εὐαγγελισώμεθα ὑμᾶς, λήμψεσθε σωτηρίαν καὶ 
9 , SN \ / \ 4 «- “ 3 U 
ἐλπίδα. 2. ἐὰν μὴ δέξησθε THY μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν, ov σωθήσεσθε. 
3. ἐὰν μὴ ἴδῃ οὗτος τὸν κύριον, οὐ πιστεύσει εἰς αὐτόν. A. εἰ 
κηρύσσεται ἡμῖν ὅτι ἀγαθός ἐστιν ὁ κύριος, ἀγαθοὶ ὦμεν καὶ 
ἡμεῖς, ἵνα διδάσκωμεν τοὺς λοιπούς. DO. εὐηγγελισάμην αὐτοὺς 
ἵνα σωθῶσιν καὶ ἔχωσιν ζωήν. Ο. μηκέτι ἁμαρτάνωμεν, ἵνα 
γενώμεθα μαθηταὶ πιστοί. 7. μακάριοί εἰσιν οἱ ὄχλοι, ἐὰν 
ἀκούσωσιν τὰ ῥήματά μου. ὃ. ἐὰν εἰσέλθωσιν εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν 
οἰκίαν οἱ πιστεύοντες εἰς τὸν κύριον, εὐαγγελισόμεθα αὐτοὺς 
ἐκεῖ. 9. ἐκηρύξαμεν τούτῳ τῷ λαῷ τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς, ἵνα 
δέξωνται τὴν ἀλήθειαν καὶ σωθῶσιν. 10. προσέλθωμεν τῷ 
3 ͵ δῚ I? e / e “a \ 3 a“ nN 
ἰδόντι τὸν κύριον, ἵνα διδάξῃ ἡμᾶς περὶ αὐτοῦ. 1]. ταῦτα 
εἰπόντων αὐτῶν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ οἱ ἀκούσαντες ἐδέξαντο τὰ λεγόμενα, 
ἵνα κηρύξωσιν αὐτὰ καὶ τοῖς λοιποῖς. 12. πιστεύσωμεν εἰς τὸν 
ἀποθανόντα ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα γράψῃ τὰ ὀνόματα ἡμῶν εἰς τὸ 
βιβλίον τῆς ζωῆς. 13. ἐλεύσομαι πρὸς τὸν σώσαντά με, ἵνα 
μὴ λύω τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ μηδὲ πορεύωμαι ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς τοῦ 
θανάτου. 14. ταῦτα εἶπον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἵνα οἱ ἀκούσαντες σω- 
θῶσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν καὶ ἔχωσιν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 
τοῦ θεοῦ. 15. εἰ εἴδετε ταῦτα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταῖς κακαῖς, 
v \ ᾽ \ \ ΄“Ὰ \ 9 \ 39.“ sen \ 
ὄψεσθε τὰ αὐτὰ Kal νῦν καὶ εἰς TOV αἰῶνα. 16. ἐὰν μὴ διδα- 
χθῇς ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου, οὐ γνώσῃ αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. 17. ὁ 
λύων τὰς ἐντολὰς τοῦ θεοῦ οὐκ ἔχει ἐλπίδα, ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιστρέψῃ 
πρὸς τὸν κύριον. 18. ταῦτα παρέλαβεν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀποθανόντος 
ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ, ἵνα παραλαβόντες αὐτὰ οἱ λοιποὶ σωθῶσιν καὶ 

᾽ fa fd 3 \ of t \ , 

αὐτοί. 19. συνελθόντες εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν δεξώμεθα τὴν μαρτυρίαν 


τῷ yes 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 135 


A 9 A an an 
τοῦ εὐαγγελισαμένου ἡμᾶς. 20. διωξάντων τῶν στρατιωτῶν 
τοὺς ἁγίους ἵνα μὴ πιστεύσωσιν εἰς τὸν σώσαντα αὐτούς, συνῆλ- 
θον οὗτοι εἰς τὴν συναγωγήν. 


II. 1. Let us receive the witness of these men, in order 
that we may be saved. 2. If we do not turn to the Lord, 
we shall not know Him. 3. If the Lord prepares a place for 
us, we shall enter into heaven. 4. If we received this com- 
mandment from the Lord, let us preach the gospel to the 
multitudes. 5. If these men are disciples of the Lord, they 
will not persecute the saints. 6. If these rulers persecute 
those who believed on the Lord, they will not come to the 
Lord in order that they-may be saved. 7. If he sees the 
woman who received the saints, he will take the little chil- 
dren from her. 8. When the disciples had said these things 
to the saints, they were taught by the Lord in order that 
they might sin no longer. 9. If the Son of Man came in 
order that He might save sinners, let us receive His witness. 
10. If we know the Lord, let us not persecute His saints 
nor cast them out of the synagogue. 11. If the crowds who 
have heard the Lord see Him in that synagogue, they will 
come to Him in order that He may say to them words of 
hope. 13. Unless! He says these things to the multitudes, 
they will not be saved. 14. If thou seest in that night the 
one who saved thee, the ruler will persecute thee, in order 
that thou mayest not preach the gospel to the others. 
15. The Lord came to us, in order that we might preach the 
gospel to you. 16. The faithful servants came, in order 
that they might bring to us those garments. 

1 The English word unless is another way of saying if not. It is to be 


translated, therefore, by εἰ μή with the indicative or by ἐὰν μή with 
the subjunctive. Which is correct here? 


156 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXII 


The Present and Aorist Infinitives 


The Articular Infinitive. 


Indirect Discourse 


Proper Names 


292. 


det, impersonal verb, used 
only in third person, zt 18 
necessary (takes the accu- 
sative and infinitive). 

ἔξεστι(ν), impersonal verb, 
used only in third person, 
it 15 lawful (with dative of 
the person for whom “‘it is 
lawful’). 

θέλω, 1 wish. 

᾿Ιησοῦς, ᾿Ιησοῦ, 6, Jesus. 

᾿Ιουδαῖος, 6, a Jew. 


293. 
follows: 
Present 
Act. λύειν, to loose. 
Mid. λύεσθαι, 
one’s self. 
Pass. λύεσθαι, to be loosed. 


294. 


to loose for 


Vocabulary 


κελεύω, 1 command. 

κώμη, ἡ, a υἱϊίαρο. 

μέλλω, L am about (to do 
something), 1 am going 
(to do something). 

ὀφείλω, I owe, I ought. 

πάσχω, I suffer. 

πρό, prep. with gen., before. 

σωτηρία, ἡ. salvation. 

Φαρισαῖος, 6, a Pharisee. 

Χριστός, ὁ, Christ ; ὁ Χριστός, 
Christ, or the Messiah. 


The present and aorist infinitives of λύω are as 


Aorist 
Act. λῦσαι, to loose. 
Mid. λύσασθαι, to loose for 
one’s self. 
Pass. λυθῆναι, to be loosed. 


It will be observed that the present infinitives are 


formed upon the present stem, the aorist active and middle 
infinitives upon the aorist stem (with the characteristic -ca), 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 137 


and the aorist passive infinitive upon the aorist passive stem 
(with the characteristic -θε lengthened to -θη). 


295. The first aorist active infinitive is accented upon 
the penult, even where this involves an exception to the 
rule of verb accent. Thus πιστεῦσαι, to believe, not πίστευσαι. 


296. The second aorist active infinitive of λείπω is 
λιπεῖν, and the second aorist middle infinitive is λιπέσθαι. 
These are like the present infinitives in their endings except 
for the irregular accent. They are formed, of course, upon 
the second aorist stem. 


297. The present infinitive of εἰμί is εἶναι. 


298. ‘The infinitive is a verbal noun. In many cases the 
use of the Greek infinitive is so much like that of the 
infinitive in English as to call for no comment. Thus θέλω 
ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον means I wish to hear the word. Here the 
English is a literal translation of the Greek. 


299. There is ordinarily no distinction of time between 
the tenses in the infinitive, but the distinction is the same as 
that which prevails in the subjunctive. The present infini- 
tive refers to the action in its continuance or as repeated; 
the aorist infinitive refers to it in no such special way. It is 
usually impossible to bring out the distinction in an English 
translation. 


300. The negative of the infinitive is μή. 


The Articular Infinitive 


301. The Greek infinitive, being a verbal noun, can 
have the article, like any other noun. It is treated as a 
neuter noun and so has the neuter article. 


138 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


302. The infinitive with the article can stand in most of 
the constructions in which any other noun can stand. Thus 
καλόν ἐστι TO ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδελφῶν, means the 
act of dying in behalf of the brethren is good, or, less literally, 
it ts good to die in behalf of the brethren. Here τὸ ἀποθανεῖν 
is a noun in the nominative case, being the subject of the 
verb ἐστιν. 


303. Of particular importance is the use of the articular 
infinitive after prepositions. 


Examples: μετὰ τὸ λῦσαι, after the act of loosing; ἐν 
τῷ λύειν, in Or during the process of loosing; διὰ τὸ λυθῆναι, 
on account of the fact of being loosed; μετὰ τὸ λυθῆναι, after 
the fact of being loosed; πρὸ τοῦ λῦσαι, before the act of 
loosing; eis τὸ λῦσαι, into the act of loosing. This last 
preposition, eis, is very frequently used with the articular 
infinitive to express purpose. If one act is done so as to 
get znto another act, 10 15 done for the purpose of that other 
act. Thus eis τὸ λῦσαι means 2n order to loose. 


304. So far, the infinitive has been viewed as a noun. 
But it is also part of a verb, and as part of a verb it can have 
not only, as the participle can, adverbial modifiers and a 
direct object, but also, unlike the participle, a subject. 
The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative case. 


Examples: 

(1) ἐν τῷ λέγειν αὐτοὺς ταῦτα, in (or during) the cir- 
cumstance that they were saying these things = while they 
were saying these things. Here αὐτούς is the subject of the 
infinitive λέγειν and ταῦτα is the direct object of it. 


(2) μετὰ τὸ ἀπολυθῆναι τὸν ὄχλον ἀπῆλθεν ὁ κύριος, 
after the circumstance that the crowd was dismissed, the Lord 
went away, or after the crowd had been dismissed, the Lord 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 139 


went away. The same thought might have been expressed 
by ἀπολυθέντος Tov ὄχλου ἀπῆλθεν ὁ κύριος. 

(9) διὰ δὲ τὸ λέγεσθαι τοῦτο ὑπὸ τῶν ὄχλων ἀπῆλθεν ὁ 
ἀπόστολος, and on account of the circumstance that this 
was being said by the crowds, the apostle went away, or be- 
cause this was being said by the crowds, the apostle went away. 

(4) ταῦτα δὲ εἶπον ὑμῖν εἰς τὸ μὴ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς δούλους 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, and these things I said to you, with the ten- 
dency toward the result that you should not become servants of 
sin, or and these things I said to you in order that you might 
not become servants of sin. 


305. It will be observed that the articular infinitive with 
prepositions is usually to be translated into English by a 
clause introduced by a conjunction. But it must not be 
supposed that the details of such translation have anything 
to do with the details of the Greek original. It is rather the 
total idea expressed by the Greek phrase which is trans- 
ferred into a totally different idiom. 


Indirect Discourse 


306. Indirect discourse is sometimes expressed by the 
accusative and infinitive. 

Example: ἔλεγον of ἄνθρωποι αὐτὸν εἶναι τὸν προφήτην, 
the men were saying that he was the prophet. 


307. But usually indirect discourse is expressed by ὅτι 
with the indicative. The usage is exactly like that in Eng- 
lish except for the following important difference: 


308. In indirect discourse in Greek, in part contrary to 
the English usage, the same mood and tense are retained 
as those which stood in the direct discourse lying back of 
the indirect. 


140 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Examples: 

(1) λέγει ὅτι βλέπει τὸν ἀπόστολον, he says that he 
sees the apostle. Here the direct discourse lying back of 
the indirect is I see the apostle, for such are the actual words 
of the speaker; such are the words which would have stood 
in the quotation if quotation marks had been used. In this 
sentence there is no difference between the Greek and the 
English usage. 


(2) εἶπεν ὅτι βλέπει τὸν ἀπόστολον, he said that he 
saw the apostle. Here βλέπει is in the present tense because 
the direct discourse lying back of the indirect discourse is J 
see the apostle—those were the actual words of the speaker. 
The tense of the direct discourse, J see, is retained in the in- 
direct discourse (though of course the person is changed). 
English, on the other hand, changes the tense in the in- 
direct discourse, when the leading verb is in past time. 
Thus, although a perfectly literal translation was possible 
in (1) it is impossible in (2). 

(3) εἶπεν ὁ μαθητὴς ὅτι εἶδεν τὸν ἀπόστολον, the 
disciple said that he had seen the apostle. Here the direct 
discourse was 1 saw the apostle, or I have seen the apostle. 
English throws the tense in the indirect discourse a step 
further back (had seen instead of saw or has seen); Greek 
retains the same tense. 


(4) εἶπεν ὅτι ὄψεται τὸν ἀπόστολον, he said that he would 
see the apostle. The direct discourse was I shall see. Eng- 
lish changes shall to would (or should with the first per- 
son); Greek retains the same tense. 


Proper Names 


309. Proper names (spelled with a capital letter) often 
have the article. Of course the article must be omitted in 
an English translation. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 141 


310. The declension of ’Inaods, ὁ, Jesus, is as follows: 


N. Ἰησοῦς 
G. Ἰησοῦ 
D. Ἰησοῦ 
A. Ἰησοῦν 
V. Ἰησοῦ 


311. Certain nouns, referring to persons or things which 
instead of being only one of a class are quite unique, are 
treated as proper nouns, the article being either inserted 
or omitted. So θεός or ὁ θεός, God; πνεῦμα or τὸ πνεῦμα, the 
Spirit; κόσμος or ὁ κόσμος, the world; νόμος or ὁ νόμος, the 
Law. 


312. Exercises 


I. 1. οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 2. κελεύσας δὲ τοὺς 
ὄχλους ἀπολυθῆναι ἐξῆλθεν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον. 3. οὐκ ἔστιν καλὸν 
λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτόν. 4. ἤρξατο 
δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγειν τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὸν ἀπελθεῖν. ὅ. 

ΙΑ \ e ey n~ > Ul 3 > 2 Ἁ “ 
μέλλει γὰρ O υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεσθαι ἐν δόξῃ μετὰ τῶν 
τὸ t ’ an 3 7s te) fa) a ’ \ 5) 
ἀγγέλων αὐτοῦ. 6. εἰ θέλει μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐλθεῖν, δεῖ αὐτὸν ἀπο- 
θανεῖν. 7. καλόν σοί ἐστιν εἰς ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν. 8. ἐν δὲ τῷ 
λέγειν με τοῦτο ἔπεσε τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς. 9. 

\ \ \ b] “ \ ἢ 90} 4. “ \ 
μετὰ δὲ TO ἐγερθῆναι Tov κύριον ἐδίωξαν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι τοὺς μαθη- 
τὰς αὐτοῦ. 10. πρὸ δὲ τοῦ βληθῆναι εἰς φυλακὴν τὸν προφήτην 
ἐβάπτιζον οἱ μαθηταὶ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ τοὺς ἐρχομένους πρὸς αὐτούς. 
11. διὰ δὲ τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐκεῖ συνῆλθον οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι. 12. 
θέλω γὰρ ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς, ἵνα λάβητε δῶρον ἀγαθόν, εἰς τὸ γενέ- 

ρ μας, ἢ 
σθαι ὑμᾶς μαθητὰς πιστούς. 13. ἀπέθανεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ὁ 
͵ n 9 3 “ bd U 14 μὲ « \ \ 

Ingots εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς. . ἔπεμψεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν 
3 an “ 3 e \ e “ 3 \ i e a \ 
Ἰησοῦν, ἵνα ἀποθάνῃ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, eis TO δοξάζειν ἡμᾶς τὸν 
σώσαντα ἡμᾶς. 15. εἶπεν ὁ τυφλὸς ὅτι βλέπει τοὺς ἀνθρώ- 

> e 3) la «“ > , 3 an 7 3 n 
πους. 16. εἶπεν 6 “Inaods ὅτι ἐλεύσεται ἐν TH βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ. 


142 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


17. ταῦτα ἔλεγεν ὁ ἀπόστολος ETL ὧν ἐν σαρκί, εἰς TO πιστεῦσαι 
εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν τοὺς ἀκούοντας. 18. κελεύσας ἡμᾶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὴν κώμην εὐθὺς ἀπέλυσε τὸν ὄχλον. 19. σωθέντες 
ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ὀφείλομεν καὶ πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. 
20. ἐν τῷ πάσχειν ἡμᾶς ταῦτα ἔλεγον οἱ ἀδελφοὶ ὅτι BE 
πουσι τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν. 


II. 1. While Jesus was preaching the gospel to the 
people, the Pharisees were commanding the soldiers to 
bring Him. 2. After Jesus had commanded the crowds to 
go away, His disciples came to Him. 3. If we wish to see 
Jesus, let us go into this village. 4. They said that it was 
lawful for them to take these garments. 5. They saw that 
it was necessary for the Son of Man to suffer these things. 
6. After Jesus had said these things to the Pharisees, the 
multitudes went away. 7. On account of our not being 
disciples of Jesus, the ruler will command us to go away. 
8. After salvation had been proclaimed to the people, 
Jesus taught His disciples. 9. We ought when we suffer 
these things to pray to the One who has saved us. 10. We 
shall be saved in that hour, because we have believed on the 
name of Jesus. 11. Those who had come into that village 
saw that Jesus was in the house. 12. Let us not sin, for 
God will not receive into His kingdom those who sin and do 


not turn to Him. 13. While these men were praying to _ 


God, the soldiers were persecuting the Church. 14. And 
when they had entered into this village, they said that they 
wished to see Jesus. 15. This woman came to see the 
works of the Christ. 16. The men were brought to Jesus 
Christ in order that He might heal them. 


>t pee 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 143 


LESSON XXIII 
Contract Verbs 


313. Vocabwary 


ἀγαπάω, If love (the most fre- λαλέω, 1 speak. 
quent and the loftiest word παρακαλέω, I exhort, I com- 
for I love in the New Testa- fort. 


ment). περιπατέω, I walk. 
ἀκολουθέω, I follow (takes the ποιέω, I do, I make 

dative). προσκυνέω, I worship \usu- 
Γαλιλαία, ἡ, Galilee. ally takes the dative). 
δηλόω, I show, I make mani- σταυρόω, I crucify. 

fest. Tnpew, I keep. 
εὐλογέω, 1 bless. τιμάω, I honor. 
εὐχαριστέω, I give thanks. φιλέω, I love (denotes a love 
ζητέω, I seek. akin to friendship. The 
θεωρέω, I behold. word is much less fre- 

quent in the New Testa- 

καλέω, καλέσω, ἐκάλεσα, —, ment than ἀγαπάω). 

—, ἐκλήθην, I call. χώρα, ἡ, a country. 


Rules of Contraction! 


314. Two vowels or a vowel and a diphthong are often 
united into a single long vowel or diphthong. The process 
by which they are united is called contraction. 

1 The following formulation of the rules of contraction is, in essentials, 
that which is given in White, Beginner’s Greek Book, 1895, pp. 75f. It 
has been used here by kind permission of Messrs. Ginn and Company. 


144 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


315. It must not be supposed, however, that contrac- 
tion always takes place when two vowels or a vowel and a 
diphthong (even in the combinations set forth in the follow- 
ing rules) come together within a word. 


316. The rules of contraction are as follows: 


I. Vowel with Vowel 


1. An open and a close vowel, when the open vowel 
comes first, are united in the diphthong which is composed 
of the two vowels in question. 

Example: ¢-. makes εἰ. It must be observed, however, 
that when the close vowel comes before the open vowel, a 
diphthong is never formed. Thus ἐπε (for example, in 
ἱερόν), is always two syllables, never a diphthong. 


2. Two like vowels form the common long. 
Examples: a-a makes long a; e-n makes ἢ; o-w makes w. 


3. But ee makes ev and o-o makes ov. 
This rule forms an exception to rule 2. 


4. An o- sound (0 or w) overcomes a, €, or ἡ (whether 
the o- sound comes first or second), and forms w. 
Examples: a-o makes ὦ ; e-w makes w. 


5. But eo and o-e make ov. This rule forms an excep- 
tion to rule 4. 


6. When a and ε or ἢ come together, whichever one 


comes first overcomes the other, and forms its own long. 
Examples: a-e and a-7 make long a; e-a makes 7. 


Ii. Vowel with Diphthong 


1. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong 
that begins with the same vowel. 
Examples: ¢-e. makes et; o-ov makes ov. 


es 
et, fis 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 145 


2. When a vowel comes before a diphthong that does 
not begin with the same vowel, it is contracted with the 
diphthong’s first vowel. The diphthong’s second vowel dis- 
appears, unless it is e, in which case it becomes subscript. 


Examples: a-e makes a (a is first contracted with ε in 
accordance with I 6, and then the ct becomes subscript); 
a-ov makes w (a is contracted with o by I 4, and the v 
disappears); ¢--ov makes ov (e€ is contracted with o by I 5, 
and v disappears). 


3. But o-e and o-y make ou. 


III. Accent of Contract Syllables 


1. If either of the contracted syllables had an accent, 
the resulting syllable receives an accent. If the resulting 
syllable is a penult or an antepenult, the general rules of 
accent (see §11) will always tell which kind of accent it has. 
If the resulting syllable is an ultima it has a circumflex. 

Examples: (1) φιλέομεν makes φιλουμεν, in accordance 
with I 5. Since one of the two syllables that united to make 
ov had an accent, ov must have an accent. The general 
rules of accent declare that if the ultima is short, a long 
penult, if accented at all, must have the circumflex. Hence 
φιλοῦμεν is correct. (2) τιμαόμεθα makes τιμωμεθα in 
accordance with I 4. Since one of the two syllables that 
united to make w had an accent, w must have an accent. 
But in accordance with the general rules of accent only an 
acute can stand on an antepenult. Therefore τιμώμεθα 15 
correct. (3) δηλόεις makes δηλοῖς in accordance with II 3. 
Since one of the two syllables that united to make ou had 
an accent, oc must have an accent. The general rules of 
accent will permit either an acute or a circumflex to stand 
on a long ultima. But the present rule gives special guid- 
ance. Therefore δηλοῖς is correct. 


146 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


2. If neither of the contracted syllables had an accent, 
the resulting syllable receives none. 


Example: ἐφίλεε makes ἐφίλει in accordance with I 3. 
Since neither of the two syllables that unite to make εἰ is 
accented, ec receives no accent, and ἐφίλει is correct. 


Present System of Contract Verbs 


317. The student should write out in the uncontracted 
forms the present system (present tense in all moods studied 
thus far, and imperfect tense) of τιμάω, 1 honor, φιλέω, I 
love, and δηλόω, 1 make manifest, and should then write the 
contract form opposite to each uncontracted form, applying 
the rules of contraction. The results can be tested by the 
conjugation of these verbs which is given in §§590-592. 


318. It should be observed that there are two exceptions 
to the rules: (1) the present infinitive active of verbs in -aw 
is contracted from -άειν to -ἂν instead of to -ᾷἂν, and (2) 
the present infinitive active of verbs in -ow is contracted 
from o-ev to -οῦν instead of to -otp. 


319. Contraction is carried out in all the forms of the 
declension of the participles. 


320. In general, the uncontracted forms of these verbs 
in -άω, -ἐω and -όω do not occur in the New Testament. 
The reason why the uncontracted forms, and not the con- 
tract forms, of the present active indicative first person 
singular are given in the lexicons is that the uncontracted 
forms must be known before the verb can be conjugated, 
since it makes a great difference for the conjugation whether 
τιμῶ, for example, is contracted from τιμάω, τιμέω, or 
τιμόω. : 


Peg rg α 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 147 


Principal Parts of Verbs in -dw, -éw and -dw 


321. Verbs whose stems end in a vowel regularly 
lengthen that vowel (a as well as ε being lengthened to 7) 
before the tense suffixes (e.g. the -co/eof the future system, 
the -σα of the first aorist system, and the -θε of the aorist 
passive system). Thus the principal parts of τιμάω, so far 
as we have learned them, are τιμάω, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα, —, 
—, ἐτιμήθην (not τιμάω, τιμάσω, etc.); the principal parts 
of φιλέω are φιλέω, φιλήσω, etc.; and the principal parts of 
δηλόω are δηλόω, δηλώσω, etc. It should be observed that 
this lengthening of the final vowel of the stem of these ‘‘con- 
tract” verbs has nothing to do with contraction. The con- 
traction appears only in the present system. 


322. It is very important that the student should learn 
to reverse the process involved in this rule. Thus, if a form 
φανερωθείς be found in the Greek-English exercises, the 
student should first say to himself that the -0e in φανερωθείς 
is evidently the sign of the aorist passive system. ‘The 
verb stem without the tense suffix would be ¢davepw-. But 
since the final vowel of the verb stem is lengthened before 
the tense suffix -θε, the verb stem was davepo- and the verb 
was φανερόω. Or if a form ἠρωτήθη be found, the student 
should first say to himself that the -θη is evidently the 
ending of the aorist passive indicative, third person singu- 
lar, like ἐλύθη. But the aorist passive indicative has the 
augment, which if the verb begins with a vowel consists in 
the lengthening of that vowel. Therefore, to get the verb, 
the ἡ at the beginning of ἠρωτήθη must be shortened. 
But 7 is the long of either aore. It cannot be determined, 
therefore, whether the verb began with aor e. Again, the 
n just before the -θη in ἠρωτήθη was the lengthened form 
of the verb stem. ‘The verb stem therefore ended in either 
aore. Accordingly there are four possibilities as to the verb 


148 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


from which ἠρωτήθη may be found to have come; ἠρωτήθη 
may be found to have come from ἀρωτέω, dpwrdw, ἐρωτέω, 
or ἐρωτάω. Trying each of these in the lexicon we discover 
that the last is correct. 


323. καλέω is an exception to the rule just given. 
It does not lengthen the final ε of the stem before the o of 
the future and aorist systems. The aorist passive, more- 
over, is irregularly formed. 


324. Exercises 


I. 1. οὐκ εὐλογήσει ὁ θεὸς τὸν μὴ περιπατοῦντα κατὰ 
τὰς ἐντολὰς τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. 2. οἱ ἀγαπώμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ 
ἀγαπῶσι τὸν ἀγαπῶντα αὐτούς. 3. λαλοῦντος τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ 
τοῖς ἀκολουθοῦσιν ἤρξατο ὁ ἄρχων παρακαλεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελ- 
θεῖν. 4. ἀκολουθήσαντες τῷ λαλήσαντι ταῦτα ζητήσωμεν τὸν 
οἶκον αὐτοῦ. ὅ. εἰ ἀγαπῶμεν τὸν θεόν, τηρῶμεν τὰς ἐντολὰς 
αὐτοῦ καὶ ποιῶμεν τὰ λαλούμενα ἡμῖν ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. 6. 
τοῦτο ποιήσαντος τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐλάλει περὶ αὐτοῦ ὁ θεραπευθεὶς 
τῷ ἀκολουθοῦντι ὄχλῳ. 7. ἐθεώρουν οἱ ἀπόστολοι τὰ ἔργα 
τὰ ποιούμενα ὑπὸ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐν τῷ περιπατεῖν αὐτοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ. 
8. μετὰ τὸ βληθῆναι εἰς φυλακὴν τὸν προφήτην οὐκέτι περιε- 
πάτει ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ ἐκείνῃ. 9. οἱ ἀγαπῶντες τὸν θεὸν 
ποιοῦσι τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ. 10. ταῦτα ἐποίουν τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ καὶ 
οἱ θεραπευθέντες ὑπ᾿ αὐτοῦ. 11. ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν οἱ ὄχλοι, ἵνα 
θεωρῶσι τὰ ποιούμενα ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 12. οὐ φιλοῦσι τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν 
οἱ μὴ ποιοῦντες τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ. 13. ἀγαπῶμεν τὸν θεὸν 
ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἀγαπῶντες καὶ τοὺς ἀδελφούς. 14. 
ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς τοῖς ἀκολουθοῦσιν αὐτῷ ἔτι περι- 
πατῶν μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων. 15. ἐὰν μὴ 
περιπατῶμεν κατὰ τὰς ἐντολὰς τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, οὐ θεωρήσομεν τὸ 
πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ. 16. μετὰ τὸ καλέσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν 
οὐκέτι περιεπάτουν ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς τοῦ πονηροῦ οὐδὲ ἐποίουν τὰ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 149 


πονηρά. 17. ταῦτα ἐποιεῖτε ἡμῖν διὰ τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς τὸν 

, e an 9 \ , 9 nan ΄Ὰ 3 lal 
καλέσαντα ὑμᾶς eis THY βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ. 18. τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ 
λαλήσαντι ταῦτα μετὰ τὸ ἐγερθῆναι ἐκ νεκρῶν προσεκύνησαν 
e 7 ε δ) 9 “Ὁ 3 ’ \ ) a ’ 
οἱ κληθέντες ὑπ΄ αὐτοῦ. 19. ἐθεώρουν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν σταυρού- 
μενον ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν αἱ ἀκολουθήσασαι αὐτῷ ἐκ τῆς 
Γαλιλαίας. 20. οὐ θεωρήσομεν αὐτὸν ἐὰν μὴ ἀκολουθῶμεν 
αὐτῷ περιπατοῦντι ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ. 


II. 1. Those things spake Jesus to those who were fol- 
lowing Him out of Galilee. 2. I was beholding Him who 
had loved me and died in behalf of me. 3. Let us worship the 
One who does these things and bless His holy name. 
4. Those who were beholding Him as He was walking in 
Galilee were saying that they did not wish to follow Him. 
5. Having followed Jesus as He was walking in Galilee, they 
beheld Him also after He had been raised up from the dead. 
6. Let us seek the One who has spoken to us words of 
hope. 7. Let us bless the name of the One who walked 
with us in the world and was crucified in behalf of us. 8. If 
' thou followest Him who does these things, thou wilt behold 
Him in His glory. 9. If we do not love those who bless us 
we will not love those who do evil things. 10. He loves us 
and makes manifest to us His glory, in order that we may 
bless God for ever. 11. While the multitudes were follow- 
ing Jesus and were hearing the things which were being 
spoken by Him, the rulers were saying that they did not 
love Him. 12. I will show to those who have followed me 
the things which have been shown to me by Jesus. 13. These 
are those who love Jesus and beheld His works and were 
called into His kingdom. 14. His brother exhorted him to 
follow Jesus in order that he might be with Him for ever. 
15. This parable we speak to those who love God and keep 
His commandments. 16. This is the child that blesses God 
and loves Him. 


150 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXIV 
Future and First Aorist Active and Middle of Liquid Verbs. 


Future of εἰμί. 


S208 


ἀλλήλων, reciprocal pron., 
of each other, of one an- 
other. 

ἀποθανοῦμαι, I shall die, dep. 
fut. of ἀποθνήσκω. 


ἀποκτενῶ, ἀπέκτεινα, fut. 
and aor. οἵ ἀποκτείνω, I 
kill. 

ἀποστελῶ, ἀπέστειλα, fut. 
and aor. of ἀποστέλλω, I 
send. 


ἀρῶ, ἦρα, fut. and aor. of 
αἴρω, I take up, I take 
away. 

βαλῶ, I shall throw, I shall 
cast, fut. of βάλλω. 

ἑαυτοῦ, reflexive pron., of 
himself. 

ἐγερῶ, ἤγειρα, fut. and aor. 
of éyelpw, I raise up. 

ἐμαυτοῦ, reflexive pron., of 
myself. 


326. 


Reflexive Pronouns 


Vocabulary 


3 , 


émt, prep. with gen., over, 
on, at the time of; with 
dat., on, on the basis of, at; 
with acc., on, to, against 
(ἐπί is an exceedingly 
common, but a_ rather 
difficult, preposition. Its 
various uses must be 
learned by observation in 
reading). 

ἔσομαι, I shall be, fut. of 
εἰμί. 

μενῶ, ἔμεινα, fut. and aor. 
of μένω, 1 remain. 

peravoew, I repent. 

σεαυτοῦ, reflexive pron., of 
thyself. 

σπείρω, σπερῶ, ἔσπειρα, —, 
—, ἐσπάρην, I sow. 

φοβέομαι, dep. with passive 
forms, I am afraid, I fear, 
7 am afraid of. 


Liquid verbs are verbs whose stems end in ἃ, yp, », 


or p, these consonants being called lzquids, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 151 


327. The Future of Liquid Verbs 


The future active and middle of liquid verbs is formed, 
not by adding -go /e, as is the case with other verbs, but by 
adding -eo/e, to the verb stem. The ε contracts with the 
following variable vowel, in accordance with the rules of 
contraction given in the preceding lesson. Thus the future 
active and middle of liquid verbs is conjugated exactly like 
the present of verbs in -ew. 


328. The future active indicative of κρίνω, I judge, 
is as follows: 


Sing. 1. κρινῷ Plur. 1. κρινοῦμεν 
2. κρινεῖς 2. κρινεῖτε 
3. κρινεῖ 3. κρινοῦσιᾳ(ν) 


329. It will be observed that the only way in which the 
future active indicative in the three persons of the singular 
and in the third person plural is distinguished (in appear- 
ance) from the present active indicative of κρίνω is by 
the accent. 


330. The future middle indicative of κρίνω is as follows: 


Sing. 1. κρινοῦμαι Plur. 1. κρινούμεθα 
2. κρινῇ 2. κρινεῖσθε 
3. κρινεῖται 3. κρινοῦνται 


331. It will be remembered (see §157) that the verb 
stem is often disguised in the present system. Thus the 
future of a liquid verb is often distinguished from the 
present by something more than the addition of the e. 

Example: The future of βάλλω is βαλῶ, Bad- and not 
βαλλ- being the verb stem. Even κρινῶ really differs from 
the present κρίνω in that the cis short in the future and 


152 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


long in the present. But even that distinction does not 
prevail in the case of μένω. 


332. Some verbs have liquid stems in the future but not 
in other tenses. 
Example: The future of λέγω is ἐρῶ. 


The First Aorist of Liquid Verbs 


333. The first aorist active and middle of liquid verbs is 
formed not by adding -ca to the verb stem but by adding -a 
alone and making changes within the body of the word, the 
verb stem usually being lengthened (ε lengthened not to 
n but to εἰ). The conjugation, in all the moods, is like the 
conjugation of other first aorists. 

Examples: (1) The first aorist active of μένω, 1 remain, 
is ἔμεινα (indic.), μείνω (subj.), μεῖναι (infin.) and μείνας 
(part.). (2) The first aorist active of ἀποστέλλω, I send, 
is ἀπέστειλα (indic.), ἀποστείλω (subj.), ἀποστεῖλαι (infin.) 
and ἀποστείλας (part.). 


334. Of course liquid verbs may have second aorists 
or irregular aorists. So the aorist of βάλλω is a second aorist 
ἔβαλον. Some verbs, moreover, may have a present stem 
ending in a liquid, and yet not be liquid verbs. Thus 
λαμβάνω is not a liquid verb, the verb stem being λαβ-. 
The student is reminded again that one cannot always 
predict what the various tense systems of a Greek verb 
will be. The lexicon must be consulted. 


335. Future Indicative of εἰμί. 


The future indicative of εἰμί, 1 am, is as follows: 


Sing. 1. ἔσομαι Plur. 1. ἐσόμεθα 
2. ἔσῃ 2. ἔσεσθε 


3. ἔσται 3. ἔσονται 


Said iy 


FONT te: 


fe δ και lan χοῦ Rr BI παρ πῶς ἐὰν 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 153 


It will be observed that the conjugation is just like 
that of the future middle of λύω, except that in the third 
person singular the variable vowel is omitted, ἔσται stand- 
ing instead of ἔσεται. 


336. The English Preparatory Use of ‘‘There”’ 


The word there is sometimes put before the verb in an 
English sentence without any special force except as an 
indication that the subject is to follow the verb. This 
“preparatory” there is not translated at all in Greek. 


Examples: (1) χαρὰ ἔσται ἐν οὐρανῷ, there shall be 
joy in heaven. (2) ἦσαν μαθηταὶ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, there were 
disciples in the house. 


Declension of Reflexive Pronouns 


337. The declension of ἐμαυτοῦ, ἧς, of myself, the 
reflexive pronoun of the first person, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur, 
G. ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτῆς G. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν 
10. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαυτῇ D. ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς 
A. ἐμαυτόν ἐμαυτήν Α. ἑαυτούς ἑαυτάς 


338. The declension of σεαυτοῦ, ἧς, of thyself, the reflex- 
ive pronoun of the second person, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
G. σεαυτοῦ σεαυτῆς G. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν 
1). σεαυτῷ σεαυτῇ 1). ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς 
A. σεαυτόν σεαυτὴν A. ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτάς 


154 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


339. The declension of ἑαυτοῦ, ἧς, ot, of himself, of 
herself, of itself, the reflexive pronoun of the third person, is 
as follows: 

Sing. Plur. 
M. id, N. M. Ke N. 
G. ἑαυτοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἑαυτοῦ G. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν 
Τὴ. ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτῇ ἑαυτῷ 1). ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς ἑαυτοῖς 
Α. ἑαυτόν ἑαυτὴν ἑαυτό Α. ἑαυτούς ἑαυτάς ἑαυτά 


340. It will be observed that the declension of the reflex- 
ive pronouns is like that of αὐτός, except that there is no 
nominative case and in the reflexive pronouns of the first 
and second persons no neuter gender. 


341. In the plural, ἑαυτῶν, which originally belonged 
only to the pronoun ἑαυτοῦ of the third person, is made to 
do duty for all three persons. 


342. Use of Reflexive Pronouns 


Reflexive pronouns are pronouns that refer back to the 
subject of the clause. 


Examples: (1) οὐ λαλῶ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ, I do not speak 
concerning myself; (2) οὐ δοξάζεις σεαυτόν, thou dost not 
glorify thyself; (3) οὐκ ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, he has not life in - 
himself ; (4) δοξάζετε ἑαυτούς, ye glorify yourselves. 


343. Reciprocal Pronoun 


The reciprocal pronoun is ἀλλήλων, of one another, of each 
other. It occurs in the New Testament only in the forms 
ἀλλήλων, of one another, ἀλλήλοις to or for one another, and 
ἀλλήλους, one another (βλέπουσιν ἀλλήλους, they see one 
another). 


ἄν» 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 155 


344. Exercises 


) 
I. 1. οὐ γὰρ ἑαυτοὺς κηρύσσομεν ἀλλὰ Χριστὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν 
κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν διὰ ᾿Ιησοῦν. 2. ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν 
) ™ On ἴων nN > i 
κύριον ᾿Ιησοῦν ἐγερεῖ Kal ἡμᾶς σὺν ᾿Ιησοῦ. 3. εἶπεν 6 μαθη- 
τὴς ὅτι ἀποθανεῖται ὑπὲρ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. 4. οὐκ ἐγεροῦμεν αὐτοὶ 
>] la) nN ἴω “Ὁ 
ἑαυτούς, ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς éyepet ἡμᾶς ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. ὅ. 
εὐθὺς ἦρεν ὁ πονηρὸς τὸ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρέν. O. ἐὰν ἀγα- 
“Ὁ 3 r } \ “ bd e \ 
πᾶτε ἀλλήλους, ἔσεσθε μαθηταὶ τοῦ ἀποθανόντος ὑπὲρ 
ὑμῶν. 7. ἐὰν πιστεύσητε εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ μενεῖτε 
εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. ὃ. ὁ ἀγαπῶν τὸν υἱὸν ἀγαπᾷ καὶ τὸν ἀποστεί- 
λαντα αὐτόν. 9. χαρὰ ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἁμαρτωλῷ τῷ ἐπὶ τῷ 
mn 3 an 
ῥήματι τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ μετανοήσαντι. 10. οἱ ἀποκτείναντες τὸν 
aT. nN \ ’ \ \ 0) a 2 “ \ 
noovv καὶ διώξαντες τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ ἐκβαλοῦσι Kal 
ἡμᾶς. 11]. ἐπιστρέψαντες οὗτοι ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν ἔμειναν ἐν τῇ 
ἐκκλησίᾳ αὐτοῦ. 12. ἐγείραντος τοῦ θεοῦ τοὺς νεκροὺς ἐσό- 
μεθα σὺν τῷ κυρίῳ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων. 13. οὐκ εἰς 
, \ See: 3 ) ’ \ ' ᾽ CAN 
ἐμαυτὸν ἐπίστευσα, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὸν κύριον. 14. ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν 
λαβεῖν δῶρα ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀποκτεῖναι οὐδὲ διῶξαι 
> , “" / 3 « 7 € > , \ 
ἀλλήλους. 15. οὗτος μέν ἐστιν ὁ ἄρχων ὁ ἀποκτείνας τοὺς 
προφήτας, ἐκεῖνος δέ ἐστιν ὁ ἁμαρτωλὸς ὁ μετανοήσας ἐπὶ τῷ 
an 3 n an > nN 
ῥήματι Tov ᾿Ιησοῦ. 16. ἐὰν δὲ τοῦτο εἴπωμεν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ, φο- 
βούμεθα τοὺς ὄχλους, λέγουσι γὰρ εἶναι αὐτὸν προφήτην. 
17. ἀποστελεῖ πρὸς αὐτοὺς διδασκάλους καὶ προφήτας, ἵνα 
μετανοήσωσιν καὶ φοβῶνται τὸν θεόν. 18. μακάριοί εἰσιν 
) 
οὐχ οἱ ἑαυτοὺς δοξάζοντες ἀλλ᾽ οἱ δοξάζοντες τὸν ἀποστείλαντα 


. A e\ ’ nN ’ \ / 3 id \ 9 \ 
τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ eis τὸν κόσμον. 19. ἐρχομένου πρὸς αὐτοὺς 


“ ᾿ nN nN 9 \ ~ 4 3 “A e 
τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ περιπατοῦντος ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης ἐφοβοῦντο οἱ 
ἰδόντες αὐτὸν μαθηταί. 20. ταῦτα ἐροῦμεν τοῖς ἀποσταλεῖσι 
πρὸς ἡμᾶς προφήταις. 


II. 1. When Jesus has taken away our sins we shall be 
holy for ever. 2. Let us not begin to say! in ourselves that 


1 With ἄρχομαι, 1 begin, the present infinitive, not the aorist infini- 
tive, should be used. 


156 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


we do not know Him. 3. We shall not fear the ruler who 
killed the prophets, for God will send His angels to us. 
4. When the soldiers had killed Jesus our Lord, we were 
afraid and went away from Him. 5. He said that it was 
not necessary for us to see each other. 6. If ye persecute 
and kill those who are being sent to you, ye shall no longer 
be the people of God. 7. The multitudes went away, but 
those who remained said that He had the words of life. 
8. When Jesus had spoken these things and had sent His 
disciples into the villages of Galilee, the Pharisees were 
afraid of the people. 9. Having killed Jesus they will cast 
out of their synagogues those who have believed on Him. 
10. The apostle himself did not save himself, but God 
was the One who saved him. 11. When the Lord had spoken 
this parable, those rulers said that they would kill those 
who had been sent by Him. 12. Unless Jesus himself sends 
us we shall not be disciples of Him. 13. Unless ye repent 
ye will remain in sin forever. 14. He who said this word 
to the One who sent the apostles will say the same word 
also to those who have been sent by Him. 15. Those good 
disciples, having loved those who were following Jesus, 
will love also those who follow His apostles. 16. Those who 
saw Him as He was walking in Galilee will behold Him in 
heaven for ever. 


eee τ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 157 


LESSON XXV 


More Nouns of the Third Declension 
Adjectives of the Third Declension in -ns, -es 


345. Vocabulary 
ἀληθής, ἐς, adj., true. γραμματεύς, γὙραμματέως, ὃ, 
ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, a man (ἀνήρ a scribe. 
is a man as distinguished ἔθνος, ἔθνους, τό, a nation; 
from women and children; plur., τὰ ἔθνη, the nations, 
ἄνθρωπος is a human be- the Gentiles. 
| ing as distinguished from ἱερεύς, ἱερέως, 6, a priest. 
| other beings). | μήτηρ, μητρός, ἡ, a mother. 
ἀρχιερεύς, ἀρχιερέως, 6, α ὄρος, ὄρους, τό, a mountain. 
| chief priest. πατήρ, πατρός, ὃ, a father. 


βασιλεύς, βασιλέως, ὁ, aking. πίστις, πίστεως, ἡ, farth. 

| πλήρης; es, adj., full. 

yévos, γένους, τό, @ race, a πόλις, πόλεως, ἡ, α City. 
kind. χάρις, χάριτος, ἡ, grace. 


346. Before studying the present lesson, the student 
should review the paradigms in Lesson XVII. 


347. The declension of χάρις, χάριτος, ἡ, grace, is as 


follows: 
Sing. Plur. 
N. V. xapes N. V. χάριτες 
G. χάριτος G. χαρίτων 
D. χάριτι D. χάρισι(ν) 
A. χάριν A. χάριτας 


158 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


348. This noun differs from those in §211, in that the 
accusative singular ending is -ν instead of -a. The final τ 
of the stem (yapir-) drops out before the -v. If χάρις were 
declined like ἐλπίς the accusative singular would be χάριτα. 


349. The declension of πόλις, πόλεως (Stem πολι-), ἡ, a 
city, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
N. πόλις N.V. πόλεις 
G. πόλεως G. πόλεων 
1). πόλει 10. πόλεσι(ν) 
Α. πόλιν Α. πόλεις 
V. πόλι 


350. The final c of the stem is changed to ε except 
in the nominative, accusative and vocative singular. 
πόλει in the dative singular is contracted from πόλεει, 
and πόλεις in the nominative plural from πόλε-ες, in 
accordance with the rules of contraction given in Lesson 
XXIII. The accusative plural has -es, instead of -eas 
or (as the rules of contraction would require) -ys. The 
accusative singular has instead of -a the v- ending which 
appears in certain other third declension nouns such as 
χάρις. The genitive singular ending is -ws instead of -os. 
The accent in the genitive singular and plural of this class 
of nouns is the only exception to the rule that if the ultima 
is long the antepenult cannot be accented (see §11). 


351. These third-declension nouns in -ἰς with genitives 
in -ews, of which πόλις is an example, form a very impor- 
tant class of nouns in the New Testament. The nouns of 
this class are declined alike and are all of feminine gender. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 159 


352. The declension of γένος, γένους, (stem yeveo-), τό, 
α race, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur, 
N. A.V. γένος N. A.V. γένη 
G. γένους G. γενῶν 
D. γένει D. γένεσι(ν) 


353. The final o of the stem (yevec-) is dropped except 
in the nominative singular. The ε which is then left at the 
end of the stem is contracted with the vowels of the regular 
third-declension endings, in accordance with the rules of 
contraction given in Lesson XXIII. 


354. These third-declension nouns in -os, τοὺς, are de- 
clined alike, and are all of neuter gender. 


355. The declension of βασιλεύς, βασιλέως (stem βασι- 
λευ-), ὁ, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
N. βασιλεύς N. V. βασιλεῖς 
G. βασιλέως G. βασιλέων 
D. βασιλεῖ D. βασιλεῦσι(ν) 
A. βασιλέα A. βασιλεῖς 
V. βασιλεῦ 


356. The final v of the stem is dropped before those 
endings which begin with a vowel. Contraction takes place 
in the dative singular and nominative plural. The genitive 
singular has -ws instead of -os (compare πόλις.). But the 
accusative singular has the a-ending, not the v-ending. 


357. These nouns in -evs, -ews are masculine. 


358. Observe the declension of πατήρ and of ἀνήρ in 
$565. 


160 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


359. The declension of other third-declension nouns will 
give little difficulty when once the genitive singular and the 
gender are known. Only the dative plural is sometimes 
troublesome, but the forms can at least be easily recognized 
when they occur. 


360. The declension of ἀληθής, és (stem ἀληθεσ-), true, 
is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M.F. N. M.F. N. 
N. ἀληθής ἀληθές N.V. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 
G. ἀληθοῦς ἀληθοῦς G. ἀληθῶν ἀληθῶν 
D. ἀληθεῖ ἀληθεῖ D. ἀληθέσι(ν) ἀληθέσι(ν) 
Α. ἀληθῆ ἀληθές Α. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 
Υ. ἀληθές ἀληθές 


361. The final σ of the stem is dropped in most of the 
forms, and contraction then takes place. Compare πόλις, 
γένος, and βασιλεύς. 


362. This is the first adjective studied thus far which is 
declined according to the third declension in the feminine as 
well as in the masculine and neuter. 


363. Exercises 


I. 1. ἀληθῆ ἐστι τὰ λαλούμενα ὑπὸ TOU ἱερέως τοὐτου. 
2, συνελθόντων τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ γραμματέων ἵνα ἀποκτεί- 
νωσι τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον, προσηύξαντο οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ. 

9 t « \ ia 3 \ t ee 3 , 9 la) 
3. ἀπεκρίθη ὁ βασιλεὺς 6 ἀγαθὸς λέγων ὅτι ov θέλει ἀποκτεῖναι 
τοῦτον. 4. χάριτι δὲ ἐσώθησαν ἐκεῖνοι οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ καὶ 
᾽ LU 9 ! “ \ [ὰ “ \ , 
ἠγέρθησαν ἐν δόξῃ. 5. TH γὰρ χάριτι σωζόμεθα διὰ πίστεως 
e / \ t 3 \ x “ \ \ , 
iva δοξάζωμεν τὸν θεόν. 6. ἰδὼν τὸν πατέρα Kal τὴν μητέρα 


Tome 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 161 


᾽ ΨΥ Ψ nN t 9 \ > nN 3 \ ᾽ Ψ 
αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἔμεινεν σὺν αὐτοῖς. 7. εἰς τὰ ἔθνη ἀποστε- 
λεῖς τοὺς ἀποστόλους σου, ἵνα κηρύσσωσιν αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐαγγέ- 
λιον τῆς χάριτός σου. ὃ. ἀγαθὸς ἢν οὗτος ὁ ἀνὴρ καὶ πλήρης 
, γι 
πνεύματος ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως. 9. ἰδόντες δὲ τὴν χάριν τοῦ 
θεοῦ παρεκάλεσαν τὰ ἔθνη μένειν ἐν τῇ χάριτι σὺν χαρᾷ καὶ 
ἐλπίδι. 10. καταβαινόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους ἐλάλει 
nN 5) an 
ταῦτα ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς. 11]. ἀγαπήσωμεν τοὺς πατέρας καὶ Tas 
μητέρας ἡμῶν, ἵνα τηρήσωμεν τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ θεοῦ. 12. 
τῶν ἀρχιερέων ἰδόντων τοὺς συνερχομένους εἰς τὸ ἀκούειν τοῦ 
ἀνδρὸς εἶπον πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς οἱ ἄρχοντες ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὸν ἀποθα- 
νεῖν. 13. οἱ βασιλεῖς οἱ πονηροὶ ἀπέκτειναν καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας 
καὶ τὰ τέκνα. 14. ὁ δὲ θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτούς, ἵνα δοξάζωσιν αὐτὸν 
εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. 15. ἐὰν μὴ χάριν ἔχωμεν καὶ πίστιν καὶ ἐλπίδα, 
οὐ μετανοήσουσι τὰ ἔθνη ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν. 10. τοῖς ἀνδράσι 
τοῖς πεμφθεῖσιν ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως προσηνέγκαμεν τὸν πατέρα 
\ \ If e mn 3 \ \ \ MM U 
καὶ THY μητέρα ἡμῶν. 17. ἐλθὼν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα ταύτης 
τῆς χώρας παρεκάλεσας αὐτὸν μὴ ἀποκτεῖναι τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦ- 
᾽ ᾽ Lge τὰ oN ! « \ nN 3 / 
τον. 18. εἰ ἀληθῆ ἐστι τὰ λεγόμενα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀκολουθησάντων 
τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς. 
19. διὰ πίστεως σώσει τοὺς πιστεύοντας εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. 
ID τ \ Ne Ay. ρος (oy 9) a Cee , 
20. ἐδέξαντο δὲ Kal τὰ ἔθνη TO ῥῆμα τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ τὸ ἀληθές. 


II. 1. This is the race that killed those who believe on 
Jesus. 2. When the scribes had entered into that city, the 
disciples went away to the mountains. 3. We saw that the 
word which was being spoken by the man was true. 4. When 
the Lord had said this to the chief priests, the ruler mar- 
velled. 5. The father of him who killed the men will kill 
also the children. 6. God will raise up from the dead those 
who have been saved by His grace. 7. Ye shall be saved by 
God through faith. 8. On account of the faith of the fath- 
ers and of the mothers the children will die in the evil city. 
9. The city being itself full of sin has also a wicked king. 
10. If we enter into those cities having our hearts full of 
grace and faith and hope, those who repent at our word will 


102 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


see the King in His glory. 11. Jesus said to the scribes who 
᾿ς were following that He was going into the holy city. 12. If 
we love the brethren we shall bless also the One who sent 
them into the nations. 18. The king said to my father that 
the chief priests and Pharisees wished to kill those who were 
following Jesus. 14. While Jesus was speaking these things 
in that wicked city, the chief priests were gathering together 
the soldiers in order that they might kill Him. 15. Those 
who have not the grace of God in their hearts have neither 
life nor hope. 16. If ye gointo those cities and villages, ye 
shall see the king who killed your fathers and your mothers. 


net aia 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


163 


LESSON XXVI 


Declension of πᾶς, πολύς, μέγας, and Numerals. 


Attribu- 


tive and Substantive Uses of Prepositional Phrases 


and of the Genitive. 


Accusative of 


Extent of Time and Space 


364. 


δύο, two. 

εἷς, μία, ἕν, one. 

ἕξ, indecl., 812. 

ἔτος, ἔτους, τό, a year. 

ΠΟΘΙ: ΟΥ: 

ἤθελον, imperfect indic. of 
θέλω (with an apparently 
irregular augment, but an- 
other form of the verb was 
ἐθέλω). 

᾿Ιάκωβος, 6, James. 

καθαρός, a, ov, adj., clean, 
pure. 

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, adj., 
great. 

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, no One, 
nothing (with moods other 
than the indicative). 

ὀλίγος, ἡ, ον, adj., few. 


365. 
is as follows: 


Vocabulary 


> ᾿ς > , 3 , 
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, NO One, 


nothing (with the indica- 
tive). 

Tas, πᾶσα, Tayv,adj.,all,every. 

πεντακισχίλιοι, al, a, five 
thousand. 

πέντε, indecl., five. 

πλῆθος, πλήθους, τό, a mul- 
titude. 

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, 
much, many. 

πούς, ποδός, 0, α foot. 

στάδιον, τό (plural τὰ στάδια, 
but also masc. οἱ στάδιοι), 
a stadium, a furlong. 

τέσσαρες, a, four. 

τρεῖς, τρία, three. 

ὡς, adv., as; with numerals, 
about. 


adj., 


The declension of πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, adj., all, every, 


164 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Sing. Plur. 
M. F, N. M. F, N. 
N. was πᾶσα πᾶν N. πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα 
G. παντός πάσης παντός G. πάντων πασῶν πάντων 
D. ravti racy marti Ὁ. πᾶσι(ν) πάσαις πᾶσι(ν) 
Α. πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν Α. πάντας πάσας πάντα 


366. The masculine and neuter stem is zavr- and the 
word is declined nearly like the first aorist active participle 
of λύω. But the accent is slightly irregular in the mascu- 
line and neuter, since it follows the rule for monosyllables 
of the third declension (see §221) in the singular but not 
in the plural. 


The Use of πᾶς 


367. πᾶς can stand in the predicate position with a noun 
that has the article. This usage corresponds so exactly with 
English as to call for little explanation. 

Example: πᾶσα ἡ πόλις, all the city. 

368. But πᾶς can also stand in the attributive position. 

Example: ἡ πᾶσα πόλις, the whole city; ot πάντες μαθηταί, 
the whole body of disciples, all the disciples. 


369. With a singular noun, πᾶς often means every. 

Example: πᾶν ὄρος, every mountain. 

πᾶς is frequently used with article and participle. 

Examples: πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων, everyone who believes; πάντες 
οἱ πιστεύοντες, all those who believe; πάντα τὰ ὄντα ἐκεῖ, all 
the things that are there. 


370. Declension of πολύς and of μέγας 


Learn the declension of πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, much, many, 
great, and of μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, great, in §§574, 575. 
It will be observed that except for the short forms in the 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 165 


nominative, vocative and accusative, masculine and neu- 
ter singular, these two adjectives are declined like ordi- 
nary adjectives of the second and first declension. 


Numerals 


371. The declension of εἷς, μία, ἕν, one, is as follows: 


M. F, N. 
N. eis pla ἕν 
G. ἑνός μιᾶς ἑνός 
D. evi μιᾷ. ἑνί 
Α. ἕνα μίαν ἕν 


The slight irregularities should be noticed. 


372. The declension of οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, no one, and 
μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, no one, is like that of εἷς. 


373. δύο, two, is indeclinable (the same for all cases 
and genders) except that it has a dative form δυσί(ν). 


374. The declension of τρεῖς, τρία, three, and of 
τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα, four, may be found in §588. 


375. The other cardinal numerals up to διακόσιοι, two 
hundred, are indeclinable. 


Attributive and Substantive Uses of Prepositional Phrases 
and of the Genitive 


376. Prepositional phrases are frequently treated as 
attributive adjectives, being placed after the article. 

Example: οἱ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ πόλει μαθηταί, or οἱ μαθηταὶ ot 
ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ πόλει, the in-that-city disciples, or (by a free 
translation) the disciples who are [or, if the leading verb is 
past, were| in that city. Here the prepositional phrase 
takes the exact place of an attributive adjective. It will be 
remembered that οἱ ἀγαθοὶ μαθηταί or οἱ μαθηταὶ οἱ 


166 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἀγαθοί means the good disciples (see $70). If in these two 
Greek phrases ἐν τῇ πόλει be substituted for the attributive 
adjective ἀγαθοί we have the idiom now under discussion. 


377. Like other attributive adjectives, these preposi- 
tional phrases can be used substantively. 


Example: As oi ἀγαθοί means the good men, so οἱ ἐν τῇ 
πόλει means the in-the-city men, or the men who are (or were) 
in the city. 


378. A noun in the genitive case can be used in this 
same way. 


Example: As oi ἀγαθοὶ means the good men, so ot Tov 


Ἰησοῦ means the of-Jesus men, the belonging-to-Jesus men, 
| the ones 


the i who belong to Jesus. 
those 


379. The genitive in this usage may indicate various 
relationships. Sometimes it indicates sonship. Thus ὁ τοῦ 
ZeGedatov may mean the son of Zebedee. The context must 
determine. All that is certainly implied in the Greek is that 
the person spoken of is connected in some way with Zebedee. 
The literal meaning of the phrase is the belonging-to-Zebedee 
man. 


380. Notice that the disciples who are in the city may be 
expressed by of μαθηταὶ of ὄντες ἐν TH πόλει, the being- 
wn-the-city disciples. But the ὄντες is not needed. So also 
those who are in the city might be οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῇ πόλει, the 
berng-in-the-city people. But again the ὄντες is not needed. 
The prepositional phrase can be used as an attributive adjec- 
tive just as well as the participle (with its modifiers) can. 


381. All three of the idioms just discussed (οἱ ἐν τῇ 
πόλει μαθηταί, οἱ ἐν TH πόλει, and οἱ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ) are im- 


ΡΥ ΤῊ ogee Ae δον tity a ῃ «Ἢ ry Frey eae. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 167 


portant. It should now be increasingly evident how much 
of Greek syntax is dependent on the distinction between 
the attributive and the predicate position. See §§68-74. 


382. Accusative of Extent of Space and Time 


The accusative is used to express extent of space or 
time, answering the question how far? or how long? 

Examples: ἐπορεύθην μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ στάδιον ἕν, I went with 
him one furlong; ἔμεινα μίαν ἡμέραν, I remained one day. 


383. Exercises 


I. 1. μείνας σὺν αὐτῷ ἔτη τρία ἦλθεν εἰς ἐκείνην THY πόλιν. 
ION \ \ 9 a 1) ἢ 3 A a 
2. ἰδὼν δὲ τοὺς ἐν TH μεγάλῃ πόλει ἔγραψε Kal Tots 
ἴω “Ὁ ΚΣ 
ἐν τῇ puxpa.' 3. πορευθέντες δὲ οἱ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου σταδίους 
53 >) a a 
ὡς πέντε εἶδον τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν Kal πάντας τοὺς pet’ αὐτοῦ 
μαθητάς. 4. ἀκούσαντες δὲ ταῦτα πάντα οἱ ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ 
εἶπον ὅτι θέλουσιν ἰδεῖν τὸν ταῦτα ποιοῦντα. ὅ. ἐθαύ- 
μασεν πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος ἐν τῷ βλέπειν αὐτοὺς τὰ ποιούμενα 
mn) “ 93, 3, 
ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. 0. οὐκ ἔμεινε μίαν ἡμέραν ὁ μετὰ δύο ἔτη ἰδὼν 
τὸν ἀπόστολον τὸν εὐαγγελισάμενον αὐτόν. 7. τῶν ἀρχιε- 
᾽ “ 3 3 a lan 
ρέων ὄντων ἐν ἐκείνῃ TH μεγάλῃ πόλει ἔμεινεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν TH 
/ e ’ e A Ni Ὁ lan) \ > ta) [4 3 
κώμῃ ἡμέρας ὡς πέντε ἢ ἕξ. 8. δεῖ τοὺς ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν ἐξελ- 
fen) 3 Ny nN ἴω an 
θεῖν eis τὰ ὄρη. 9. θεραπευθέντος ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ τοῦ ὑπὸ τῶν 
τεσσάρων προσενεχθέντος αὐτῷ ἐδόξασαν πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ 
Ἄν \ ’ Ay if nN \ \ ON ἐς 
οἰκίᾳ τὸν ποιήσαντα τὰ μεγάλα ταῦτα. 10. πρὸ δὲ τοῦ ἐλ- 
nN n Ss ) ἴω nN an an 
θεῖν τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ἣν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ 
an δ) ἴων 
ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ. Ll. ἐποιήθη μὲν δι᾽ αὐτοῦ ὁ κόσμος καὶ πάντα 
ἈΠ.» 9s 5S 3 Ψ Κ᾿ τ» t Yn Ἐν ε ὃ DN 12 nan 
τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ, αὐτὸς δὲ ἐγένετο δι΄ ἡμᾶς ὡς δοῦλος. . τοῦτο 
ἐποίησεν ἵνα σώσῃ πάντας τοὺς πιστεύοντας εἰς αὐτόν. 13. 
πᾶς ὁ ἀγαπῶν τὸν θεὸν ἀγαπᾷ καὶ τοὺς ἀδελφούς. 14. 
συνήχθησαν πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἵνα ἀκούσωσι τὰ λεγόμενα 


1 What noun is naturally to be supplied with τῇ μικρᾷ 


168 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


« A “ J , A“ 7 e 9 A“ ” a 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων. 15. ταῦτα ἔλεγον οἱ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ πᾶσι 
τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσι καὶ γραμματεῦσι διὰ τὸ γινώσκειν αὐτοὺς 
πάντα τὰ περὶ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. 10. ταῦτα ἐποίει ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν 
a] 6 , ν᾽} \ 93 Ὁ \ 3 > , δί 17 

ουδαίων, ἤθελε γὰρ ἀποκτεῖναι τὰ ἐν τῇ κώμῃ παιδία. ; 
οὐδεὶς γινώσκει πάντα τὰ ἐν TH κόσμῳ εἰ μὴ ὁ ποιήσας τὰ 
πάντα. 18. σωθήσεται οὐδεὶς ἐὰν μὴ διὰ πίστεως" ἐτήρησε 

4 3 \ ft Be a \ 9 \ an a“ , 
γὰρ οὐδεὶς πάντας τὰς ἐντολὰς τοῦ θεοῦ. 19. προσευχώμεθα 
ὑπὲρ τῶν διωκόντων ἡμᾶς, ἵνα γενώμεθα υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν 
τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. 20. μακάριοι οἱ καθαροὶ, αὐτοὶ γὰρ τὸν θεὸν 
ὄψονται. 


II. 1. The chief priests saw that all the things which 
were being spoken by Jesus were true. 2. In that place 
there were about five thousand men with many women and 
many children. 3. Many are those that go down into the 
evil way, but few are those who walk in the ways of life. 
4. If ye become disciples of me I will show you all things. 
5. By the grace of God all we have become disciples of 
Jesus. 6. Through faith we have become children of our 
Father who is in heaven, for Jesus has saved us. 7. Let us 
do all the things that are in the law, according to the things 
that are being said to us by the prophets. 8. In that great 
city we saw three disciples of the Lord praying to their 
Father in heaven.? 9. When Jesus had called one of the 
three men who were in the boat, he spake to him all the 
things concerning the Kingdom of God. 10. We were in 
the same city one year, but Jesus sent us into all the villages 
which are in Galilee. 11. When Jesus had done all these 
great things, the Pharisees said that a demon was in Him. 
12. When Jesus had spoken all these things to the multi- 
tudes who were in the cities and villages, He sent the disci- 


1 εἰ μή and ἐὰν μή are often to be translated except. 

2 With what is in heaven to be construed? If it is to be construed with 
Father, it should be put in the attributive position. The meaning then 
is our in-heaven Father, our Father who is in heaven. 


ΝΕ ΝΡ ΔΎ ΣΡ SLE Cty MON Me , 671. Bey Rn «σα τ Cera 
τ ας eek, ᾿ ΗΑ Ἶ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 169 


ples in order that they mizht preach in the other cities also. 
13. All the churches shall see the One who saved them 
through His grace and sent to them the apostles. 14. 
Many kings and priests shall say that all the things which 
have been spoken by Jesus are true. 15. We saw no one in 
that great city except one disciple and a few children. 
16. Those who belonged to Jesus died on account of their 
faith. 


170 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXVII 


Interrogative, Indefinite, and Relative Pronouns 
Deliberative Questions 
Conditional Relative Clauses 


384. Vocabulary 


aitéw, I ask, I request. 

et, Whether (in indirect ques- 
tions); the common mean- 
ing, 2f, has already been 
given. 

ἐπερωτάω, I ask a question of, 
1 question. 

ἐρωτάω, I ask a question, I 
ask a question of, I ques- 
tion, I ask (Originally 
ἐρωτάω meant to ask in the 
sense of to question, and 
αἰτέω meant to ask in the 
sense of to request. But in 
New ‘Testament Greek 
ἐρωτάω is frequently used 
in the latter sense as well 
as in the former). 

καρπός, ὃ, a fruit. 

κρίσις, ἡ, α Judgment. 

ὅπου, adv., where (relative). 


és, 7, 8, rel. pron., who, which. 

ὅταν for ὅτε ἄν, whenever 
(with subjunctive). 

ὅτε, adv., when (relative). 

οὖν, conj}., accordingly, there- 
fore, then (postpositive, 
like δέ πα yap. See §91). 

πίνω, πίομαι (very irregu- 
lar future), ἔπιον, J drink. 

ποῦ, adv., where? (interroga- 
tive). 

πῶς, adv., how? (nterroga- 
tive). 

Tis, Tl, interrogative pron., 
who? which? what? 

Tis, TL, indefinite pron., 
someone, something, a cer- 
tain one, a certain thing. 

φάγομαι, fut. (very irregular), 
ἔφαγον, 2nd aor., of ἐσθίω, 
peat: 


μὴ Ay i 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 171 


Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns 


385. The declension of the interrogative pronoun, τίς, 
τί, who? which? what?, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M. F. N. M. F. N. 
N. τίς τί τίνες τίνα 
ἃ. τίνος τίνος Ὶ τίνων τίνων 
D. τίνι τίνι τίσι(ν) τίσι(ν) 
Α. τίνα τί τίνας τίνα 


386. The declension is according to the third declension 
in all three genders, the masculine and feminine being alike 
throughout, and the neuter differing from the masculine 
and feminine only in the nominative and accusative. 


387. The acute accent in the interrogative pronoun is 
never changed to the grave. 


Example: τί λέγει ; what does he say? 


388. The declension of the indefinite pronoun, τίς, τι, 
some one, something, a certain one, a certain thing, is as fol- 
lows: 


Sing. Plur. 
Vie iis N. M.F. N. 
ἸΝ  τὶς τι τινές τινά 
α. τινός τινός τινῶν τινῶν 
DD. rut τινί τισί(ν) τισί(ν) 
τινὰ τι τινάς τινά 


389. ‘The indefinite pronoun is declined like the inter- 
rogative pronoun except that all the forms of the indefinite 
pronoun are enclitic and receive an accent only when the 
rules in §92 so prescribe. 


172 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


390. Both the interrogative and the indefinite pronouns 
can be used either with a noun or separately. 

Examples: (1) τίνα καρπὸν ἔχετε; what fruit have ye? 
(2) τί λέγεις; what dost thou say? (3) ἄνθρωπός τις, a cer- 
tain man; (4) εἶπέν τις, ἃ certain man said. 


391. The accusative singular neuter, τί, of the inter- 
rogative pronoun is often used adverbially to mean why. 
Example: τί ποιεῖτε ταῦτα ; why do ye do these things? 


Indirect Questions 


392. Indirect questions, like the ordinary form of indi- 
rect discourse (see 8908), retain the same mood and tense 
as those which would have been found in the direct dis- 
course lying back of the indirect. 


393. The same interrogative words are commonly used 
in indirect questions as those which are used in direct ques- 
tions. 

Examples: ἠρώτησεν αὐτὸν τίς ἐστιν, he asked him who 
he was. The direct question lying back of the indirect was, 
τίς εἶ; who art thou? (2) εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ποῦ μένει, he told 
them where he was abiding. The direct question which he 
was answering was ποῦ μένεις ; where art thou abiding? 


394. Deliberative Questions 


The subjunctive is used in deliberative questions. A 
deliberative question is a question that expects an answer 
in the imperative mood. 

Examples: (1) ποιήσωμεν τοῦτο ἢ μὴ ποιήσωμεν; shall 
we do this or shall we not do τ|ῦ The answer expected is in 
the imperative — do zt or do not do τί. (2) τί ποιήσωμεν; 
what shall we do? The natural answer is do this or do that, 
or the like. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 175 


The Relative Pronoun 


395. The declension of the relative pronoun, és, 4, 6, 
who, which, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M. ie N. M. ie N. 
N. ὅς 7 6 οἵ αἵ ἅ 
(Ποὺ τῆς οὗ ὧν ὧν ὧν 
1 ὦ ἣ ᾧ ΟΙ ἀϊτο OLS 
Α. ὅν nv ὄὅ οὕς ἅς ἅ 


396. It will be observed that except for 6 instead of ὅν 
in the nominative and accusative singular neuter (compare 
αὐτός and ἐκεῖνος) the declension of the relative pronoun 
is like that of a regular adjective of the second and first 
declension. The nominative singular feminine and the 
nominative plural masculine and feminine are like the cor- 
responding forms of the article except that the article in 
those forms is proclitic. 


397. Like other pronouns, the relative pronoun agrees 
with its antecedent in gender and number but has its own 
case in its own clause. 

Example: (1) ὁ ἀπόστολος ὃν εἶδες ἀπῆλθεν, the apostle 
whom you saw went away; (2) ἀληθῆ ἣν πάντα ἃ εἶπεν ὁ 
Ἰησοῦς, all things which Jesus said were true; (3) ὁ μαθητὴς 
ὃν ἠγάπησεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἦν ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, the disciple whom 
Jesus loved was in the house. 


398. But where the antecedent of the relative pronoun 
is in the genitive or dative case and the relative pronoun 
itself would naturally be in the accusative case as the object 
of the verb in the relative clause, it 15 regularly attracted 
to the case of its antecedent. 

Examples: πάντων δὲ θαυμαζόντων ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ois ἐποίει 
εἶπεν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ...., but when all were 


174 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


wondering at all the things which He was doing, He said to his 
CISCL Nese aes Here ois would have been accusative if it 
had retained the case which it would have had in its own 
clause. But it is attracted to the case of πᾶσιν. 


399. The antecedent of the relative pronoun is fre- 
quently left unexpressed. Thus ὅς can mean he who; 
ἥ, she who; 6, that which, what; οἵ, the men who, or they 
who; αἵ, the women who; ἅ, the things which. 

Examples: (1) οὐκ ἔξεστίν μοι ὃ θέλω ποιῆσαι, it 2s not 
lawful for me to do that which I wish (or to do what I 
wish). (2) ὃς yap οὐκ ἔστιν καθ᾽ ὑμῶν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐστιν, 
for he who is not against you ts for you. In such a case 
essentially the same thought is expressed as by the article 
with participle —dés οὐκ ἔστιν is almost like ὁ μὴ ὦν. But 
in many cases only the article with participle could be used. 
For example zn the one who has could hardly be expressed in 
any way but by ἐν τῷ ἔχοντι. (3) ἔχω ὃ θέλω, I have 
what I wish. Here the English word what is a short way of 
saying the thing which or that which and so is correctly 
translated by 6. Compare λέγω αὐτῷ τί ἔχω, I tell him 
what I have. Here the English word what is an inter- 
rogative word in an indirect question, and so is correctly 
translated by τί. 


Conditional Relative Clauses 


400. The indefinite relative clauses which in English are 
marked by the suffix -ever added to the relative word (e. g., 
whoever, whichever, whatever, wherever, whenever), have in 
Greek ordinarily the subjunctive with the particle ἄν or 
ἐάν. This is one of the commonest uses of the subjunctive. 

Examples: (1) ἃς yap ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι 
οὐ σώσει αὐτήν, for whoever wishes to save his life shall not 
save it; (2) ὃς ἂν πιστεύσῃ σωθήσεται, whoever believes lor 


᾽ 


- 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 175 


shall believe] shall be saved; (3) eis ἣν δ᾽ ἂν πόλιν εἰσέλθητε 
ὄψεσθε ἐν αὐτῇ μαθητάς, and into whatever city ye enter [or 
shall enter] ye shall see disciples in it; (4) ὅπου ἐὰν ἢ ὁ 
διδάσκαλος ἐκεῖ ἔσονται καὶ οἱ διδασκόμενοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, 
wherever the teacher is there will be also those who are being 
taught by him. 


401. It will be observed that the verb in the English 
translation of these conditional relative clauses can be 
either future indicative or present indicative. It often 
makes little difference which is used. In such clauses the 
present indicative in English frequently refers to future 
time. 


402. Exercises 


I. 1. ὃς ἐὰν μὴ δέξηται ὑμᾶς τοῦτον οὐ δέξεται ὁ βασι- 
λεύς. 2. ἃ ἐὰν ποιήσωμεν ὑμῖν, ποιήσετε καὶ ὑμεῖς ἡμῖν. 
3. ἐρωτήσαντός τινος αὐτοὺς τί φάγῃ ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ 
λέγοντες ὅτι bet αὐτὸν φαγεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τὸν ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ. A. 
Tivos! ἔσται ταῦτα πάντα ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ; 5. ὅταν 
ἔλθῃ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τίνες ἔσονται οἱ πιστεύοντες; 0. 
ὃς ἂν λύσῃ μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν ποιεῖ ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν. 7. 
ἃ εἶπεν ὑμῖν ὁ προφήτης ἔτι ὧν μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ταῦτα ἐροῦσι καὶ οἱ 
εὐαγγελισάμενοι ἡμᾶς. ὃ. ἐάν τις ἀπὸ νεκρῶν πορευθῇ πρὸς 
αὐτούς, μετανοήσουσιν. 9. ὃς ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τῶν προφητῶν οὐδὲ 
μετανοήσει ἐάν τινα ἴδῃ τῶν νεκρῶν. 10. οἱ ἂν εἴπωσιν ἃ οὐκ 
ἔστιν ἀληθῆ οὐ λήμψονται καρπόν τινα τοῦ ἔργου αὐτῶν. 1]. 
ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἐάν τις ἔγερθῇ ἐκ νεκρῶν μετανοήσουσιν. 12. ἠρώ- 
τησαν τὸν προφήτην οἱ ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ εἰ οἱ νεκροὶ ἀκούσουσι 
τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ κυρίου. 13. εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὅτι ἐν τῇ κρίσει 

ΤᾺ noun or pronoun in the genitive case may stand in the predicate 
with the verb to be. Thus ἡ βασιλεία ἐστὶ τοῦ θεοῦ or θεοῦ 
ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία means the kingdom is God’s or the kingdom belongs 
to God. 


176 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἀκούσουσιν πάντες TOU κυρίου. 14. ἐλθόντες of Φαρισαῖοι ets 
τινα κώμην ἐπηρώτησαν τοὺς ἐν αὐτῇ λέγοντες Ποῦ εἰσιν οἱ 

ἴω , a \ 4 A ᾽ lal e 3 mo li 
τοῦ προφήτου: ἃ yap λέγουσι περὶ αὐτῶν ot ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ 
οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθῆ. 15. ἔλεγε δὲ ὁ ἐπερωτηθείς Τί ἐπερωτᾷς 
με; οὐ γὰρ θέλω ἀποκρίνεσθαί σοι οὐδέν. 16. ἔλεγεν οὖν 

n ἴω n~ 3 , , , * ὃ « \ ’ 
τῶν μαθητῶν τις τῷ ἀποστόλῳ Τί ποιήσει οὗτος : ὁ δὲ ἀπό- 
στολος εὐθὺς ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λέγων ἸΠοιήσει ὁ θεὸς ἃ θέλει 
καὶ πάντα ἃ θέλει ἐστὶν ἀγαθά. 17. ἃ ἔβλεπε τὸν κύριον ποι- 
obyTa ταῦτα ἤθελε καὶ αὐτὸς ποιεῖν. 


II. 1. We did what those who were in the same city 
asked. 2. The priests whom we saw while they were still 
there asked us who those disciples were. 3. Whoever does 
not do what I say shall not receive from me what he asks. 
4. A certain scribe went into the city in order that he might 
take the books which the prophets had written. 5. Into 
whatever nation we go, let us seek the disciples who are 
in it. 6. What shall we say concerning all these things? 
7. They asked us what they should say concerning those 
in the city. 8. A certain man having come to Jesus said 
that he wished to be healed. 9. Whoever shall ask any- 
thing shall receive what he asks. 10. They asked Jesus 
what the will of God was. 11. Whoever kills his brother 
will come into the judgment. 12. Why then do you eat 
what it is not lawful to eat? 13. Whoever is not taught 
by the Lord will not know Him. 14. When the chief priests 
had seen what Jesus was doing they sent a certain messen- 
ger to the Pharisees. 15. Where shall we abide? For the 
night is coming and no one has said to us what we shall do. 


1The Greek language frequently uses a double negative where it is 
not allowable in English. Thus οὐ λέγω οὐδέν means 7 do not say 
anything, or I say nothing. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 177 


LESSON XXVIII 
The Imperative Mood 


403. Vocabulary 
ἁγιάζω, 1 hallow, I sanctify. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅτι, (plural 
ἀγρός, ὁ, a field. οἵτινες), indef. rel. pron., 
γῆ, ἡ, earth, land (γῆ has the whoever, whichever, what- 
circumflex accent through- ever (scarcely used except 
out, because there has been in the nominative case; 
contraction). sometimes used almost like 
ἐγγύς, adv., near. the simple relative pro- 
ἔλεέω, I have mercy on, I noun ὅς). 
pity. ) οὖς, ὠτός, TO, an ear. 


ὀφθαλμός, ὁ, an eye. 
ὅσος, ἡ, ov, rel. adj., as great σκότος, σκότους, τό, darkness. 
as,asmuchas,asmanyas. ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό, water. 
φῶς, φωτός, τό, light. 


404. The imperative mood occurs in the New Testa- 
ment almost exclusively in the present and aorist tenses. 


405. The present imperative, active, middle, and pas- 
sive, is formed on the present stem; the aorist imperative, 
active and middle, on the aorist stem; and the aorist passive 
imperative, on the aorist passive stem. There is of course 
no augment. See §245. 


406. ‘The imperative mood has no first person, but only 
second and third. 


178 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
407. The present active imperative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 2. Ave, doose (thou).  Plur. 2. λύετε, loose (ye). 
3. λυέτω, let him loose. 3. λυέτωσαν, let them 
loose. ° 


408. The present middle imperative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 2. Avov, loose (thou) Plur. 2. λύεσθε, loose (ye) for 


for thyself. yourselves. 
3. λυέσθω, let him 3. λυέσθωσαν, let them 
loose for himself. loose for themselves. 


409. ‘The present passive imperative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 2. Avov, be (thou) Plur. 2. λύεσθε, be (ye) 


loosed. loosed. 
3. λυέσθω, let him be 3. λυέσθωσαν, let them 
loosed. be loosed. 


410. It will be observed that the present active and the 
present middle and passive imperative have the variable 
vowel o /e. 


411. The aorist active imperative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 2. λῦσον, loose (thou). Plur. 2. λύσατε, loose (ye). 
3. λυσάτω, let him 3. λυσάτωσαν, let them 
loose. loose. 


412. The aorist middle imperative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 2. λῦσαι, loose (thou) Plur. 2. λύσασθε, loose (ye) 


for thyself. for yourselves. 
3. λυσάσθω, let him 3. λυσάσθωσαν, let them 
loose for himself. loose for themselves. 


413. It will be observed that the aorist active and the 
aorist middle imperative have the characteristic -σαὰ of the 


διδούς ee 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 179 


aorist stem. This -ca is disguised only in λῦσον, the second 
aorist active imperative, second person singular. 


414. The aorist passive imperative of λύω is as follows: 


Sing. 2. λύθητι, be (thou) Plur. 2. λύθητε, be (ye) 


loosed. loosed. 
3. λυθήτω, let him be 3. λυθήτωσαν, let them 
loosed. be loosed. 


415. It will be observed that the aorist passive impera- 
tive has the characteristic -θε of the aorist passive stem. 
This -θε is lengthened to -θη. 


416. The second aorist active imperative of λείπω, I 
leave, is as follows: 


Sing. 2. λίπε, leave (thou). Plur. 2. λίπετε, leave (ye). 
3. λιπέτω, let him 3. λιπέτωσαν, let them 
leave. leave. 


417. The second aorist middle imperative of λείπω 15 as 
follows: 


Sing. 2. λιποῦ Plur. 2. λίπεσθε 
3. λιπέσθω 3. λιπέσθωσαν 


418. It will be observed that the second aorist active 
and the second aorist middle imperative are formed on the 
second aorist stem. ‘They have the same endings as the 
present imperative. 


419. The second aorist middle imperative second per- 
son singular (6. g. Avwov) always has an irregular accent, 
instead of following the rule of recessive accent. 

Further, the forms εἰπέ, ἔλθέ, from λέγω and ἔρχομαι, 
have an irregular accent. 


180 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


420. The Tenses in the Imperative Mood 


There is no distinction of time between the tenses in 
the imperative mood. The aorist imperative refers to the 
action without saying anything about its duration or repe- 
tition, while the present imperative refers to it as con- 
tinuing or as being repeated. Thus λῦσον means simply 
loose, while λῦε means continue loosing, or the like. 
Ordinarily it is impossible to bring out the difference in an 
English translation. Compare §283. 


421. The Use of the Imperative 


The imperative mood is used in commands. 

Examples: ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους μου, hear my words; 
ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκουέτω, let him who has ears hear. It will be 
observed that the English language has, properly speaking, 
no imperative of the third person. Hence in translating 
the Greek imperative of the third person we have to use the 
helping verb let, so that the noun or pronoun that is the 
subject of the imperative in Greek becomes the object of 
the helping verb in English. 


422. Prohibition 

Prohibition (the negative of a command) is expressed by 
the present imperative with μή or by the aorist subjunctive 
with μή. , 

Examples: (1) μὴ Ave or μὴ λύσῃς, do not loose (μὴ λύῃς 
or μὴ λῦσον would be wrong); (2) μὴ λυέτω or μὴ λύσῃ, let 
him not loose; (3) μὴ λύετε or μὴ λύσητε, do not loose; 
(4) μὴ λυέτωσαν or μὴ λύσωσιν, let them not loose. 


423. Present Imperative of εἰμί 
The present imperative of εἰμί, I am, is as follows: 
Sing. 2. ἴσθι, be (thou). Plur. 2. ἔστε be (ye). 
3. ἔστω, let him be. 3. ἔστωσαν, let them be. 


ne _™ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 181 


424. Exercises 


I. 1. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀκούσῃ, παράλαβε μετὰ σοῦ ἔτι ἕνα ἢ δύο. 
2. ὃ ἐὰν ἴδητε τὸν Χριστὸν ποιοῦντα, τοῦτο ποιήσατε καὶ 
ὑμεῖς. 3. κύριε, ἔλέησον ἡμᾶς, οὐ γὰρ ἐποιήσαμεν ἃ ἐκέλευ- 
σας. 4. μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὁ ἐν τῷ ὄρει. ὅ. οὕτως οὖν 
προσεύχεσθε ὑμεῖς Πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς: ᾿Αγιασθή- 
τω τὸ ὄνομά σου: ἐλθάτω; ἡ βασιλεία σου: γενηθήτωΣ τὸ 
θέλημά σου, ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς. 6. ἀπόλυσον οὖν, 
κύριε, τὰ πλήθη: ἤδη γὰρ ἔρχεται ἡ νύξ. 7. μηδεὶς ἐξέλθῃ εἰς 
τὰ ὄρη, προσευξάσθωσαν δὲ πάντες τῷ πατρὶ αὐτῶν τῷ ἐν 
τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. ὃ. λαβὼν αὐτὸν ἄγε πρὸς ἡμᾶς. 9. μηδενὶ 
εἴπητε ὃ εἴδετε. 10. ἐγέρθητεβ καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσθε: ὁ γὰρ κύριος 
σώσει ὑμᾶς. 1]. πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν ποιήσατε 
καὶ τηρεῖτε, κατὰ δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε: λέγουσιν γὰρ 
καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν. 12. ἔλεγεν αὐτῷ μαθητής τις Κύριε, κέλευ- 
σόν με ἐλθεῖν πρὸς σὲ ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα. ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπε ᾿Ελθέ. 
13. ὅσα ἐὰν ἀκούσητε τοῖς ὠσὶν ὑμῶν καὶ ἴδητε τοῖς ὀφθαλ- 
μοῖς ὑμῶν εἴπετε καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν. 14. ἃ ἐὰν ἀκούσητε ἐν τῷ 
σκότει κηρύξατε ἐν τῷ φωτί. 15. μακάριος ὅστις φάγεται 
ἄρτον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ. 16. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ πόλει εἰσὶν 
ἱερεῖς πονηροί, οἵτινες οὐ ποιοῦσι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ. 17. 
ἐξελθόντες εἴπετε πᾶσι τοῖς ἔθνεσι τοῖς ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γῆς ἃ 
ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν. 18. ὅταν κληθῇς ὑπό 
τινος, πορεύθητι. 19. ὅταν ἴδητε ταῦτα γινόμενα, γνώσεσθε 
ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἡ κρίσις. 20. ἴδετε πάντες ὑμεῖς τὰς χεῖράς 
μου" οὐ γὰρ ἐποίησαν αὗται αἱ χεῖρες ὧν λέγουσιν ἐκεῖνοι οὐδέν. 


1A first aorist ending is here placed on a second aorist stem, as very 
frequently in New Testament Greek. See §186, footnote, and §521. 


2 The aorist passive of γίνομαι is the same in meaning as the aorist 
middle, the verb being deponent throughout. The meaning of the 
verb here is to take place, to be done. 


3The passive of ἐγείρω is frequently used as a deponent meaning 
I arise, I rise. 


182 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


II. 1. Speak ye to all the Gentiles the things which I 
have spoken to you. 2. Do not say in your heart that ye 
do not wish to do the things which the king commands. 
3. Let no one fear those evil priests, for whoever does the 
will of God shall go out with joy. 4. Let Him who has saved 
us through His blood have mercy on us in these evil days. 
5. Whosoever loves God shall come to the light, but he 
who does not love Him shall walk in the darkness. 6. As 
manysoever things as ye do, do in the light, in order that 
the name of God may be hallowed. 7. Let these men be 
baptized, for Christ has saved them through His word. 
8. Pray to thy Father in heaven, for He will do whatsoever 
things thou askest. 9. Let not the king say this, for we 
are all faithful men. 10. Let us not do the things which the 
evil men said to us. 11. Have mercy on all men, for the 
Lord has had mercy on you. 12. As many things as are 
good, do; but as many things as are evil, do not even speak 
concerning these. 13. The disciples asked the apostle 
what they should eat, and the apostle said to them, ‘‘Go into 
the villages and eat the bread which isin them.” 14. Do not 
begin to say in yourselves that you do not know the truth. 
15. Let those who are in the fields not return into their 
houses. 16. Lord, save me, for I have broken thy com- 
mandments. 


2 “" 
ΝΟ νυ. μοι 


425. 


ἀκήκοα, perf. act. indic. of 
ἀκούω, I hear. 
βεβάπτισμαι, perf. pass. 
indic. of βαπτίζω, I bap- 
tize. 

γέγονα, perf. indic. of 
γίνομαι, 1 become (γίνεται, 
at comes to pass, τὲ hap- 
pens). | 
γέγραφα, γέγραμμαι, perf. 
act. and perf. pass. indic. 
of γράφω, I write. 
γεννάω, I beget. 

ἔγγίζω, 1 come near. 
ἐγήγερται, perf. pass. indic., 
third pers. sing., of éyeipw, 
I raise up. 


426. 

Sing. 1. λέλυκα 

2. λέλυκας 
3. λέλυκε(υ) 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


183 


LESSON XXIX 
The Perfect Tense. 


Review of λύω. 


Vocabulary 


ἔγνωκα, perf. act. indic. of 
ywookw, I know. 

ἐλήλυθα, perf. indic. of 
ἔρχομαι, 1 come, I go. 

ἐρρέθην, aor. pass. indic.(aor. 
pass. part. ῥηθείς) of λέγω, 
I say. 

ἑώρακα, perf. act. indic. of 
βλέπω (ὁράω), I see. 

θνήσκω, I die (used only in 
the perfect, τέθνηκα, I am 
dead, and in the pluper- 
fect. In other tenses ἀπο- 
θνήσκω is used). 

μαρτυρέω, 1 bear witness. 

Πέτρος, 6, Peter. 

πληρόω, I fulfil. 


The perfect active indicative of λύω is as follows: 
Bhima 


λελύκαμεν 
2. λελύκατε 
3. λελύκασι (or λέλυκαν) 


427. The perfect active infinitive of λύω is λελυκέναι. 
The irregular accent should be noticed. 


184 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


428. The perfect active participle of λύω is λελυκώς, 
λελυκυΐα, NEAUKOS. 
The irregular accent should be noticed. 


429. The forms given above constitute the perfect 
system, which is formed from the fourth of the principal 
parts, λέλυκα. 


430. The perfect system is formed by adding x (in the 
indicative xa) to the verb stem, and by prefixing the redu- 
plication. The reduplication consists in the first consonant 
of the verb stem followed by e. 


431. The perfect, being a primary tense, might be ex- 
pected to have primary personal endings. But in the indica- 
tive the endings are exactly like the (secondary) endings of 
the first aorist, except in the third person plural, and even 
in the third person plural λέλυκαν sometimes stands instead 
of λελύκασι(ν). 


432. The perfect active subjunctive is so rare that it 
need not be learned. 


433. The declension of the perfect active participle is 
as follows: 


Sing. 
M. Τὺ Ν. 
Ν. λελυκώς λελυκυῖα λελυκός 
G. λελυκότος λελυκυίας λελυκότος 
1ὴ. λελυκότι λελυκυίᾳ λελυκότι 
Α. λελυκότα λελυκυῖαν λελυκός 
Plur. 
M. Be N. 
Ν. λελυκότες λελυκυΐαι λελυκότα 
G. λελυκότων λελυκυιῶν λελυκότων 
Ὁ. λελυκόσι(ν) λελυκυίαις λελυκόσι(ν) 
Α. λελυκότας λελυκυίας λελυκότα 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 185 


434. It will be observed that the perfect active parti- 
ciple, like the other active. participles and like the aorist 
passive participle, is declined according to the third declen- 
sion in the masculine and neuter and according to the first 
declension in the feminine. 


Formation of the Perfect Stem in Various Verbs 


435. If the verb stem begins with a vowel or diphthong, 
the reduplication consists in the lengthening of that vowel 
or diphthong. In this case the reduplication is like the aug- 
ment. 

Examples: The perfect active of ἐλπίζω is ἤλπικα, and 
of αἰτέω, ἤτηκα. 


436. If the verb stem begins with two consonants the 
reduplication in certain cases (by no means always) con- 
sists in the prefixing of an é (like the augment) instead of the 
repetition of the first consonant with e. 

Examples: ἔγνωκα is the perfect of γινώσκω. But γέγραφα 
is the perfect of γράφω. 


437. Verb stems beginning with ¢, 6 or x, are redupli- 
cated with π, 7 and x, respectively. 

Examples: πεφίληκα is the perfect of φιλέω ; τέθνηκα, 
I am dead, is the perfect of θνήσκω (the present does not 
occur in the New Testament). 


438. If the verb stem ends with a vowel that vowel is 
regularly lengthened before the x of the perfect active, just 
as it is before the o of the future and first aorist. 

Examples: ἠγάπηκα from ἀγαπάω, πεφίληκα from φιλέω. 


439. If the verb stem ends with 7, 6 or θ, the τ, 6 or θ 
is dropped before the κ of the perfect. 
Example: ἤλπικα from ἐλπίζω (stem ἐλπίδ-). 


180 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


440. Some verbs have a second perfect, which is conju- 
gated like the first perfect except that there is no x. 
Examples: γέγραφα from γράφω ; ἀκήκοα from ἀκούω. 


441. In general, the student should remember what was 
sald in §159 about the variety in the formation of the tense 
systems of the Greek verb. 


Perfect Middle and Passive 


442. The perfect middle and passive indicative of λύω 
is as follows: 


Sing. 1. λέλυμαι Plur. 1. λελύμεθα 
2. λέλυσαι 2. λέλυσθε 
3. λέλυται 3. λέλυνται 


443. The perfect middle and passive infinitive of λύω is 
λελύσθαι. 
The irregular accent should be noticed. 


444. ‘The perfect middle and passive participle of λύω is 
λελυμένος, ἡ, ov, (declined like a regular adjective of the 
second and first declension). 

The irregular accent should be noticed. 


445. The forms given above constitute the perfect middle 
system, which is formed from the fifth of the principal parts, 
λέλυμαι. 


446. The reduplication is the same as in the perfect 
active. ' 


447. In the indicative, the primary middle endings (see 
§111) are added directly to the stem, without intervening 
variable vowel. They are not modified at all. So in the 
infinitive and participle -σθαι and -yevos are added directly 
to the stem. 


Yu ce 

‘ = ‘ 
π᾿ 
P 
δι 
"Ἂς 


τ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 187 


448. If the verb stem ends with a vowel, that vowel is 
regularly lengthened before the endings in the perfect 
middle and passive, as before the tense suffixes in the future, 
first aorist, perfect active, and aorist passive. 

Example: μεμαρτύρημαι from paprupéw. 


449. If the verb stem ends with a consonant, various 
changes occur when the endings of the perfect middle and 
passive are put on. These changes are best learned by 
observation in the individual verbs. 

Example: γέγραμμαι (third person singular γέγραπται) 
from γράφω. 


450. Pluperfect Tense 


The pluperfect tense is so rare that its forms need not 
be learned. It is a secondary tense. The pluperfect active 
forms a part of the perfect system; and the pluperfect mid- 
dle and passive, of the perfect middle system. 


Use of the Perfect Tense 


451. There is no English tense corresponding to the 
Greek perfect. The translations I have loosed for λέλυκα, 
I have loosed for myself for λέλυμαι (middle), and I have 
been loosed for λέλυμαι (passive) may often serve in the 
exercises. But they are makeshifts at the best. It has 
already been observed (see §169) that these same English 
expressions may often translate the aorist tense rather than 
the perfect. 


452. The Greek perfect tense denotes the present state 
resultant upon a past action. 

Examples: - 

(1) Suppose someone asks an official, ‘“What is your 
relation to that prisoner?’’, and he replies, “I have released 


188 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


him,” the verb in this answer of the official would be 
λέλυκα. The perfect would express the present state of the 
official (with reference to the prisoner) resultant upon his 
past action of releasing. Butif, on the other hand, someone 
should ask an official, ‘“What is the history of your dealings 
with that prisoner?” and he should answer, “1 have released 
the prisoner three times and imprisoned him again three 
times,”’ the first verb of this answer of the official would 
be ἔλυσα, not λέλυκα, because there is here no thought of 
the present state resultant upon the past action. Indeed 
the act of releasing had no result continuing into the pres- 
ent. But even if it had a permanent result the verb refer- 
ring to it would be aorist , not perfect, unless the present result 
rather than merely the past action were specially in view. 
Thus even if, after the question, “‘What have you done?” 
the official said merely, “I have released the prisoner,” 
and even if as a matter of fact the releasing had a permanent 
result, still the aorist tense ἔλυσα might very well be used; 
for the point under consideration might be the history of 
the official’s dealings with the prisoner and not the official’s 
present relation to him. The distinction is often a fine one. 
But the perfect should not be used in the exercises unless 
we can see some clear reason for deserting the aorist. 


(2) The perfect passive is often much easier to translate 


~ into English than the perfect active. Thus γέγραπται means 


it ts written (in the Scriptures). Here the English 7¢ is 
written is not a present tense at all, but reproduces the 
Greek perfect very well; the meaning is 2¢ stands written. 
Both English and Greek here refer to a present state resultant 
upon an act of writing which took place long ago. 


(3) The perfect passive participle can often be translated 
neatly by the simple English passive participle. Thus λόγος 
γεγραμμένος means a written word, ἠγαπημένος means 
beloved, etc. But the Greek perfect active participle is very 


i} 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 189 


hard to translate. The student should carefully avoid 
thinking that having loosed is specially connected with the 
perfect. On the contrary, in the overwhelming majority 
of cases, having loosed is the literal translation of the aorist, 
not of the perfect—the participle having merely indicating 
that the action has taken place prior to the action of the 
main verb in the sentence. In general, it should be ob- 
served that the Greek aorist is vastly commoner than the 
perfect. 

(4) ἐλήλυθα, the perfect of ἔρχομαι, means I am come, 
and γέγονα means I am become. It so happens that because 
of the peculiar nature of the verbs to come and to become in 
English we have a neat way of translating the Greek perfect 
of ἔρχομαι and γίνομαι. 

Of course the student should not think that I am come 
has anything to do with the passive voice. It is not at all 
like I am loosed. 


453. The conjugation of \vw has now been completed. 
The student should review it thoroughly as a whole, using 
the paradigm given in §589. The verb should be learned in 
columns, strictly in the order given. Thus ‘‘present-active”’ 
should form one idea in the student’s mind, and under it 
should be subsumed the various moods. It should be 
noticed particularly how the various parts of the verb are 
connected with the several principal parts. 


454. Exercises 


I. 1. οὐδείς ἐστιν δίκαιος κατὰ τὸν νόμον εἰ μὴ ὁ ποιήσας 

’ \ ’ ᾽ “ / “ I 2 > λί 
πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τοῦ νόμου. 2. εὐηγγελί- 
σατο πάντα τὸν λαὸν λέγων ὅτι ἤγγικεν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρα- 
νῶν. 3.6 ἑωράκαμεν καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν λέγομεν καὶ ὑμῖν, ἵνα 
καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύσητε εἰς τὸν Χριστόν. 4. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ γινώ- 
σκομεν ὅτι ἔγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν. 


7 


190 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


5. ὁ ἀγαπῶν τὸν γεννήσαντα ἀγαπᾷ τὸν γεγεννημένον ἐξ 
αὐτοῦ. 6. πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ οὐχ ἁμαρτάνει, 
ANN’ e \ 9 a θ nN a) 3 t 7 la) t 1 
ἀλλ᾽ ὁ γεννηθεὶς Ex TOU θεοῦ τηρεῖ αὐτόν. {. τοῦτο γέγονεν, 
ὅτι οὕτως γέγραπται διὰ τοῦ προφήτου. ὃ. τὸ γεγεννημένον 
ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς caps ἐστιν, καὶ τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ πνεύ- 
ματος πνεῦμά ἐστιν. 9. αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς 
ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον καὶ ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τὸ σκότος. 
10. ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι τῷ τεθεραπευμένῳ Οὐκ ἔξεστιν 
ποιῆσαι τοῦτο. 11. ἐγὼ ἐλήλυθα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρός 

\ 3 t , 3 “τ: Cm Ye te , ͵ 
μου καὶ οὐ δέχεσθέ με. 12. ἀλλ᾽ εἶπον ὑμῖν ὅτι καὶ ἑωράκατέ 
με καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε. 13. ἐὰν μὴ φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ υἱοῦ 


τοῦ ἀνθρώπου καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα, οὐκ ἔχετε ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυ- 


τοῖς. 14. τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἔγὼ λελάληκα ὑμῖν πνεῦμά ἐστιν καὶ 

, 3 9 , 9 tay , , \ , 
ζωὴ ἐστιν. 15. ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ Ilérpos Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα 
ἀπελευσόμεθα: ῥήματα ζωῆς ἔχεις, καὶ ἡμεῖς πεπιστεύκαμεν 
καὶ ἔγώκαμεν ὅτι σὺ εἶ ὁ ἅγιος τοῦ θεοῦ. 10. ταῦτα αὐτοῦ 
λαλοῦντος πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν. 17. γέγραπται ὅτι 
δύο ἀνθρώπων ἡ μαρτυρία ἀληθῆς ἐστιν. 18. ταῦτα εἶπεν 
πρὸς τοὺς πεπιστευκότας εἰς αὐτὸν ᾿Ιουδαίους. 19. νῦν δὲ 

“ ’ 3 ia) 39 «4 \ 9 Υ « on , 
ζητεῖτέ με ἀποκτεῖναι, ἄνθρωπον Os τὴν ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν λελά- 
Anka,” ἣν ἤκουσα παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ. 20. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχό- 
μενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου. 


II. 1. Where is the priest? He is already come. 
2. All the baptized disciples are in the small city. 3. The 
priests having been baptized came together into the same 
house. 4. Where is the multitude? It has already come 
near. 5. What is in thy heart? I have believed on the 
Lord. 6. Art thou faithful? Ihave kept the faith. 7. Itis 


1 γίνομαι here means to take place, to come to pass, to happen. 

2 The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in person as well as 
in gender and number. In this sentence, the antecedent of 6s is 
ἄνθρωπον, which is first person because it is in apposition with the 
personal pronoun of the first person, Me. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK | 19] 


written through the prophet that the Messiah is coming in 
these days, and we know that His kingdom is come near. 
8. Children beloved by your Father, enter ye into the joy 
kept in heaven for those who have believed on Christ. 
9. Who is this man? He is a child begotten by God. 
10. Having been crucified by the soldiers the Lord died, 
but now He isrisen. 11. Brethren beloved by all the disci- 
ples, why do ye not pity the little ones? 12. Those who are 
come out of the darkness into the light know that God will 
do all the things written in the Law and the prophets. 
13. All the things written or spoken through this prophet 
are true. 14. This is come to pass in order that that which 
was said by the Lord through the prophet might be fulfilled. 
15. If thou art already loosed, give thanks to Him who 
loosed you. 16. Where is the prophet whom the soldiers 
persecuted? He is become king of many cities. 


102 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXX 


Comparison of Adjectives. 


Declension of μείζων. Geni- 


tive of Comparison and Use of #7. Adverbs. Genitive 
with Adverbs of Place. Genitive of Time. Genitive of 
the Articular Infinitive Expressing Purpose. Dative of 
Respect. Accusative of Specification. Dative of Time. 
Possessive Adjectives. μή Used as a Conjunction. ἵνα 
with the Subjunctive in Various Uses. μή with the 
Indicative in Questions Expecting a Negative Answer. 


455. Vocabulary 


ἐμός, ἡ, Ov, poss. adj., be- 
longing to me, my. 

ἔμπροσθεν, adv., an front, an 
the presence of (with gen.). 

ἐνώπιον, adv., before, in the 
sight of, in the presence of 
(with gen.). 

ἔξω, adv., outside, outside of 
(with gen.). 

ἐχθρός, 6, an enemy. 

ἤ, conj., than (the meaning 
or has already been given). 

ἡμέτερος, α, OV, POSS. adj., 
belonging to us, our. 

ἴδιος, a, ov, belonging to 
one’s self, one’s own. 

ἱκανός, ἡ, Ov,  sufficrent, 
worthy. considerable. 


ἰσχυρότερος, a, ov, stronger, 
comparative of ἰσχυρός, 
a, ov, strong. 

καλῶς, adv., well. 

κρείσσων, ov, better, com- 
parative of ἀγαθός. 

μᾶλλον, adv., more, rather. 

μείζων, ov, greater, compara- 
tive of μέγας. 

un, conj., lest, an order that 
not (the adverbial use of 
un = not has already been 
given). 

μήποτε, lest perchance. 

ὅπως, in order that (takes the 
subjunctive. Used very 
much as ἵνα is used). 

πάλιν, adv., again. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 198 


πλείων, ov, more, compara- βασι(ν), is often used in 
tive of πολύς. the singular sense). 
σός, ἢ, Ov, poss. adj., belong- 
σάββατον, τό, sabbath (the ing to thee, thy. 
plural τὰ σάββατα, with ὑμέτερος, a, ov, poss. adj., 
irregular dative τοῖς σάβ- belonging to you, your. 


Comparison of Adjectives 


456. The comparative degree of adjectives ends some- 
times in -τερος, a, ov, (declined like a regular adjective of the 
second and first declension) and sometimes in -ἰων, -ἰων, 
-ἰον (declined according to the third declension in all three 
genders). 


457. The superlative degree ends in -raros, ἢ, ov, or 
-ιστος, ἡ, ov, But in the New Testament the superlative 
is rather rare. 


458. A number of adjectives have irregular comparative 
and superlative forms. These can be learned from the lexi- 
con as they occur. 

Example: μικρός, little; ἔλάσσων, less; ἐλάχιστος, least. 


459. The declension of μείζων, ov, greater, the compara- 
tive of μέγας, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 

M.F. N. M.F. N. 
μείζων μεῖζον Ν. μείζονες μείζονα 
μείζονος μείζονος G. μειζόνων μειζόνων 
μείζονι μείζονι 1). μείζοσι(ν) μείζοσι(ν) 
μείζονα μεῖζον Α. μείζονας μείζονα 


NE) Ὁ’ 


460. σώφρων, wise, ἄφρων, foolish, ἔλάσσων, less, πλείων, 
more, κρείσσων, better, etc., are similarly declined. 


194 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


461. The shortened form, μείζω, can stand for μείζονα 
in the accusative singular masculine and feminine and neuter 
plural nominative and accusative, and the shortened form, 
μείζους, in the nominative and accusative plural masculine 
and feminine. 


462. Genitive of Comparison and Use of ἤ, than 

Where English uses than after a comparative word, Greek 
uses either (1) the genitive of comparison or (2) ἤ followed 
by the same case as that which stands in the other member 
of the comparison. 

Examples: (1) μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει, greater things 
than these will he do. (2) ἠγάπησαν ot ἄνθρωποι μᾶλλον 
TO σκότος ἢ TO φῶς, men loved darkness more than light. Here 
φῶς is accusative. The meaning is men loved darkness more 
than they loved light. 

Adverbs 

463. Many adverbs are formed from adjectives by sub- 
stituting s for v at the end of the genitive plural masculine 
and neuter. 

Example: καλός, good; genitive plural, καλῶν ; adverb, 
καλῶς, well. 


464. The comparative degree of adverbs is like the 
accusative singular neuter of the comparative degree of the 
corresponding adjective; and the superlative degree of the 
adverb is like the accusative plural neuter of the superlative 
degree of the corresponding adjective. 


405. Many adverbs, however, are of diverse forms which 
must be learned by observation. 


466. The Genitive with Adverbs of Place 

Adverbs of place take the genitive. 

Example: ἔξω, outside; ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, outside of the 
city; ἐγγὺς THs πόλεως, near the city. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 195 


467. Genitive of Time Within Which 


The genitive is occasionally used to express time within 
which. 

Example: παρέλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ 
νυκτός, he took the young child and His mother by night. 


468. Genitive of the Articular Infinitive 
Expressing Purpose 


The genitive of the articular infinitive, without any prepo- 
sition, is sometimes used to express purpose. 

Example: ἦλθεν πρὸς τὸν προφήτην τοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, he came to the prophet in order to be baptized by 
him. It will be remembered that for the most part the artic- 
ular infinitive is used in the same constructions as those in 
which an ordinary noun with the article can be used. This 
use of the genitive to express purpose, however, would not 
be possible for an ordinary noun. 


469. The Dative of Respect 


The dative is used to indicate the respect in which any- 
thing exists or is true. 

Example: γινωσκόμενος τῷ προσώπῳ, being known by face 
(i. 6. being known so far as the face 18 concerned); καθαρὸς 
TH καρδίᾳ, pure in heart (1. 6. pure so far as the heart 18 
concerned); ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι ᾿Ιάκωβος, a man by name James 
(i.e. a man who 15 James so far as the name ts concerned). 


470. Accusative of Specification 


The accusative of specification is very much the same in 
meaning as the dative of respect, but is less frequently used. 

Example: τὸν ἀριθμὸν ws πεντακισχίλιοι, about five 
thousand in number. 


eee = 


196 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


The Dative of Time 


471. The dative is sometimes used to express tame when. 
Example: ἐθεράπευσε τῷ σαββάτῳ, he healed on the sab- 
bath. 


472. Usually, however, time when is expressed by 
prepositional phrases. So on the sabbath could be ἐν τῷ 
σαββάτῳ. 

Possessive Adjectives 

473. The possessive adjectives ἐμός, my, σός, thy, 
ἡμέτερος, OUT, ὑμέτερος, your, are sometimes used instead 
of the genitive case of the personal pronouns when empha- 
sis is desired. These possessive adjectives are declined like 
regular adjectives of the second and first declension. They 
can stand in the attributive position with the article. 

Examples: ὁ ἐμὸς λόγος, the belonging-to-me word (i.e., 
my word); ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμή, my joy; τὸ θέλημα τὸ ἐμόν, my will; 
τὰ ἐμὰ πάντα σά ἐστιν, all the belonging-to-me things are thine 
(i.e., all my things are thine); ὁ ἡμέτερος λόγος, our word; 
ὁ ὑμέτερος λόγος, your word. 

474. This usage is comparatively infrequent. The com- 
mon way of saying my word is not ὁ ἐμὸς λόγος or ὁ λόγος ὁ 
ἐμός, but ὁ λόγος μου (the word of me). 


un Used as a Conjunction 


475. Words denoting fear are followed by μή, lest, 
with the subjunctive. μή is here not an adverb, as is the 
case when it means not, but a conjunction. 

Example: φοβοῦμαι μὴ ἔλθῃ, 1 fear lest he come. 


476. Negative clauses of purpose may also be introduced 
by the simple μή instead of by ἵνα μή. 

Example: τοῦτο ποιεῖτε μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς κρίσιν, do this 
lest you come into judgment. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 197 


477. ἵνα with the Subjunctive in Various Uses 


In addition to the use by which it expresses purpose, 
iva with the subjunctive is very frequently used after 
words of exhorting, wishing, striving, and in various ways 
that are not easily classified. 

Examples: (1) εἰπὲ τῷ λίθῳ τούτῳ ἵνα γένηται ἄρτος, 
say to this stone that rt become bread. (2) αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ 
ἐντολὴ ἡ ἐμὴ ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους, this 18 my command- 
ment, that you should love one another. 


Questions Expecting a Negative Answer 


478. Questions expecting a negative answer are ex- 
pressed by μή with the indicative. 


479. This rule constitutes an important exception to the 
general rule for the use of οὐ and μή (see 8256). Questions 
expecting a positive answer have ov with the indicative. 

Example: μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν; are we stronger 
than he? The answer expected is ‘‘No, of course not.” 
Compare οὐκ ἰσχυρότεροί, ἐσμεν αὐτοῦ; are we not stronger 
than he? Here the answer expected is “Yes, certainly 
we are.” 


480. Exercises 


I. 1. παρακαλῶ δὲ ὑμᾶς ἵνα τὸ αὐτὸ λέγητε πάντες. 2. 
ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 
ποιεῖτε: οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται. 3. κέλευσον 
οὖν τηρηθῆναι τὸ σῶμα ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν, μήποτε ἐλθόντες 
οἱ μαθηταὶ λάβωσιν αὐτὸ καὶ εἴπωσιν τῷ λαῷ ὅτι ἠγέρθη ἐκ 
τῶν νεκρῶν. 4. οὐκ ἔστι δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν. 
5. μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει, ἵνα τις ἀποθάνῃ ὑπὲρ 
τῶν ἄλλων. 6. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας 
τῶν πρώτων. 7. εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν 
ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε. ὃ. ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν 


108 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


᾿Αγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑμῶν καὶ προσεύχεσθε ὑπὲρ τῶν διω- 
κόντων ὑμᾶς, ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν τοῦ ἐν οὐρα- 
νοῖς. 9. εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ὅτι ἔξεστι τοῖς σάββασι καλῶς 
ποιεῖν. 10. ἔμεινεν δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐκεῖ διὰ τὸ εἶναι τὸν τόπον 
ἐγγὺς τῆς πόλεως. 1]. τότε συναχθήσονται ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ 
πάντα τὰ ἔθνη. 12. μὴ ποίει τοῦτο οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι 
ἵνα εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν μου εἰσέλθῃς. 13. ἐλθόντες οἱ στρατιῶται 
νυκτὸς ἔλαβον τὸν ἄνδρα καὶ ἀγαγόντες αὐτὸν ἔξω ἀπέκτειναν. 
14. τῇ μὲν σαρκὶ οὔκ ἐστε μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, τῇ δὲ καρδίᾳ ἐστὲ ἐγγύς. 
15. μὴ περιπατοῦμεν κατὰ σάρκα ; οὐκ ἔχομεν τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ 
θεοῦ; 16. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως τοῦ εἶναι 
ἐγγὺς τοῦ τόπου ὅπου ἦν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς. 17. εἰς τὰ ἴδια ἦλθεν καὶ 
οἱ ἴδιοι αὐτὸν οὐ παρέλαβον. 18. ἔγὼ ἐλήλυθα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 
τοῦ πατρός μου, καὶ οὐ λαμβάνετέ με: ἐὰν ἄλλος ἔλθῃ ἐν τῷ 
ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ, ἐκεῖνον λήμψεσθε. 19. μὴ ἐποίησα τὸ ἴδιον 
θέλημα; οὐ μᾶλλον ἐποίησα τὸ σόν; 20. εἰ ἐμὲ ἐδίωξαν, καὶ 
ὑμᾶς διώξουσιν: εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν, καὶ τὸν ὑμέτερον 
τηρήσουσιν. 


II. 1. Those who have done one work well will do also 
greater things. 2. He who rules his own house well does 
a greater thing than he who takes many cities. 3. Why do 
ye do these things? Are ye kings and priests? Are ye not 
servants? 4. Those who were in the darkness besought us 
that we should pity them and not cast them out. 5. Those 
who belong to me are in the city and those who belong to 
thee are outside of it, but we shall all be in the presence of 
God. 6. Art thou stronger than the One who made the 
earth and the sea and all the things that areinthem? 7. Do 
not fear him who kills the body, but fear rather Him who 
has made all things. 8. When ye have seen your own breth- 
ren ye shall go also to the Gentiles. 9. We have more servants 
than you, but ours are not sufficient to evangelize! all the 


1 What construction has been used after ἱκανός to express the idea 
sufficient (or worthy) that they should...... ? 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 199 


Gentiles. 10. Those who worship the Lord by day and by 
night shall be stronger than those who persecute them. 
11. More are those who are with us than those who are 
with them. 12. Being with you in heart, not in counte- 
nance, we exhorted you that ye should do well all the things 
which we had commanded you. 13. The priests went out 
_ of the city, lest perchance the scribes might see them doing 
that which it is not lawful to do. 14. If anyone stronger 
than we comes against us we shall not remain in our city. 
15. Jesus having healed a certain man on the sabbath, the 
scribes were afraid lest the people should make Him a 
king. 16. It is better to die in behalf of the brethren than 
to do what the apostles exhorted us that we should not do. 


200 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXXII 


Conjugation of δίδωμι. Second Aorist of γινώσκω. The 
Article before μέν and δέ. The Aorist Participle Denot- 
ing the Same Act as the Leading Verb. First Aorist End- 
ings on Second Aorist Stems. . 


481. Vocabulary 


αἰώνιος, ov, adj. of two ter- 
minations, the feminine 
being like the masculine 
throughout, eternal. 

ἀντί, prep. with gen., in- 
stead of. 

ἀποδίδωμι, IL give back, I 
give what 18 owed or prom- 
used, I render, I pay. 

γυνή, γυναικός, ἡ, (with an 
irregular accent in some 
forms, see §566), a wo- 
man. 

δίδωμι, I give. 

ἔγνων, 2nd. aor. (of μι form) 
of γινώσκω, 1 know. 

ἐξουσία, ἡ, authority. 

ἔσχον, 2nd. aor. of ἔχω, I 
have. 

Caw (has 7 instead of a in 
the present system. E. g. 
ns, ζῇ instead of Fas, ζᾷ), 
1 live. 

ἰδού, demonstrative parti- 
cle, behold! lo! 


μόνος, ἡ, ov, adj., alone, only. 

μυστήριον, τό, a mystery, a 
secret. 

ὁράω, I see (The present sys- 
tem of this verb is very 
much less common than 
the present system of 
βλέπω. The common verb 
to see in the New Testament 
is βλέπω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον, 
ἑώρακα, (ὦμμαι), ὦφθην. 
Yet since βλέπω also has 
a future βλέψω and a first 
aorist ἔβλεψα, it will per- 
haps be more convenient 
to give ὄψομαι etc. as the 
principal parts of ὁράω 
rather than of βλέπω). 

παραδίδωμι, 1 deliver over. 

πειράζω, I tempt. 

ποῖος, a, ov, interrogative 
pron., what sort of? 

Σίμων, Σίμωνος, ὁ, Simon. 


χείρ, χειρός, ἡ, a hand. 


- ee ee 
. Ρ ὃ s 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 201 


482. The verbs which have been studied so far, with the 
exception of the irregular verb εἰμί, all belong to the same 
conjugation. They have various ways of forming their 
principal parts, but the endings that are appended to the 
principal parts all belong to the same type. There is in 
Greek only one other conjugation. It is called the μι conju- 
gation (to distinguish it from the w conjugation which has 
been studied thus far), because its first person singular 
present active indicative ends in μι. 


483. Verbsin μι differ from verbs in w only in the present 
and second aorist systems. 


484. The principal parts of the μι verb, δίδωμι, I give, 
are as follows: 


δίδωμι, δώσω, ἔδωκα, δέδωκα, δέδομαι, ἐδόθην. 


485. The stem of δίδωμι is δο--. If it were an w verb, 
its first form would be δόω. 


486. The future δώσω is entirely regular, the final o 
of the stem being lengthened before the o of the future 
exactly as in the case (for example) of δηλόω. From 
δώσω all of the future active and middle is formed, in ex- 
actly the same way as the corresponding forms of λύω. 


487. The first aorist ἔδωκα is quite regularly formed 
except that x stands instead of σ. 


488. The perfect active δέδωκα is entirely regular. 
From δέδωκα all of the perfect active is quite regularly 
formed. 


489. The perfect middle δέδομαι is quite regular ex- 
cept that the final vowel of the stem is not lengthened before 


202 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


’ the personal endings (see 8448). From δέδομαι all of the 


perfect middle and passive is quite regularly formed. 


490. The aorist passive ἐδόθην is quite regular, ex- 
cept that the final vowel of the stem is not lengthened be- 
fore the tense suffix -fe. From ἐδόθην all of the aorist 
passive and future passive is quite regularly formed. 


The Present System of δίδωμι 


491. The sign of the present system of δίδωμι is the 
reduplication (of a different form from that in the perfect), 
which is prefixed to the stem. 


492. The present active indicative of δίδωμι is as fol- 
lows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. δίδωμι, 1 give. 1. δίδομεν, we give. 
2. δίδως, thou givest. 2. δίδοτε, ye give. 
3. δίδωσι(ν), he gives. 3. διδόασι(ν), they give. 


493. The final vowel of the stem (the stem with the 
reduplication being διδο-) is lengthened in the singular 
number, but not in the plural. 


494. The personal endings are added directly to the 
stem, without any variable vowel. 


495. The personal endings are -μι, -s, ττι, -μεν, -TE, -ασι. 


496. ‘The present active subjunctive is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. διδῶ 1. διδῶμεν 
2. διδῷς 2. διδῶτε 


3. διδῷ 3. διδῶσι(ν) 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 203 


497. There has been contraction here, as is shown by the 
accent. The personal endings are the same as in w verbs. 


498. The present active imperative is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
2. δίδου, give (thou). 2. δίδοτε, give (ye). 
3. διδότω, let him give. 3. διδότωσαν, let them give. 


499. The present active infinitive is διδόναι, to give. 
The irregular accent should be noticed. 


500. The present active participle is διδούς, διδοῦσα, διδόν, 
gwing. 


501. The genitive singular is διδόντος, διδούσης, διδόν- 
tos. The masculine and neuter are declined regu- 
larly according to the third declension and the feminine 
regularly according to the first declension. The dative 
plural masculine and neuter is διδοῦσι(ν). 


502. The accent is irregular in the nominative, not being 
recessive. Thereafter it follows the general noun rule, 
except in the genitive plural feminine, διδουσῶν, where the 
special rule for nouns of the first declension is followed 
(see §§14, 51). 


503. The imperfect active indicative is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἐδίδουν, I was giving. 1. ἐδίδομεν, we were giving. 
2. ἐδίδους, thou wast giwing. 2. ἐδίδοτε, ye were giving. 
3. ἐδίδου, he was giving. 3. ἐδίδοσαν, they were giving. 


504. The characteristic reduplication, δι-, of the pres- 
ent of course appears here, since the imperfect is always a 
part of the present system. The augment is regular. The 
final vowel of the stem is lengthened in the singular, as in 


204 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


the present. But in the imperfect it is lengthened to ov 
instead of tow. The same secondary endings appear as in 
the w conjugation, except that the alternative ending -cav 
appears instead of -v in the third person plural. (See §127). 


505. The present and imperfect middle and passive of 
δίδωμι may be found in §596. Only a few of these 
forms occur in the New Testament. They can easily be 
recognized as they occur. 


Aorist Active of δίδωμι 


506. The aorist active of δίδωμι is peculiar in that it 
is first aorist in the indicative and second aorist in the 
other moods. 


507. The aorist active indicative is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. ἔδωκα, I gave. 1. ἐδώκαμεν, we gave. 
2. ἔδωκας, thou gavest. 2. ἐδώκατε, ye gave. 
3. ἔδωκε(ν), he gave. 3. ἔδωκαν, they gave. 


508. It will be observed that the conjugation is exactly 
like that of ἔλυσα, the first aorist active of Avw. But the 
tense suffix is x instead of o. See §$§171-177. 


509. The aorist active subjunctive is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
1. 60 1. δῶμεν 
2. δῷς 2. δῶτε 
3. δῷ 3. δῶσι(ν) 


510. The conjugation is exactly like the present active 
subjunctive. But the second aorist has the mere verb 
stem, whereas the present prefixes the reduplication 6:-. 


| 
| Ἷ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 205 


511. The aorist active imperative is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
2. δός, give (thou). 2. dore, give (ye). 
3. δότω, let him give. 3. δότωσαν, let them give. 


512. These forms are like the present (without the re- 
duplication), except for δός in the second person singular. 


513. The aorist active infinitive is δοῦναι, to give. 


514. The aorist active participle is δούς, δοῦσα, δόν, 
having given. 
It is declined like the present participle διδούς. 


515. The aorist middle of δίδωμι occurs only a very few 
times in the New Testament. The forms can easily be 
understood with the aid of a lexicon. 


The Second Aorist of γινώσκω 


516. γινώσκω, I know, isanw verb. But it has a sec- 
ond aorist active of the μὲ form. The stem is yvo- which 
is nearly everywhere lengthened to γνω-. 

517. Learn the conjugation in §601. 


The Article before μέν and δέ. 


518. Before μέν or δέ the article is often used as a 
pronoun meaning he, she, τί, they. 

Examples: (1) τοῦτο ἠρώτησαν αὐτόν. ὁ δὲ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς, 
this they asked him. And he answered them. (2) ἦλθον 
πρὸς αὐτοὺς αἰτῶν τι παρ᾽ αὐτῶν: οἱ δὲ ἐποίησαν οὐδέν, I came 
to them asking something from them. But they did nothing. 


519. It should be observed very carefully that this usage 
is quite different from all the uses of the article which have 
been studied heretofore. For example, in the phrase oi 
ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, those in the house, it would be a great mistake 


206 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


to think that the article is used as a pronoun meaning those. 
On the contrary, the English idiom those in the house (in 
which those is not really a demonstrative pronoun at all) 
is expressed in Greek by saying the 7n-the-house people. In 
this Greek phrase, of is just as much an ordinary article 
as in the phrase oi ἀγαθοί, the good people, ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ being © 
treated as an adjective like ἀγαθός. Or, to take another 
example, it would be a great mistake to suppose that in 
the phrase ὁ λύων, he who looses, the article is used as a 
pronoun meaning he. On the contrary the article is here 
just as much an article as in the phrase ὁ ἀγαθός, the good 
man. But before δέ the article can really be used as a pro- 
noun. In ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, but he sazd, there is no adjective or 
adjective expression for 6 to go with. 


520. The Aorist Participle Denoting the Same 
Act as the Leading Verb 


The aorist participle is sometimes used to denote the 
same act as the leading verb. 

Examples: (1) ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Jesus said by 
way of answer, or Jesus answered and said. In §§233, 254 
it was said that the present participle denotes action con- 
temporary with the action of the leading verb and the aorist 
participle denotes action prior to the action of the leading 
verb. That rule needed to be impressed firmly upon the 
mind before the exceptions to it could be considered. 
But as a matter of fact the rule does not completely 
represent the facts. Properly speaking the tenses in the 
participle do not have to do with time, and their funda- 
mental, non-temporal character appears in the usage now 
under discussion. In ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, the “answering” 
and the “‘saying”’ represent exactly the same act, and the 
participle simply defines more closely the action denoted 
by εἶπεν. The phrase does not, however, mean while he 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 207 


was answering he said. That would rather be ἀποκρινόμενος 
εἶπεν. It is recommended that the free translation, he 
answered and said, be adopted invariably for the phrase 
ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, which is exceedingly common in the 
Gospels. And it is exceedingly important that this idiom 
should not be allowed to obscure the fact that in the 
majority of cases the aorist participle denotes action prior 
to the time of the leading verb. The student should care- 
fully avoid any confusion between the present and the 
aorist participle. 

(2) ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, and he answered and said 


(with a slight emphasis on he). Of course ἀποκριθείς. 


might here be taken as the substantive participle with 6, 
and the sentence might mean and the having-answered one 
said, or and the one who had answered said. But in a very 
great many places where these words occur in the gospels, 
the article is to be taken as a pronoun and the ἀποκριθείς 
is joined only loosely to it, in the manner indicated in the 
translation above. 


521. First Aorist Endings on Second Aorist Stems 


Very frequently, in the New Testament, first aorist end- 
ings instead of second aorist endings are used on second aor- 
ist stems. 

Examples: εἶπαν instead of εἶπον (third person plural), 
εἰπόν instead of εἰπέ (imperative). This usage is much 
more common in some parts of the aorist than in others. 
εἶπον in the indicative has almost exclusively first aorist 
forms. See §186, footnote. 


522. Exercises 


a 


I. 1. παρέδωκα yap ὑμῖν ἐν πρώτοις ὃ καὶ παρέλαβον, 

ὅτι Χριστὸς ἀπέθανεν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν κατὰ τὰς Ypa- 
’ Ἁ yA \ > An 2 a“ ’ / 9 

gas. 2. μὴ ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι ἀπέλυσεν αὐτὸν ὁ 


208 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


κύριος αὐτοῦ. 3. Kal ἀποκριθεὶς πᾶς ὁ λαὸς εἶπεν Τὸ αἷμα 
3 ΜᾺ) 9. 07.0.6 a Nips as \ t ε “ , \ t an 
αὐτοῦ ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ἡμῶν. 4. θέλω δὲ τούτῳ τῷ 
> , “ « \ , 3 ld \ 3 oO \ « 
ἐσχάτῳ δοῦναι ws καὶ σοί. 5. ἐσθιόντων δὲ αὐτῶν λαβὼν ὁ 
᾿Ιησοῦς ἄρτον καὶ εὐλογήσας ἔκλασεν; καὶ δοὺς τοῖς μαθη- 
ταῖς εἶπεν Λάβετε φάγετε, τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου. καὶ 
λαβὼν ποτήριον καὶ εὐχαριστήσας ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων 
Πίετε ἐξ αὐτοῦ πάντες. 0. καὶ εἶπαν λέγοντες πρὸς αὐτόν 
Εἰπὸν ἡμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, ἢ τίς ἐστιν ὁ δούς σοι 
A ᾽ , 9 3 \ > \ 93 >] 
τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς “Epw- 
τήσω Kaya? λόγον, καὶ εἴπατέ μοι. 7. ὁ γὰρ ἄρτος τοῦ 
θεοῦ ἐστιν ὁ καταβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ζωὴν διδοὺς τῷ 
᾿ 9 oO « Lal A , , Ss 5 3 
κόσμῳ. ὃ. λέγει αὐτοῖς Ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι ; ἀπο- 
κριθεὶς δὲ Σίμων Πέτρος εἶπεν Σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ 
a n n 5] “Ὁ a 
τοῦ ζῶντος. 9. λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς Πορεύου: ὁ vids σου ζῆ. 
ἐπίστευσεν ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῷ λόγῳ ὃν εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ 
ἐπορεύετο. 10. ὁρᾶτε μὴ τις κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ. 11. 
> e ey 9 Ἁ Ι͂ ε τὸν “ 9 9 Ἁ 
ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα, ἰδοὺ παραδίδοται ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εἰς τὰς 
χεῖρας τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν. ἐγείρεσθε, Aywuev*- ἰδοὺ ὁ παραδιδούς 
με ἤγγικεν. 12. καὶ ἰδοὺ εἷς προσελθὼν αὐτῷ εἶπεν Διδά- 
¢ 9 A , ee la) A x7 A « A 3 
σκαλε, τί ἀγαθὸν ποιήσω ἵνα σχῶ ζωὴν αἰώνιον ; ὁ δὲ εἶπεν 
αὐτῷ Tipe ἐρωτᾷς περὶ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ; εἷς ἐστιν ὁ ἀγαθός" εἰ 
δὲ θέλεις εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν τήρει τὰς ἐντολάς. 13. καὶ 
Ἁ ς ij “ 9 “ ’ eA Ss nN n 9 A 
προσελθὼν ὃ πειράζων εἶπεν αὐτῷ Εἰ vids εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ, εἰπὲ 
ἵνα οἱ λίθοι οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν Γέγρα- 
3 2 9 » ’ , ς of \ 
πται Οὐκ ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται 6 ἄνθρωπος. 14. καὶ προσ- 
ἐλθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ Διὰ τί ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖς 
᾽ “ @ δὲ > θ 3 > ee 5 Ma “A δέδ “ \ 
αὐτοῖς. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν ὅτι ‘Tyuty δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ 
1 Aorist active indicative of κλάω, J break. 
2 ποτήριον, TO, a cup. 
3 κἀγὼ stands for Kal ἔγώ. 
4 ἄγω is sometimes used in the intransitive sense, 7 go. 
5 ὅτι frequently introduces direct (instead of indirect) discourse. 
When it introduces direct discourse, it must be left untranslated. In 
such cases, it takes the place of our quotation marks. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 209 


μυστήρια τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ ov δέδοται. 
15. ἔλεγον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταί Απόλυσον αὐτούς. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς Δότε αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς φαγεῖν. 


II. 1. The woman besought the apostle that he might 
give her something. But he! answered her nothing. 2. 
Those who had killed the women said that they had known 
the king. But he answered and said that he was not will- 
ing to give them what they asked. 3. If we believe on 
Him who loved us and gave Himself in behalf of us, we shall 
have eternal life instead of death. 4. While the apostle 
was giving to the children the things which they had asked, 
the women were giving gifts to us. 5. The Lord delivered 
over the gospel to the apostles, and they delivered it over 
to the Gentiles. 6. What shall we give back to Him who gave 
Himself in behalf of us. 7. Behold He gives us eternal 
life. Let us therefore do His will. 8. What shall anyone 
give instead of his life? 9. Whatever we give to Him will 
not be enough. 10. Whatever thou wishest that men 
should give to thee, give thou also to them. 11. Let them 
give thanks to those who delivered over to them the gospel. 
12. They asked the Lord what they should give to Him. 
And He answered and said to them that to do the will of 
God is greater than all the gifts. 13. Those women are 
giving back to the children the things which they have 
taken from them, lest the king cast them out of the city. 
14. When the priests had said these things to those who 
were in the city, the apostle departed. 15. What is this? 
Will he give us his flesh? 16. Whatever He asks I will 
give. But He gave to me eternal life. 

1Tn all such cases, the slight emphasis on the he in English is to be 
expressed in Greek by the pronominal use of the article before δέ. 


210 


LESSON XXXII 


Conjugation of τίθημι, ἀφίημι, δείκνυμι, and ἀπόλλυμι 
Accusative and Infinitive in Result Clauses 
The Subjunctive after éws. 


523° 


ἀνοίγω (for principal parts 
of this verb and the other 
verbs, see the general vo- 
cabulary), I open. 

ἀπόλλυμι, Or ἀπολλύω, I de- 
stroy; middle, I perish. 

ἀρχή, ἡ, a beginning. 

ἀφίημι, I let go, I permit, I 
leave, I forgive (when it 
means forgive, ἀφίημι takes 
the acc. of the thing for- 
given and the dat. of the 
person to whom it is for- 
given). 

δείκνυμι and δεικνύω, I show. 

εὑρίσκω, I find. 

ἐπιτίθημι, I lay upon (with 
acc. of the thing laid and 
dat. of the person or thing 
upon which it is laid). 

éws, adv. with gen., up to, 
until; conj., while, until. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Vocabulary 


καθώς, adv., just as. 
καιρός, ὁ, atime, a fixed time, 
an appointed time. 
μνημεῖον, τό, a tomb. 
μόνον, adv., only. 
πῦρ, πυρός, τό, a fire. 
σημεῖον, τό, a Sign. 
στόμα, στόματος, τό, a mouth. 
τίθημι, I place, I put; τίθημι 
τὴν ψυχήν, I lay down my 
life. 
ὑπάγω, I go away. 
χαίρω, I rejoice (ἐχάρην, 2nd 
aor. pass., I rejoiced). 
χρόνος, ὃ, time (especially a 
period of time, as distin- 
guished from καιρός, a defi- | 
nite or appointed time). 4 
ὧδε, adv., hither, here. ἢ 
ὥσπερ, adv., just as. 3 


ὥστε, COn]., so that. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 211 


524. The principal parts of the μὲ verb τίθημι, 1 place, 
I put, are as follows: 


τίθημι, θήσω, ἔθηκα, τέθεικα, τέθειμαι, ἐτέθην. 


525. Thestem is θε-. The present system is redupli- 
cated after the same manner as δίδωμι. The future is 
regular. The first aorist is regular except that (like δίδωμι) 
it has x instead of σι The perfect active and the per- 
fect middle are regular except that θε- is lengthened 
to θει- instead of to @y-. The aorist passive is regular 
except that (1) the final vowel of the stem is not length- 
ened, and (2) the stem θε- is changed to τε- to avoid having 
two 6’s come in successive syllables. 


526. Learn the active voice of the present system of 
τίθημι in §598. 


527. The treatment of the stem and of the endings in 
the present system is very much the same as in the case cf 
δίδωμι. The declension of the participle τιθείς is like 
that of λυθείς, the aorist passive participle of λύω. 


528. Learn the active voice of the aorist system of 
τίθημι in §599. 


529. Like δίδωμι, τίθημι has a first aorist active in the 
indicative and a second aorist active in the other moods. 
The second aorist participle θείς is declined like the pres- 
ent participle τιθείς. 


530. The present middle and aorist middle forms of 
τίθημι can easily be recognized when they occur, if it be 
remembered that the second aorist has the mere verb stem 
θε-, whereas the present has the stem τιθε-. Thus if a 
form ἀνεθέμην be encountered, the student should see that 


212 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἀν- is plainly the preposition dva-, ε is the augment, Oe is 
the stem of τίθημι, and -μην is the secondary ending in the 
first person singular middle. Therefore, the form is second 
aorist middle indicative, first person singular. On the other 
hand, ἐτίθεντο belongs to the present system because it 
has the τι- which is the sign of the present system; it is 
imperfect, not: present, because it has the augment and a 
secondary ending. It is evidently imperfect middle or 
passive indicative, third person plural. 


The Conjugation of ἀφίημι 


531. ἀφίημι, I let go, I permit, I leave, I forgive, is a 
compound verb composed of the preposition ἀπό (ἀφ᾽ before 
the rough breathing) and the μὲ verb inw. The stem of 
ἵημι 15 ἑ-. 


532. The forms can usually be recognized if it be remem- 
bered that the i- before the stem ἑ- is the sign of the present 
system, and that the short forms with €- alone are second 
aorist. Thus ἀφείς is evidently second aorist participle 
(els coming from the stem €- as θείς from the stem 6e-). 
In the indicative there is a first aorist active in x instead of 
σ, aS is the case with δίδωμι and τίθημι. The irregular 
forms of ἀφίημι can be found in the lexicons and reference 
grammars. 


533. Conjugation of δείκνυμι and ἀπόλλυμι 


These two verbs have some μὲ forms in the present sys- 
tem. The μὲ forms can be recognized from the fact that 
they add the personal ending directly to the present stem. 
The present stem ends in v. Both δείκνυμι and ἀπόλλυμι 
are also sometimes conjugated like w verbs even in the 
present system. See the vocabulary. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 218 


Accusative and Infinitive after ὥστε 


534. ὥστε, so that, expressing result, is sometimes fol- 
lowed by the accusative and infinitive. 


Example: ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς" ὥστε τὸν ὄχλον θαυμάσαι....., 
he healed them; so that the crowd marvelled..... 


535. The accent of ὥστε apparently violates the general 
rules of accent. But originally the τε was an enclitic separate 
from the ὡς. So also ὥσπερ and οὔτε (for the latter see 
vocabulary in Lesson XX XIII). 


536. The Subjunctive with ἕως ἄν 


The conjunction ἕως, when it means until, takes the sub- 
junctive with ἄν, except when the verb which it introduces 
refers to an actual occurrence in past time. The ἄν is some- 
times omitted. When éws means while, it takes the indica- 
tive. The phrase ἕως οὗ in which ἕως is a preposition and 
ov the genitive singular neuter of the relative pronoun, has 
the same meaning as ἕως (conjunction) alone. 


Examples: (1) μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἔλθω, remain until I 
come. (2) ἔμεινεν ἕως οὗ ἦλθον, he remained until I came 
(actual occurrence in past time). 


537. Exercises 


I. 1. διὰ τοῦτό με ὁ πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ ὅτι ἐγὼ τίθημι THY 

, e , I 5 , 5) \ x 9 \ 3 23 τὴν “ 
ψυχήν μου, ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν. οὐδεὶς ἦρεν αὐτὴν ἀπ΄ ἐμοῦ, 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ. ἐξουσίαν ἔχω θεῖναι 

3 U \ 9 , 3 i “ 9 / / \ > 

αὐτήν, καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω πάλιν λαβεῖν αὐτήν: ταύτην τὴν ἐν- 

\ wv \ La) «“ > \ « 3 \ 
τολὴν ἔλαβον παρὰ TOD πατρός μου. 2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐντολὴ 
« > , «“ 3 “Ὁ 9 U \ Ψ ’ e “Ὁ , 
ἡ ἐμή, ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους καθὼς ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς. μείζονα 
ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει, ἵνα τις τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ θῇ ὑπὲρ 


214 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


τῶν φίλων; αὐτοῦ. 3. ἀλλὰ ἐλθὼν ἐπίθες THY χεῖρά σου 
ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν καὶ ζήσεται. 4. ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν "“Adere τὰ παι- 
δία καὶ μὴ κωλύετεξ αὐτὰ ἔλθεϊν πρός με’ τῶν γὰρ τοιούτωνϑ 
ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. καὶ ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐὖ- 
τοῖς ἐπορεύθη ἐκεῖθεν. 5. καὶ προσευξάμενοι ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς 
τὰς χεῖρας. 6. τότε ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, καὶ 
ἐλάμβανον πνεῦμα ἅγιον. 7. ἀκούσαντες δὲ ἐβαπτίσθησαν 
εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου ᾿Ιησοῦ: καὶ ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύ- 
λουῦ χεῖρας ἦλθε τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς. ὃ. ζωο- 
ποιεῖδ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ ὃν θέλει. 9. ὑμεῖς ὃ ἠκούσατε ἀπ᾽ 
ἀρχῆς, ἐν ὑμῖν μενέτω. ἐὰν ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ ὃ ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς ἠκού- 
σατε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρὶ μενεῖτε. 10. καὶ 
ἐγένετο ὡσεῖϑ νεκρός, ὥστε τοὺς πολλοὺς λέγειν ὅτι ἀπέθανεν. 
11. ἴσθι ἐκεὶ ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι μέλλει γὰρ ‘Hpwdns® ζητεῖν 
τὸ παιδίον τοῦ ἀπολέσαι αὐτό. 12. Κύριε, σῶσον, ἀπολλύμεθα. 
13. καὶ ἀνοίξας τὸ βιβλίον εὗρεν τὸν τόπον. 14. τὰ δὲ 
ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος ἐκ τῆς καρδίας ἐξέρχεται. 15. οὐ 
περὶ τούτων δὲ ἐρωτῶ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τῶν πιστευόντων 
διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτῶν εἰς ἐμέ, ἵνα πάντες ἕν ὦσιν, καθὼς σύ, 
πατήρ, ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν σοί, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν ἡμῖν ὦσιν, ἵνα ὁ 
κόσμος πιστεύῃ ὅτι σὺ με ἀπέστειλας. 10. εἶπεν οὖν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 

1 φίλος, ὃ, a friend. 

2 κωλύω, I hinder. 

β τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο, such. Often used with the article. 

4 ἐκεῖθεν, adv., thence. 

®IlavAos, ὁ, Paul. 


6 ζωοποιέω, I make alive, I quicken. 


7 In many such phrases the article is omitted in Greek where it is used 
in English. 


8 ὡσεί is a strengthened form of ws. 
9“Hpowdns, ov, 6, Herod. 


10 πατήρ has a vocative form, πάτερ. But even such nouns some- 
times use the nominative form in the vocative case. 


ΨΥ. ΟΝ ΠΝ : ΎΡ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 215 


Ἔστι χρόνον μικρὸν μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμι Kal ὑπάγω πρὸς TOV πέμ- 
ψαντά με. 17. ὅτε δὲ ἤγγισεν ὁ καιρὸς τῶν καρπῶν, ἀπέστειλεν 
τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ. 18. αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται, οὕτως δὲ ὡς διὰ 
πυρός. 


II. 1. This commandment he laid upon them, that they 
should lay down their lives in behalf of their brethren. 
2. If ye forgive those who persecute you, I also will forgive 
you. 3. When the men had found him who had done this 
thing they left him and went away. 4. Having put the 
body into the tomb he went away. 5. We saw those who 
were laying down their lives in behalf of the children. 6. 
The women saw where the body was placed. 7. We shall 
question him until he answers us. 8. We ought to give 
thanks to Him who has forgiven us our sins. 9. We did 
not know Him, but He knew us. 10. Give me the body in 
order that I may place it in a tomb. 11. He showed all 
things to you, in order that you might place them in your 
hearts. 12. The apostle answered and said to those who 
were questioning him that he would not put these gifts 
into the temple. 13. After we had seen the sign which 
Jesus had shown to us, we believed on Him. 


210 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


LESSON XXXII 


Conjugation of ἵστημι and οἶδα. The Optative Mood. 
Conditions Contrary to Fact. Uses of γίνομαι. 


538. | Vocabulary 


9 f 


ἀνίστημι, transitive, 1 cause 
to rise, in the present, fut., 
and Ist aor. act.; intran- 
sitive, I stand up, I arise, 
in the 2nd aor. and perf. 
act., and in the middle. 

δοκέω, I seem, I think. 

δύναμαι, dep. (the present 
system conjugated like the 
middle of torn), 1 am 
able. 

δύναμις, δυνάμεως, ἡ, power, 
a miracle. 

ἔβην, 2nd aor. (of the μι 
form) of βαίνω (conju- 
gated like the 2nd aor. of 
ἵστημι). 

ἕτερος, a, ον, another (some- 
times, but not always, im- 
plies difference of kind, 
whereas ἄλλος often de- 
notes mere numerical dis- 
tinction). 

ἵστημι, transitive, 1 cause to 
stand, in the pres., fut. and 
1st aor. act.; intransitive, 
I stand, in the perf. (which 


has the sense of a present 
= I stand) and in the 2nd 
aor. 

κάθημαι, dep. of the we form, 
I sit (pres. part καθήμενος, 
sitting). 

οἶδα, 2nd perf. used as pres., 
I know. 

ὅλος, ἡ, ov, adj., whole, all. 

ὅμοιος, a, ov, adj., like, sem- 
ilar (with the dative of 
that to which anything is 
similar). 

οὔτε, ana not, nor (οὔτε. ... 
οὔτε, neither.... nor). 

παραγίνομαι, 1 become near, 
I arrive, I come (rapa- 
γίνομαι eis τὴν πόλιν, 1 
arrive τη the city). 

φανερόω, 1 make manifest, I 
manifest. 

φημί, 1 say (a μι verb with 
stem da-. Much less com- 
mon than λέγω). 

ws, adv. and conj., as, when 
(some of its other uses 
have already been studied). 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 9717 


539. The principal parts of the μὲ verb ἵστημι, I cause 
to stand, are as follows: 

ἵστημι, στήσω, ἔστησα, ἕστηκα, ἕσταμαι, ἐστάθην, 2nd 
aor. act. ἔστην. 


540. The stem is ora-. The present system is redupli- 
cated by the prefixing of i-. The future and first aorist sys- 
tems are perfectly regular, the στα- of the stem being length- 
ened to στη- before the o of the tense suffixes. The perfect 
active is regular except that the e- of the reduplication has 
the rough breathing. The perfect middle and passive retains 
the στα- of the stem unchanged instead of lengthening its 
vowel. The aorist passive also retains the ora-, but other- 
wise is regular. 


541. Learn the active voice of the present system of 
ἵστημι in §600. 


542. The treatment of the stem and of the endings in the 
present system is very much the same as in the case of 
δίδωμι and τίθημι. The declension of the participle ἱστάς 
is like that of λύσας, the aorist active participle of λύω, 
except for the accent. 


543. Learn the middle and passive forms of the present 
system of ἵστημι in §600. It will be noticed that the end- 
ings are joined directly to the reduplicated stem ἱστα-; 
except in the subjunctive mood. 


544. ἵστημι differs from δίδωμι and τίθημι in that it 
has a complete second aorist active as well as a complete 
first aorist active. The first aorist means I caused to stand 
(transitive), and the second aorist means 1 stood (intransi- 
tive). 


545. Learn the second aorist active of torn in §601. 


218 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


546. It will be observed that the conjugation is very 
much like that of the aorist passive of λύω. The participle 
στάς is declined like the present participle tords. 


547. A second aorist middle of ἵστημι does not occur. 


548. In addition to the first perfect active participle, 
ἑστηκώς, ἵστημι has a second perfect participle ἑστώς, 
ἑστῶσα, ἑστός, gen. ἑστῶτος, etc. Both ἑστηκώς and ἑστώς 
mean standing. 


549. Learn the conjugation of οἶδα, 1 know (a second 
perfect used as a present, the pluperfect, ἤδειν, being used 
as an imperfect) in $603. 


550. The Optative Mood 


In the classical period, the Greek language had another 
mood, the optative, in addition to those which we have 
studied. In New Testament Greek, however, most of the 
classical uses of the optative have praetically disappeared. 
The optative is still retained to express a wish. ‘Thus 
μὴ γένοιτο (γένοιτο being the second aorist optative, third 
person singular, of γίνομαι) means may it not take place, 
God forbid. The few other optative forms in the New Tes- 
tament can be noted when they occur. 


551. Conditions Contrary to Fact 


Conditions contrary to fact are expressed by the secon- 
dary tenses of the indicative in both protasis and apodosis. 
The protasis is introduced by ei, and the apodosis has the 
particle ἄν, which, however, is sometimes omitted. 

Example: κύριε, εἰ ἧς ὧδε, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός 
μου, Lord, af thou hadst been here, my brother. would not have 
died. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 219 


Uses of γίνομαι 


552. Thus far, in the exercises, it has usually been pos- 
sible to translate γίνομαι by the English word become. 
But very often, in the New Testament, such a translation 
isimpossible. The English word become requires a predicate 
nominative, but in very many cases γίνομαι has no predicate 
nominative. Insuch cases it means happen, come into being, 
come to pass, appear, arise, be made. Sometimes it can be 
translated by the words come or be. 

Examples: (1) ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις ἔγένετο ἱερεύς τις, 
in those days there was (appeared in history) a certain 
priest. (2) πάντα δι᾽’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο, all things came into 

being (or were made) through him. (8) εἶδεν τὰ γενόμενα, 
he saw the things that had happened. (4) φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ 
τῶν οὐρανῶν, a voice came out of the heavens. [But it must 
not be supposed that γίνομαι is a verb of motion.| 


553. The usage of καὶ ἐγένετο and ἐγένετο δέ, Meaning 
and it \came to pass, calls for special comment. There are 
three forms of this usage, which may be illustrated as 
follows.! 

(1) καὶ ἐγένετο αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν, and it came to pass that 
he came. Here the accusative and infinitive depend on éyé- 
vero in a way that is at least after the analogy of ordinary 
Greek usage. 

(2) καὶ ἐγένετο καὶ ἦλθεν, and rt came to pass and he 
came. ‘The literal English translation is here intolerable, 
and the Greek also is not in accordance with the ordinary 
usage of the Greek language, but is derived from a Hebrew 
idiom. 

(3) καὶ ἐγένετο ἦλθεν, and it came to pass he came. 
This also is not an ordinary Greek usage, ἦλθεν, being left 


1 This method of illustration is taken, in essentials, from J. H. Moul- 
ton, Grammar of New Testament Greek, Vol. I, ‘““Prolegomena,” 2nd | 
Edition, 1906, p. 16. 


220 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


without a construction. Both (2) and (8), as well as (1) 
may be translated freely and zt came to pass that he came. 


554. Exercises 


e 


I. 1. διὰ τοῦτο ὁ κόσμος οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς OTL οὐκ ἔγνω 
αὐτόν. ᾿Αγαπητοί, νῦν τέκνα θεοῦ ἐσμεν, καὶ οὔπω ἐφανερώθη 
τί ἐσόμεθα. οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἐὰν φανερωθῇ ὅμοιοι αὐτῷ ἐσόμεθα, 
ὅτι ὀψόμεθα αὐτὸν καθώς ἐστιν. 2. ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ Ποῦ 
ἐστιν ὁ πατήρ cov; ἀπεκρίθη ᾿Ιησοῦς Οὔτε ἐμὲ οἴδατε οὔτε τὸν 
πατέρα pou’ εἰ ἐμὲ ἤδειτε, καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου ἂν ἤδειτε. 3. 
ζητήσετέ με καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετε, καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἔγὼ ὑμεῖς οὐ-δύνα- 
σθε ἐλθεῖν. 3. καὶ συνέρχεται πάλιν ὁ ὄχλος, ὥστε μὴ δύνα- 
σθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν. 4. ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπον 
ὑμῖν ὝὙπάγω καὶ ἔρχομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς. εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε 
ἂν ὅτι πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, ὅτι ὁ πατὴρ μείζων μού 
ἐστιν. ὅ. εὗρεν ἄλλους ἑστῶτας καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ὧδε ἑστή- 
κατε ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; 6. προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει κύριος 
ὁ θεὸς ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν ὡς ἐμέ: αὐτοῦ ἀκοὐύσεσθεϊ κατὰ 
πάντα ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ ὑμῖν. 7. καὶ ἀναστὰς ὃ ἀρχιερεὺς εἶπεν 
αὐτῷ Οὐδὲν ἀποκρίνῃ ; ὃ. τότε οὖν εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μα- 
θητὴς ὁ ἐλθὼν πρῶτος εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, καὶ εἶδεν καὶ ἐπίστευσεν" 
οὐδέπωΣ γὰρ ἤδεισαν τὴν γραφήν, ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 
ἀναστῆναι. 9. εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ 
γενόμεναι ἐν σοί, ἔμεινεν ἂν μέχρι' τῆς σήμερονῦ. 10. ἔδωκεν 
αὐτοῖς δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἐπὶ πάντα τὰ δαιμόνια. 1]. 
ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ βαπτισθῆναι ἅπανταϑ τὸν λαὸν καὶ ᾿Ιησοῦ 


1 The future οἵ ἀκούω is here deponent. 

2 οὐδέπω, not yet. 

5 Σόδομα, wv, τά, plural in singular sense, Sodom. 

4 μέχρι with gen., until, up to. 

5 σήμερον, adv., todays ἡ σήμερον (supply ἡμέρα), today. 
δἅπας, ἅπασα, ἅπαν, all (a strengthened form of 7ds). 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 221 


βαπτισθέντος καὶ προσευχομένου ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν, 
καὶ καταβῆναι τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον. 12. ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν 
ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐξελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὰ ὄρη προσεύξασθαι. 
13. ἐξῆλθον δὲ ἰδεῖν τὸ “γεγονός, καὶ ἦλθον πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, 
καὶ εὗρον καθήμενον τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἀφ᾽ οὗ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐξῆλθον. 
14. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐν τόπῳ τινὶ προσευχόμενον, 
ὡς ἐπαύσατοϊ, εἶπέν τις τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ πρὸς αὐτὸν 
Κύριε δίδαξον ἡμᾶς προσεύχεσθαι, καθὼς καὶ ᾿ΙωάνηςΣ ἐδί- 
δαξεν τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ. 15. ὁ δὲ ἔφη αὐτῷ ᾿Αγαπήσεις 
κύριον τὸν θεόν σου ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ σου. 10. δοκεῖτε ὅτι 
εἰρήνην παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ; 17. περὶ τίνος. ὁ προ- 
φήτης λέγει τοῦτο; περὶ ἑαυτοῦ ἢ περὶ ἑτέρου τινός; 18. αὐτὸς 
ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ καὶ πυρί. 


II. 1. He forgave those who had risen up against their 
king. 2. We know that those who are sitting in the house 
will not go out until they see the apostle. 3. When Jesus 
had gone dowrt from the mountain, the disciples saw the 
man sitting in the house. 4. We saw the apostles standing 
in the presence of the chief priests. 5. When the women 
had arrived in the city they saw Jesus doing many miracles. 
6. In those days there rose up a certain king who did not 
know us. 7. Thou hast manifested Thyself to those who 
are sitting in darkness. 8. When he had seen these things 
he did not know what he was saying. 10. Weare not able 
to know all these things unless the Lord manifests them to 
us. 11. We have found the One who is able to take away 
our sins. 12. We know that no one is able to do what the 
king does. 


τπαύομαι (middle), 7 cease. 


2’Twavns, ov, ὁ, John. 


TN 
= 
- 
Ξ 
oo 
a 
ae 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 225 


PARADIGMS 
First Declension 
555. The declension of ὥρα, 7, stem wpa-, an hour, 
ἀλήθεια, ἡ, stem ἀληθεια-, truth, δόξα, ἡ, stem doka-, glory, 
and γραφή, ἡ, stem ypada-, a writing, a Scripture, is as 
follows: 


Sing, 
Ν. ν. ὥρα ἀλήθεια δόξα γραφή 
ὥρας ἀληθείας δόξης γραφῆς 
1. ὥρᾳ ἀληθείᾳ δόξῃ γραφῇ 
Α. ὥραν ἀλήθειαν δόξαν γραφήν 
Plur. 
N.V. ὧραι ἀλήθειαι δόξαι γραφαί 
G. ὡρῶν ἀληθειῶν δοξῶν γραφῶν 
D. pats ἀληθείαις δόξαις γραφαῖς 
Α. ὥρας ἀληθείας δόξας γραφάς 


556. The declension of προφήτης, 6, stem προφητα-, a 
prophet, and μαθητής, ὁ, stem μαθητα-, a disciple, is as fol- 
lows: 


Sing. 
N. προφήτης μαθητής 
G. προφήτου μαθητοῦ 
1). προφήτῃ μαθητῇ 
Α. προφήτην μαθητήν 
Υ. προφῆτα μαθητά 
Plur. 

N.V. προφῆται μαθηταί 
G. προφητῶν μαθητῶν 
D. προφήταις μαθηταῖς 
A. προφήτας μαθητάς 


2206 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


| Second Declension 


557. The declension of λόγος, ὃ, stem λογο-, a word, 
ἄνθρωπος, ὁ, stem ἀνθρωπο-, a man, vids, ὁ, stem vio-, a 
son, and δοῦλος, ὁ, stem dovdo-, a slave, is as follows: 


Sing. 
N. λόγος ἄνθρωπος υἱός δοῦλος 
G. λόγου ἀνθρώπου υἱοῦ δούλου 
D. λόγῳ ἀνθρώπῳ υἱῷ δούλῳ 
A. λόγον ἄνθρωπον υἱόν δοῦλον 
V. λόγε ἄνθρωπε υἱέ δοῦλε 
Plur. 


N.V. λόγοι ἄνθρωποι υἱοί δοῦλοι 
G. λόγων ἀνθρώπων υἱῶν δούλων 
D. λόγοις ἀνθρώποις υἱοῖς δούλοις 
Α. λόγους ἀνθρώπους υἱοὺς δούλους 


558. The declension of δῶρον, 76, stem δωρο-, a gift, is as 


follows: 
δῶρον, τό, stem dwpo- 
Sing. Plur. 
N. A.V. δῶρον N. A.V. δῶρα 
G. δώρου G. δώρων 
D. δώρῳ D. δώροις 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 227 


Third Declension 


559. The declension of νύξ, ἡ, stem νυκτ-, a night, σάρξ, 
ἡ, Stem σαρκ-, flesh, ἄρχων, ὁ, stem ἀρχοντ-, a ruler, is as 
follows: 


Sing. 

N. νύξ σάρξ ἄρχων 
(ᾳ. νυκτός σαρκός ἄρχοντος 
)ὴ. νυκτί σαρκί ἄρχοντι 
Α. νύκτα σάρκα ἄρχοντα 
V. νύξ σάρξ ἄρχων 

Ν. ΚΝ. νύκτες σάρκες. ἄρχοντες 
α. νυκτῶν σαρκῶν ἀρχόντων 
Ὁ. νυξί() σαρξί(ν) ἄρχουσι(ν) 
Α. νύκτας ᾿ς σάϊβὝανδνν ἄρχοντας 


" 
560. The declension οἵ ἐλπίς, ἡ, hope, and χάρις, 7, 
grace, is as follows: ΣῊ 


ἐλπίς, ἡ, Stem ἐλπιδ- χάρις, ἡ, stem χαριτ- 
Sing. 
Ἢ 
Ν. ἐλπίς ο χάρις 
G. ἐλπίδος χάριτος 
. ἐλπίδι χάριτι 
Α. ἐλπίδα χάριν 
V. ἐλπί χάρις 
Plur. 

N.V. ἐλπίδες χάριτες 
G. ἐλπίδων χαρίτων 
D. ἐλπίσι(ν) χάἀρισι(ν) 
Α. ἐλπίδας χάριτας 


ae 
SS ee 


228 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


561. The declension of ὄνομα, τό, a name, is as fol- 


lows: 


N. A.V. 
G. 


D. 


ὄνομα, τό, stem ὀνοματ- 


Sing. 
ὄνομα N.A. V. 
(ὀνόματος G. 
ὀνόματι 1. 


562. The declension of γένος, τό, a race, is as follows: 


Sing. 
N. A.V. γένος N.A. V. 
G. γένους Ga 
1. γένει Ὦ. 


γένος, τό, stem γενεσ- 


Plur. 
γένη 
γενῶν 
γένεσι(ν) 


563. The declension of πόλις, 7, a city, is as follows: 


πόλις, ἡ, stem πολι- 


Sing. 
N. πόλις N.V. 
G. πόλεως G. 
D. πόλει D. 
A. πόλιν A. 
V. πόλι 


Plur. 
πόλεις 
πόλεων 
πόλεσι(ν) 
πόλεις 


564. The declension of βασιλεύς, ὁ, a king, is as follows: 


Bee δ τς 


βασιλεύς, 6, stem βασιλευ- 


Sing. 
βασιλεὺς N. V. 
βασιλέως α. 
βασιλεῖ D. 
βασιλέα Α. 


βασιλεῦ 


Plur. 
βασιλεῖς 
βασιλέων 
βασιλεῦσι(ν) 
βασιλεῖς 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 229 


565. The declension of πατήρ, 6, a father, and ἀνήρ, ὃ, 
a man, is as follows: 


πατήρ, ὁ, stem πατερ- ἀνήρ, 6, stem ἀνερ- 
Sing. 
N. πατὴρ ἀνήρ 
G. πατρός ἀνδρός 
D. πατρί ἀνδρί 
Α. πατέρα ἄνδρα 
Ν. πάτερ ἄνερ 
Plur. 
ΝΟΥ͂. πατέρες ἄνδρες 
G. πατέρων ἀνδρῶν 
D. πατράσιᾳν) ἀνδράσι(ν) 
Α. πατέρας ἄνδρας 


μήτηρ, μητρός, ἡ, a mother, is declined like πατήρ. 


566. The declension of χείρ, ἡ, a hand, and γυνή, ἡ, a 
woman, is as follows: 


χείρ, ἡ, Stem χε:ρ- γυνή, ἡ, stem γυναικ- 

Sing. 

Ν. χείρ γυνή 

G. χειρός γυναικός 

D. χειρί γυναικί 

Α. χεῖρα γυναῖκα 

Υ. χείρ γύναι 
Plur. 

ΝΟ. χεῖρες γυναῖκες 
G. χειρῶν γυναικῶν 
D. χερσίᾳ(ν) γυναιξί(ν) 
Α. χεῖρας γυναῖκας 


Plur. 

F. ΝΕ 

e ld 
at τά 
τῶν τῶν 
ταῖς τοῖς 
τάς τά 


Plur. 

Ae 
ἀγαθαί 
ἀγαθῶν 
ἀγαθαῖς 
ἀγαθάς 


Plur. 
Ἐ. 
μικραί 
μικρῶν 
μικραῖς 
μικράς. 


Ν. 


ἀγαθά 
ἀγαθῶν 
ἀγαθοῖς 
ἀγαθά 


Ν. 
μικρά 
μικρῶν 
μικροῖς 
μικρά 


230 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
567. The Article 
The declension of the article, ὁ, ἡ, τό, the, is as follows: 
Sing. 
M. F N. M. 
Νκτό ἡ τό N. of 
G. Tov τῆ τοῦ G. τῶν 
D. 7@ τῇ τῷ D. τοῖς 
Α. τόν τή τό A. τοὺς 
Adjectives 
568. The declension of ἀγαθός, ἡ, ov, good, is as follows: 
Sing. 
M. F. N. M. 
N. ἀγαθός ἀγαθὴ ἀγαθόν N.V. ἀγαθοί 
G. ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθῆς ἀγαθοῦ 8G. ἀγαθῶν 
D. ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῇ ἀγαθῷ D. ἀγαθοῖς 
A. ἀγαθόν ἀγαθήν ἀγαθὸν A. ἀγαθούς 
V. ἀγαθέ ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν 
569. The declension of μικρός, ἀ, ov, small, is as follows: 
Sing. 
M. im N. M. 
Ν. μικρός μικρά μικρόν N.V. μικροί 
G. μικροῦ μικρᾶς μικροῦ G. μικρῶν 
D. μικρῷ. μικρᾷ μικρῷ D. μικροῖς 
Α. μικρόν μικράν μικρόν A. μικροὺς 
V. μικρέ μικρά μικρόν 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 95] 


570. The declension of δίκαιος, a, ov, righteous, is as 
follows: 
Sing. Plur. 

M. F, Ν. Μ. F, N. 
δίκαιοι δίκαιαι δίκαια 
δικαίων δικαίων δικαίων 
δικαίοις δικαίαις δικαίοις 
δικαίους δικαίας δίκαια 


. δίκαιος δικαία δίκαιον Ν. 
. δικαίου δικαίας δικαίου 


Ν 
α 
D. δικαίῳ δικαίᾳ, δικαίῳ 
Α 
V 


le se 


. δίκαιον δικαίαν δίκαιον 
. δίκαιε δικαία δίκαιον 


571. The declension of μείζων, μεῖζον, greater, is as 
follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M. F. Ν. M. F. N. 
N. μείζων μεῖζον Ν. μείζονες(μείζους) μείζονα(μείζω) 
G. μείζονος μείζονος G. μειζόνων μειζόνων 
D. μείζονι μείζονι 10. μείζοσι(ν) μείζοσι(ν) 


Α. μείζονα (μείζω) μεῖζον Α. μείζονας(μείζους) μείζονα (μείζω) 


572. The declension of ἀληθής, és, true, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M. F. Ν, M. F. N. 
Ν. ἀληθής ἀληθές N.V. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 
G. ἀληθοῦς ἀληθοῦς α. ἀληθῶν ἀληθῶν 
D. ἀληθεῖ ἀληθεῖ D. ἀληθέσι(ν) ἀληθέσι(ν) 
Α. ἀληθῆ ἀληθές Α. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 
V. ἀληθές ἀληθές 
573. The declension of πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, all, is as follows: 
Sing. Plur. 
M. Ἐ, N. M. F, ING 
N. πᾶς πᾶσα πᾶν Ν. πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα 
G. παντός πάσης παντός G. πάντων πασῶν πάντων 
D. παντί πάσῃ παντί D. πᾶσι(ν) πάσαις πᾶσι(ν) 
Α. πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν Α. πάντας πάσας πάντα 


252 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


574. The declension of πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, much, is as 

follows: 
Sing. Plur. 

M. F, N. M. Ε, Ν. 
. πολύς πολλή πολύ N. πολλοί πολλαί πολλά 
. πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ G. πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 0. πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς 
πολύν πολλήν πολῦ A. πολλούς πολλάς πολλά 


Paz 


575. The declension of μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, great, is as 

follows: 
Sing. Plur. 
M. His N. M. F. N. 

Ν. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα N.V. μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα 
G. μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου G. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων 
D. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ D. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις 
Α. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα Α. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα 
Υ. μεγάλε μεγάλη μέγα 


Participles 


576. The declension of λύων, λύουσα, λῦον, loosing, the 
present active participle of λύω, is as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
M. EF. N. M. F. N. 
N. λύων δλύουσα λῦον Ν. λύοντες λύουσαι λύοντα 


G. λύοντος λυούσης λύοντος G. λυόντων λυουσῶν λυόντων 
D. λύοντι λυούσῃ λύοντι D. λύουσι(ν) λυούσαις λύουσι(ν) 
Α. λύοντα λύουσαν λῦον Α. λύοντας λυούσας λύοντα 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


233 


577. The declension of λύσας, λύσασα, λῦσαν, having 
loosed, the aorist active participle of λύω, is as follows: 


578. 


See es 


PuaZ 


M. 
λύσας 
λύσαντος 
λύσαντι 
λύσαντα 


Μ. 
λύσαντες 
λυσάντων 
λύσασι(ν) 
λύσαντας 


Sing. 

F, 
λύσασα 
λυσάσης 
λυσάσῃ 
λύσασαν 


Plur. 

F. 
λύσασαι 
λυσασῶν 
λυσάσαις 
λυσάσας 


Ν. 
λῦσαν 
λύσαντος 
λύσαντι 
λῦσαν 


Ν. 
λύσαντα 
λυσάντων 
λύσασι(ν) 
λύσαντα 


The declension of λελυκώς, λελυκυῖΐῖα, λελυκός, the 


perfect active participle of λύω, is as follows: 


πὸ USE 


fA ee 


M. 
λελυκώς 
λελυκότος 
λελυκότι 
λελυκότα 


Μ. 
λελυκότες 
λελυκότων 
λελυκόσι(ν) 


λελυκότας 


Sing. 

F. 
λελυκυῖα 
λελυκυίας 
λελυκυίᾳ 
λελυκυΐαν 


Plur. 
it 
λελυκυῖαι 
λελυκυιῶν 
λελυκυίαις 
λελυκυίας 


Ν. 
λελυκός 
λελυκότος 


λελυκότι 
λελυκός 


N. 


λελυκότα 
λελυκότων 
λελυκόσι(ν) 


λελυκότα 


234. NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


579. The declension of λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν, having 
been loosed, the aorist passive participle of λύω, is as 


follows: 


. λυθείς 


M 


. λυθέντι 


N 
G. λυθέντος 
D 
A 


. λυθέντα 


Μ. 


. λυθέντες 


. λυθεῖσι(ν) 


Ν 
G. λυθέντων 
D 
A 


. λυθέντας 


Sing. 

F. 
λυθεῖσα 
λυθείσης 
λυθείσῃ 
λυθεῖσαν 


Plur. 

F. 
λυθεῖσαι 
λυθεισῶν 
λυθείσαις 
λυθείσας 


N. 
λυθέν 
λυθέντος 
λυθέντι 


λυθέν 


N. 
λυθέντα 
λυθέντων 
λυθεῖσι(ν) 


λυθέντα 


580. The declension of ὦν, οὖσα, ὄν, being, the present 
participle of εἰμί, is as follows: 


Sing. 
M. F. 
N. ov οὖσα 
G. ὄντος οὔσης 
D. ὄντι οὔσῃ 
Α. ὄντα οὖσαν 


Ν. 
wv 
ὄν 
ὄντος 
ὄντι 
ὄν 


Plur. 
M. F. N. 
Ν. ὄντες οὖσαι ὄντα 
G. ὄντων οὐσῶν ὄντων 
D. οὖσι(ν) οὔσαις οὖσι(ν) 
A. ὄντας οὔσας ὄντα 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK Boo 


" Pronouns 
Ι΄. 581. The declensions of the personal pronouns, ἐγώ, 
" I, σύ, thou, and αὐτός, ἡ, 6, he, she, it, are as follows: 
| ἢ ἐγώ σύ αὐτός αὐτή αὐτό 
| Sing. 
τι Ν. ἐγώ σύ αὐτός αὐτή αὐτό 
ἢ G. ἐμοῦ (μου) σοῦ αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ 
ke 1). ἐμοί (μοι) σοί αὐτῷὮὀ αὐτῇ αὐτῷ 
ih A. ἐμέ (με) σέ αὐτόν αὐτήν αὐτό 
| Plur. 
| Ν. ἡμεῖς ὑμεῖς αὐτοί αὐταί αὐτά 
4 G. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν 
εἶ 2. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς 
i A. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς αὐτάς αὐτά 
| ; 582. The declension of οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, this, is as 
ἢ follows: 
᾿ Sing. Plur. 
ME M. F. N. M. F. N. 
᾿ Ν. οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο Ν. οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 
᾿ G. τούτου ταύτης τούτου G. τούτων τούτων τούτων 
4 D. τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ OD. τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
Ε A. τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο <A. τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα 
᾿ ἐκεῖνος, ἡ, 0, that, has the same endings as αὐτός. 
Η 583. The declension of the relative pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, 
ἦ who, which, what, is as follows: 
ἷ Sing. - Plur. 
M i ANE hee Fs aN 
N. ὅς ἥ ὅ Ν. οἵ αἵ ἅ 
G. οὗ ἧς οὗ G. ὧν ὧν ὧν 
Τὴ τῷ ἣἧ ᾧ D. οἷς ais Οἷς 
Α. ὅν ἥν ὅ Α. οὕς ἅς ἅ 


290 
584. 


some one, something, is as follows: 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


The declension of the interrogative pronoun, Tis, 
τί, who? which? what?, and the indefinite pronoun, τις, 71, 


M.F. 


. τίνες 


. τίσιν) 
. τίνας 


585. 


POO 


> oO 


N 
G. τίνων 
D 
A 


Plur. 
N. 
τίνα 
τίνων 
τίσι(ν) 
τίνα 


τις 


M.F. 


TUS 
τινός 
τινί 
τινά 


M. F. 
τινές 
τινῶν 
τισί(ν) 
τινάς 


N. 
τινά 
τινῶν 
τισί(ν) 
τινά 


The declension of the reflexive pronouns, ἐμαυτοῦ, 
ἧς, of myself, and σεαυτοῦ, 7s, of thyself, is as follows: 


ἐμαυτοῦ, ἧς 


Μ. 
ἐμαυτοῦ 
ἐμαυτῷ 
ἐμαυτόν 


Μ. 
ἑαυτῶν 
ἑαυτοῖς 
ἑαυτοὺς 


Sing. 
Le 
ἐμαυτῆς 
ἐμαυτῇ 
ἐμαυτήν 
Plur. 
F. 
ἑαυτῶν 
ἑαυταῖς 
ἑαυτάς 


σεαυτοῦ, Hs 


Μ. 
σεαυτοῦ 
σεαυτῷ 
σεαυτόν 


Μ. 
ἑαυτῶν 
ἑαυτοῖς 
ἑαυτούς 


F. 
σεαυτῆς 
σεαυτῇ 
σεαυτὴν 


Ἐ. 
ἑαυτῶν 
ἑαυταῖς 
ἑαυτάς 


eae ᾿ τὰ 


586. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


The declension of the reflexive pronoun 


ns, ov, of himself, of herself, of itself, is as follows: 


587. 


588. 


M. 


ἑαυτῷ 


Sing. 
τς Ν. 
Qe nN e ~ ε (es 
. ἑαυτοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἑαυτοῦ G. 
e On e Mn 
ἑαυτὸ ἑαυτῷΆῳωώ OD. 
« UA e lA e , 
. ἑαυτόν ἑαυτήν ἑαυτό Α. 
Numerals 


Plo: 


M. Ee 


ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν 
ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς 
ἑαυτούς ἑαυτάς 


237 


ἑαυτοῦ, 


N. 
ἑαυτῶν 
ἑαυτοῖς 
ἑαυτά 


The declension of εἷς, μία, ἕν, one, is as follows: 


M. 
Ν. εἷς 
. ἑνός 
7. ῥδνί 
Α. ἕνα 


i 


The declension of τρεῖς, τρία, three, is as follows: 


M. F. 
N. τρεῖς 
G. τριῶν 
D. τρισί(ν) 
A. τρεῖς 


N. 
N. τρία 
G. τριῶν 
9). τρισί(ν) 
Α. τρία 


The declension of τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα, four, is as follows: 


M. F. 


τέσσαρες 
τεσσάρων 

. τέσσαρσι(ν) 
. τέσσαρας 


PO 2 


rPOaZA 


N. 


. τέσσαρα 

. τεσσάρων 

. τέσσαρσι(ν) 
. τέσσαρα 


ArQAY aoanayry 


D0199AX 
S19QAY 


maugay 


avomsligay 
align 
mLligay 
12le9Qy 


(4)10M92X 
a1ligay 
AaTlOGQX 
Uigax 
Sligay 
LA 4 


1 LA00ligay avolgay? 


sgorolipay rtlgay?  2g0av7x 3.9.0 Υ9Χ (3)  PLDHANIN 3GNVOANP  PLDOANP 390900N ILIONY 
verrooligay arriligayr vgraayry aaManqyray(?) aI DIAYX vgarno0aY? AINDvOAY? DEITIODAY 

1190 gay Ligay? WLAYIXY —«-T9HANIN(P) (ΑΞ = 0LDONNP = (4) 9.002 10.139. 00X 19.00N 

Gougay  slgayr woay2y  $19NAYIX(?) SDAIN MOAN? spony? ἀρὴν $19.00X 
mrnoolgay algnyze rorlayr_ ΔΑἸΞΥΩΥΞΥ (9) pyay2X aunvoay? poAYZ ἸΌΤΙΟΡΩΥ 

᾿Β504 ἽΠ] ΒΒ64 ἼΟ “dW 94 “py “nid SPV ded oe PUN RV Ὅν Ry PIN WY 
eae SS Oe eee Eee ΝΞ“ ον “έ͵ές͵.͵ςσΠπδΝν νΝ πο πα 
augay? ronAY2X “DMAYIX DoaAY2 moOay 


SOWAYIX AoAITIDOAY AvDOAN 

Lagnayry piawAYIY lagrvoOaN ὈΡΌΡΩΥ 
Soagnayry SMNAYIY 50Λ9ΥΌΘΩΥ SDOnY 
IDQOANIX, IWAPNAYIY ἸΌΘΡΌΡΦΩΥ DAY 
AVDIMPOD IAN ADIMLD DAY 

IQNDOAN ILDOAY 

mpnnony = MLDOAY 

DAY Aaonay 

WLAMONY (4)10MD0N 

apoloay atLloay 

veenmony aanmony 

i tlony ραν 

ραν sioay 

rTM DAY MOAN 


ADNAN 
IDLAAVIYV AD 19W0N IN (?) (4)19D40\IX OLa000NP 


aoasrioay 
Lazrioay 
soaanoay 


19.090N 


ADIMH0PAN 
39090Y 
Mp.090\ 
dea A 


10. ποῦν 
agony 
vearmay 
mLlay 
ay 
ronrlmay 


ADDAY2 IDLAONAY (A)IDAOHAY OLAOAY? 10LA00Y 


aony? 


29090N? 39990X 9.900} 
arnoonny vgrenoay? vgrMoay asnony? 
OLINY? IDL9NY (2)30\2 


aony? lax 


MOAN aurloay? rorloay 
py ing “dC Wd “411 89.4 Ὅν απ] 


s90y2 
AoAY? 


OON 


2SMOTJO} SB st ‘Ay ways ‘as00) J ‘Ay 10 ἀσιγοϑηίαοο oY], 


419Λ 10{π29} o4L 


So 


acs 

pono0ny 
ΔΝ ‘Weg 
A19QX 88] 


ADDMLIAX "9 
2490N°S “Id 
MLPAX "8 


mY 2 “‘Gedwuy 


(a)oeay "8 
ablay *% 
amnoay 14 
lax 8 
SUAX ᾽ς 
ONT Sg “fang 


(4)19200X 8 
9430 χ °Z 
aaTtony 1 “Id 
9X 
S190X ᾽ς 
SONGS oeea 
"PY Sd 


S22 oe 


syleg [86 (0044 


683, 


aoasnlorit (ΛΟΛΞΥΓΟΌΥΙ.Ὰ) ΛΟ 1.» (aon7ri12 ) 
aaron.  (lagrovrt) pomnit (vononnL) 
‘soaanlmrit (Soasnovn it) aon (amprlit) "4184 
1Ὁ0ΟΌΤΥ1. (109097112) annit (4190 011.) ‘uguy 
anomgonris(avomg0z0n1L) ADOMLYNIL (AvOMLIVTIL) “6 
agonnit (39.090N1L) 93.071... (aLannit) "5 "Tg 
mpoorie  (mg0z071L) mLonit  (mL90N1L) *¢ 
oni (aonriL) oni (012) ᾿ς ᾽ῷ *dwy 
wiaMni, (wLampniL) (2)19¢0n1L ([4}}.0 00 1.) "8 
9300ΌΤΠ1.. (agoliyrt) 3.71. (9.{{Ὁ7]1..Ὰ) °Z 
ὈΡΞ3ΥΥ1.. (ὈΡΞΥ ΌΤΙ.) anon (aanlmnnit) 1 4 
10.«Ὁ71.. (10 .{{Ὁ]1.}Ὰ Ὁγ|1. (UntiL) *¢ 
one (Unr+) somit = (Slinrlat) *Z 
rmononit (ὙΌΤΥΟΛΌΥ 1.) oni (ment) 1 *g ‘fqng 
Οὐ ΛΟ 1.13 (o1dopnis) wtagnit (wwLaoprit) amit (aonn12) (ΛΑ) 0(ὉΥ11.. ((a)10n0MTIL) "6 
900Ό7]1.3 (9θ09Ὁ711.32) rgonnit (ag09nnrt) 9.Ὁ7]1.3 (9490111..3) ators (Θ..90711..Ὰ} *Z 
ὈΘΘΥΪΟΥ 1.1.3 (ὉρΡ9Υ]ΟΌΥ]1.13) vearorit (ὈΡϑΥΦΌΤΙΊ1.}) aaneorirty (asnlonni13) asonrt (43) Ὁ7|1..Ὰ} 1 14 
oLonita (oLspriit9) 1Ὁ«ὉΠῚ (10..390)7}}.) vr}. (2071713) oni (199112) "6 
ota ((ΟΌΥ.3) ont (pris) sorita (59Ό71.12) 5071. (5130111..) *Z 
alinleorita (aurlonni19) rorlonit (vonoprit) amnita (ΛΟΌΥΊ..3) cont (mpmiL) 1 *g ‘oIpUy 
᾿Β5Έ4 pus “pI ‘Hoduy geee dd PUPS DUA bei ‘qoy ° jroduy "qo ᾿Β0.4 


SSMOT[OJ SB 51 ‘uowoy 1 ‘mvt Jo waysds YUeseId 911, ‘06S 
SqIdA JRIJUOD 


Aoamnnoyip (ΛΟΛ3Υ 031) AnOVNIp (403\19) 


uagraoyip = (Uagrioay1d) pDon0yip (0.0202\1) 
‘soasninoyip (‘Soaarigayi) Aaonyip (am2\1) 4184 
mg0I2VIP (1ΌΡρ033ΥΧ1Φ) : a139N1P (213319) ‘uguy 
ADIMHDIIXNIP (a0.0M9023\1) ADIMLIINIP (ADNMLIIVIP) “8 
39013\1P (90933Χ1Φ) 3.19γ1Φ (2439VID) ᾿ς “Id 
mp013V 1p (9.033\1P) MLIIVIP (ὦ. .39Χ1Φ) “8 
ϑχῶς ERED) NIP NIP) “ZG "πὶ 
WMLAMYIP (19-71) (4)100V\IP ((2)19M2\1P) “6 
gounip — (299.0LaN 19) aLuyip = (atliayid) *Z 
neanmvip  (vgarmayid) Δ) ΧΦ (asnmayid) 1 14 
mLuyip (Laid) lind (Uavid) ᾿ς 
uid (9.4) TRE GENE), τ 
monoyip — (1ermeNIp) οὐφ. (mNIM) 15 ‘fang 
OLaaoyip? (OLdozyIP?) WLAQoYIp (1Ὁ- πο Χ1Φ) — ANnOy19? (409Χ1Φ3) (2)1000\19 ((4)70009\1P) "9 
90013Χ143 (39.037X1?) 39.0139V\1P (29239VIP) aL19VIb2 (9..33χ143) 9L19\ IP (2132\IP) “Ὁ 
ngannoyi1p9 (0g27109\1?) vearinoyid (ὈΡ9Τ|09Χ1ΦῚ) aanlaoyid? (aa1109\ 13 ) agnaoyid (973 19) 1 4 
Ο 3 1Φ39 (οὐ99 143) 10.19γχὶῷ (10.139\1P) 179X192 (93Υ149) 19Y1p (199\IP) ᾿ς 
nox? (209X193) Uxrp (0 Φ) 59.143 (5399Χ1Φ}) SIINIP (537) Υ14Φ) *Z 
alirlaoyige (alrl02y19?) ronlaoyid (10 rl09V1o) Anoyip? (409\19?3) VIP (Οϑ 14) ὦ ὍΤΡΌΙ] 
"ssBq puv ‘pry ᾿μϑάση Nera L OMS AS ES “yoy ᾿μϑάσι] 0) ‘Sold 


*SMOTIOJ 98 51 ‘9207 } “ΟΦ 10 Wia4SAs JUOSeId 911, “16S 


doaaninoyug (aodaniooylig ) 

ἱαϑηαοχίις  (lazrlooylg ) 

‘soaarigoylig (‘soaanooy ig) 

mgoaoyle (1Ὸροϑογίιρ) 

Avomponoylig (a0.0=9.020\ 9) 

ϑθρᾳογίς (ϑρρϑογίιρ) 

mpon0yle (9.070 iQ) 

govitg HEREQ) 

mLamylg (wLamoylig) 

9ϑρρῶχίς (ϑροίιογίιρ) 

vernonia (Ὀρϑηφογίιρ) 

mLoylig (Ὁ. ἱογίιο) 

αὐ: CEG 

ronlmy lig (ὉΠ ογίιο) 

oLanoylies (οὐποργίι93) τ0“παοχίρ (τῸ“αοργίιρ) 
ϑθρᾳογίιοΡ, (ϑροϑογίι0}) agogoylug 


vpanaoylier (ngarooylier) Ὀρϑγογίιρ 


oLnoylier (ο«ϑοχίι03) rLa0ylie 
gover — (aogylug?) λογίιῳ 
aurinoyugs (alirlooylug?) rrlaoyle 


‘sseg pue ‘prj ‘Jrodwy 


anoy lig? 


(29020\Uu9) staoyliga 
(nganooylig) asniaoylie? (aariogy ig?) 


(19130\ U9) 
(Hoye) 
(avr/09\ ie) 


“5584 puv “ῬΙΠΛ “Seg 
‘SMOT[OJ SB 51 “safrunw ayou J “Οογίιο Jo uleqsAs yuosoid 91, 


(ϑϑογίι93) 


agoyuig «(μοφγίιρ) 
vonoylg (von00ylie) 
ayia (amoy ig) "Wed 
daoyug (αἸϑογίιο) “uguy 
dv 0m1Ln0vlie(anomsz0\yle) *¢ 
aL00\lig (2290\UQ) ᾿ς ‘Id 
mLn0yle (MLz0\ LQ ) TE 
nove oye) ᾿ς 9. ‘duly 
(a)1oox Lg ((a)romeye) “8 
BRU. (ORR Ὁ 
amnoylg (asrmoylig) “1 14 
Joy lig (Hoyle) “ἐ 
τον ὁ (SHON UG SZ 
orig = (moxie) 1 5 ‘fang 
(aooyiga) (α))οβογίιρ ((a)ronegylie) "ς 
DELON LO GON aia 
aanaoylg (asrlooylie) 51 14 
LON Oe GONG TG 
Syoylig λυ ἢ 
Οχίιρ (moxUe) Τ 5 ὍΤΡΕΙ 
40.) ᾿5914 


noyer (ϑογίιρ9) 

snoyligs —_(S90y 49?) 

anoylier (ποογίιρ}) 
‘yoy ‘jaodwy 


σοῦ A Ct a αν α-- “χω, 


“COS 


PAA DFT AR SRP ae Peay 
ἘΝ - ee = 


= 
we yy 


ee 


ae 


em 


242 


593. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Second Aorist Active and Middle 


The second aorist active and middle of λείπω, I leave, 
is as follows: 


Sing. 


(bie 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


2nd Aor. Act. 


Indic. 

1. ἔλιπον 

2. ἔλιπες 

3. ἔλιπε(ν) 

1. ἐλίπομεν 

2. ἐἔἜλίπετε 

3. ἔλιπον 
Subj. 

1. Alrw 

2. Alans 

3. λίπῃ 

1. λίπωμεν 

2. λίπητε 

3. λίπωσι (ν) 
Imper. 

2. λίπε 

3. λιπέτω 

2. λίπετε 

3. λιπέτωσαν 
Infin. 
λιπεῖν 
Part. 


λιπών, λιποῦσα, 
λιπόν 


2nd Aor. Mid. 


Indic. 


3 fe 
ἐλιπόμην 

9 , 
ἐλίπου 
ἐλίπετο 
ἐλιπόμεθα 
ἐλίπεσθε 

9 , 
ἐλίποντο 


Subj. 
λίπωμαι 
λίπῃ 
λίπηται 
λιπώμεθα 
λίπησθε 
λίπωνται 


Imper. 
λιποῦ 
λιπέσθω 
λίπεσθε : 
λιπέσθωσαν 
Infin. 


λιπέσθαι 


Part. 


λιπόμενος, ἡ, OV 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Future and Aorist of Liquid Verbs 


504. The future active 595. 
and middle of κρίνω, I judge, 
is as follows: 


1st Aor. Act. 
Indic. 
Fut. Act. 8. 1. ἔκρινα 
Indic. 2. ἔκρινας 
3. ἔκρινε(ν) 
Sing. 1. κρινῶ Pl. 1. ἐκρίναμεν 
2. κρινεῖς 2. ἐκρίνατε 
3. κρινεῖ 3. ἔκριναν 
Plur. 1. κρινοῦμεν Subj. 
2. κρινεῖτε S. 1. κρίνω 
3. κρινοῦσι(ν) 2. κρίνῃς 
3. κρίνῃ 
Pl. 1. κρίνωμεν 
2. κρίνητε 
Fut. Mid. 3. κρίνωσι(ν) 
Indic. 
Imper. 
Sing. 1. κρινοῦμαι S. 2. κρῖνον 
2. κρινῇ 3. κρινάτω 
3. κρινεῖται Pl. 2. κρίνατε 
3. κρινάτω- 
Plur. 1. κρινούμεθα σαν 
2. κρινεῖσθε ᾿ 
3. κρινοῦνται bt 
κρῖναι 
Part. 
κρίνας, Kpivaca, 
Kptvav 


243 


The first aorist ac- 
tive and middle of κρίνω, I 
judge, is as follows: 


1st Aor. Mid. 


Indic. 


Subj. 
κρίνωμαι 
κρίνῃ 
κρίνηται 
κρινώμεθα 
κρίνησθε 
κρίνωνται 


Imper. 
κρῖναι 
κρινάσθω 
κρίνασθε 
κρινάσθω- 

σαν 


Infin. 
κρίνασθαι 


Part. 
κρινάμενος, 
n, OV 


244 


506. 
as follows: 


Pres. Act. 
Indic. 
δίδωμι 
δίδως 

δίδωσι(ν) ἐδίδου 

δίδομεν ἐδίδομεν 
δίδοτε ἐδίδοτε 
διδόασι(ν) ἐδίδοσαν 


Indic. 
Sing. 


Plur. 


WNr WN eR 


Subj. 
διδῶ 
διδῷς 
διδῷ 
διδῶμεν 
διδῶτε 


διδῶσι(ν) 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Co DD = WLW De 


Imper. 
δίδου 
διδότω 
δίδοτε 
διδότωσαν 


Sing. 


| Plur. 


oo bo 99 19 


Infin. 
διδόναι 


Part. 


Imperf. Act. 


Verbs in μι. 


Pres. M. P. 
Indic. 
δίδομαι 
δίδοσαι 
δίδοται 
διδόμεθα 
δίδοσθε 


δίδονται 


Subj. 
(διδῶμαι 
διδῷ 
διδῶται 
διδώμεθα 
διδῶσθε 


διδῶνται) 


Imper. 
(δίδοσο 
διδόσθω 
δίδοσθε 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


The present system of δίδωμι, stem do- I give, is 


Imperf. M. P. 
Indic. 
ἐδιδόμην 
ἐδίδοσο 
ἐδίδοτο 
ἐδιδόμεθα 
ἐδίδοσθε 


ἐδίδοντο 


διδόσθωσαν) 


Infin. 
δίδοσθαι 


Part. 


διδούς, διδοῦσα, διδόν διδόμενος, ἡ, ον 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


245 


597. The aorist active and middle of δίδωμι, I give, is 


as follows: 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


ΟΡ ΟΝ καὶ 


Aor. Act. 


Indic. 


ἔδωκα 

? 

ἔδωκας 
ἔδωκε(ν) 
3 , 
ἐδώκαμεν 


δῶσι (v) 


Imper. 
δός 
δότω 
δότε 
δότωσαν 


Infin. 
δοῦναι 


Part. 
δούς, δοῦσα, dov 


Aor. Mid. 
Indic. 
ἐδόμην 
ἔδου 
ἔδοτο 
ἐδόμεθα 
ἔδοσθε 
ἔδοντο 


Subj. 
(δῶμαι 
δῷ 
δῶται 
δώμεθα 
δῶσθε 
δῶνται) 


Imper. 
(δοῦ 
δόσθω 
δόσθε 


δόσθωσαν) 


Infin. 
(δόσθαι) 


Part. 


(δόμενος, ἡ, ov) 


240 


598. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


is as follows: 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


wWwnruwhd καὶ 


won oo 


Pres. Act. Imperf. Act. 
Indic. Indic. 
τίθημι ἐτίθην 
τίθης ἐτίθεις 
τίθησι(ν) ἐτίθει 
τίθεμεν ἐτίθεμεν 
τίθετε ἐτίθετε 


τιθέασι(ν) ἐτίθεσαν 


Subj. 
τιθῶ 
τιθῇς 
τιθῇ 
τιθῶμεν 
τιθῆτε 
τιθῶσι(ν) 


Imper. 
τίθει 
, 
τιθέτω 
/ 
τίθετε 
τιθέτωσαν 


Infin. 
τιθέναι 


Part. 
τιθείς, τιθεῖσα, τιθέν 


Pres. M. P. 


Indic: 
τίθεμαι 
τίθεσαι 

, 
τίθεται 
τιθέμεθα 
τίθεσθε 
τίθενται 


Subj. 
(τιθῶμαι 
τιθῇ 
τιθῆται 
τιθώμεθα 
τιθῆσθε 
τιθῶνται) 


Imper. 
τίθεσο 
τιθέσθω 
τίθεσθε 


τιθέσθωσαν 


Infin. 
τίθεσθαι 


Part. 


The present system of τίθημι, stem θε-, I place, 


Imperf. M.P 
Indic. 


ἐτιθέμεθα 
ἐτίθεσθε 

9 , 
ἐτίθεντο 


τιθέμενος, ἡ, ον 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


247 


599. The aorist active and middle of τίθημι, 1 place, 
is as follows: 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


1 
2 
3. 
i 
2 
3 


ΟΡ ΟΝ καὶ 


oo δῷ o9 bo 


Aor. Act. 
Indic. 
ἔθηκα 
ἔθηκας 
ἔθηκε(ν) 
ἐθήκαμεν 
ἐθήκατε 
ἔθηκαν 


θῆτε᾽ 
θῶσι(ν) 


Imper. 
θές 
θέτω 
θέτε 
θέτωσαν 


Infin. 
θεῖναι 


Part. 
θείς, θεῖσα, θέν 


Aor. Mid. 
Indic. 

ἐθέμην 
ἔθου 
ἔθετο 
ἐθέμεθα 
ἔθεσθε 
ἔθεντο 


θῆσθε 


θῶνται 


Imper. 
θοῦ 


θέσθω 
θέσθε" 
θέσθωσαν 
Infin: 
θέσθαι 


Part. 
θέμενος, ἡ, ov 


248 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


600. The present system of ἵστημι, stem ora-, I cause 
to stand, is as follows: 


Sing. 1. 
ΩΣ 
3. 
Plurals 
2 


Sing. 2. 
ἜΝ, 
Plur. 2. 
3: 


Pres. Act. 
Indic. Indic. 
ἵστημι ἵστην 
ἵστης ἵστης 
ἵστησι() ἵστη 
ἵσταμεν ἵσταμεν 
ἵστατε ἵστατε 
ἱστᾶσι() ἵὥὕἵστασαν 


Subj. 
ἱστῶ 


Imper. 
ἵστη 
ἱστάτω 
ἵστατε 
ἱστάτωσαν 


Infin. 


ἱστάναι 


Part. 
« ἤ « “Ὁ « , 
ἱστὰς, ἰστασα, ἱστὰν 


Imperf. Act. 


Pres. M. P. Imperf. M. P. 
Indic. Indic. 
ἵσταμαι 
ἵστασαι 
ἵσταται 
ἱστάμεθα 
ἵστασθε 
ἵστανται 


ἱστάμην 
ἵστασο 
ἵστατο 

« ͵ 
ἱστάμεθα 
ἵστασθε 
ἵσταντο 


Subj. 
(ἱστῶμαι 
ἱστῇ 
ἱστῆται 
Ψ ͵ 
ἱστώμεθα 
ἱστῆσθε 
ἱστῶνται) 

Imper. 
ἵστασο 
« , 
ἱστάσθω 
Cy, 
ἵστασθε 
ἱστάσθωσαν 


Infin. 
ev 
ἵστασθαι 


Part. 
ἱστάμενος, ἢ, OV 


᾿ ὦ 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 249 


601. The second aorist active of ἵστημι, I cause to 
stand (intransitive in second aorist), and of γινώσκω, stem 
yvo-, I know, is as follows: 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


1 
2 
3. 
1 
2 
3 


Wm ὦ bd 


Indic. 
ἔστην 
ἔστης 
ἔστη 
ἔστημεν 
ἔστητε 
ἔστησαν 


Subj. 
στῶ 
στῆς 
στῇ 
στῶμεν 
στῆτε 
στῶσι(ν) 


Imper. 
στῆθι 
στήτω 
στῆτε 
στήτωσαν 


Infin. 
στῆναι 


Part. 
στάς, στᾶσα. στάν 


Indic. 
ἔγνων 
ἔγνως 
ἔγνω 
ἔγνωμεν 
ἔγνωτε 
ἔγνωσαν 


Subj. 

γνῶ 

γνῷς 

γνῷ (yvot) 
γνῶμεν 
γνῶτε 
γνῶσι(ν) 


Imper. 
γνῶθι 
γνώτω 
γνῶτε 
γνώτωσαν 


Infin. 
γνῶναι 


Part. 
γνούς, yvovaa, yvov 


io eae 


OP a aie ET oe Oe. Ay ee ΕἾ ΒΥ. 


250 


602. The conjugation of εἰμί, I am, is as follows: 


Sing. 1. 
25 
3. 
Plur. 1. 
2. 
oe 


Sing. 1. 
2 
ὃ. 
ΡΙα,. 1. 
Pip 
3. 


Sing. 2. 
Θ᾽ 
Plur. 2. 
3. 


Present 
Indic. Indic. 
εἰμί ἤμην 
εἶ ἧς 
ἐστί(υ) nv 
ἐσμέν ἦμεν 
ἐστέ ἦτε 
εἰσί(ν) ἦσαν 


tot 


Ν᾿ TM 
S & (αὶ 
= 


0 Se 


Eo So 
aa 
CaN 

ἘἘ 

~~ 


ἔστε 
ἔστωσαν 


Infin. 
εἶναι 


Part. 
ὦν, οὖσα, ὄν . 


Imperf. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Future 
Indic. 
ἔσομαι 
éon 
ἔσται 

9 if 
ἐσόμεθα 
9 ‘ 
ἔσεσθε 
ἔσονται 


a eyes vt - - 
Pat, |e aoe oe 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 251 


Conjugation of οἶδα 


603. The conjugation of οἶδα, I know, is as follows: 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


ὧδ τ μι WN μαὶ 


Go τὸ 99.8 


Perfect Pluperfect 
Indic. Indic. 

οἶδα ἤδειν 
οἶδας ἤδεις 
οἷδε(ν) ἤδει 
οἴδαμεν ἤδειμεν 
οἴδατε ἤδειτε 
οἴδασι(ν) ἤδεισαν 
Subj. 

εἰδῶ 

εἰδῇς 

εἰδῇ 

εἰδῶμεν 

εἰδῆτε 

εἰδῶσι(ν) 
Imper. 

ἴσθι 

ἴστω 

ἴστε 

ἴστωσαν 

Infin. 

εἰδέναι 

᾿ Part. 


εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, εἰδός. 


VOCABULARIES 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


250 


I. Greek-English Vocabulary 


(The enclosing of a verb form in parenthesis indicates 
that no part of the tense system indicated by that form 


occurs in the New Testament. 


tions.) 


ἀγαθός, ἡ, ov, adj., 61, 568, 
good. 

ἀγαπάω, ἀγαπήσω, ἠγάπησα, 
ἠγάπηκα, ἠγάπημαι, HYa- 
πήθην, 313, 1 love. 

ἀγάπη, ἡ, love. 

ἄγγελος, 6, A Messenger, an 
angel. 

ἁγιάζω, (ἁγιάσω), ἡγίασα, 
(ἡγίακα ), ἡγίασμαι, ἡγιά- 
σθην, I sanctify, I conse- 
crate. 

ἅγιος, a, ov, adj., holy. 

ἀγρός, ὁ, a field. 

ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον, (jxa. ), 
ἦγμαι, ἤχθην, I lead. 

ἀδελφός, ὁ, α brother. 

αἷμα, αἵματος, τό, blood. 

αἴρω, ἀρῶ, ἦρα, ἦρκα, ἦρμαι, 
ἤρθην, I take up, I take 
away. 

αἰτέω, αἰτήσω, ἤτησα, ἤτηκα, 
(ἤτημαι ), ἠτήθην, I ask (in 
the sense of request), I ask 
for. 

αἰών, αἰῶνος, ὁ, an age. 

αἰώνιος, ov, adj., 481, eternal. 


> , 


ἀκήκοα, 2nd perf. of ἀκούω. 


> 


ἀκολουθέω, ἀκολουθήσω, ἠκο- 


The figures refer to sec- 


λούθησα, ἠκολούθηκα, I fol- 
low (takes the dative). 

ἀκούω, ἀκούσω, ἤκουσα, ἀκή- 
Koa, (ἤκουσμαι ), ἠκούσθην, 
I hear (takes the genitive 
or the accusative). 

ἀλήθεια, ἡ, 538, 555, truth. 

ἀληθής, és, adj., 360-362, 
572, true. 

ἀλλά; conj., but (a stronger 
adversative than δέ). 

ἀλλήλων, ols, ous, reciprocal 
pron., 343, of each other, 
of one another. 

ἄλλος, ἡ, 0, other, another. 

ἁμαρτάνω, ἁμαρτήσω, ἡμάρ- 
τῆσα OY ἥμαρτον, ἡμάρτη- 
κα, (ἡμάρτημαι), (ἡμαρ- 
τήθηνῚ, I sin. 

ἁμαρτία, ἡ, α sin, sin. 

ἁμαρτωλός, ὁ, ἃ sinner. 

ἄν, a particle which cannot 
be translated separately 
into English, 400, 536, 
Bp Le 

ἀναβαίνω, I go up. 

ἀναβλέπω, I look up, 1 re- 
ceive my sight. 

ἀναλαμβάνω, I take up. 


256 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἀνεῳχθῆναι, aor. pass. infin. 
of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, 565,a man (as 
distinguished from women 
and children). 

ἄνθρωπος, ὁ, 31-33, 557, a 
man (as distinguished from 
other beings). 

ἀνίστημι, 1 cause to rise; in 
the intransitive tenses (see 
under ἵστημι) and in the 
middle, I stand up, I arise. 

ἀνοίγω, ἀνοίξω, ἀνέῳξα ΟΥ̓ 
ἤνοιξα ΟΥ ἠνέῳξα, ἀνέῳγα, 
ἀνέῳγμαι ΟΥ ἠνέῳγμαι ΟΥ̓ 
ἤνοιγμαι, ἀνεῴχθην or ἠνοί- 
xOnv or ἠνεῴχθην, I open. 

ἀντί, prep. with gen., in- 
stead of. 

ἀπέθανον, 2nd. aor. of ἀπο- 
θνήσκω. 

ἀπέρχομαι, I go away, I de- 
part. 


9 , 


ἀπέστειλα, aor.of ἀποστέλλω. 


bd Ud 


ἀπό, prep. with gen., from. 

ἀποδίδωμι, 1 give back, I give 
what 1s owed or promised, 
I pay. 

ἀποθνήσκω, ἀποθανοῦμαι, ἀπέ- 
θανον, I die. 

ἀποκρίνομαι, (ἀποκρινοῦμαι) 
ἀπεκρινάμην, (ἀποκέκριμαι), 
ἀπεκρίθην, dep. with pas- 
sive forms and rarely with 


middle forms, J answer 
(takes the dative). 

ἀποκτείνω, ἀποκτενῶ, ἀπέ- 
κτεινα, ΒΟΥ. PASS. ἀπεκτάν- 
θην, I kill. 

ἀπόλλυμι OF ἀπολλύω, ἀπ- 
ολέσω ΟΥ ἀπολῶ, ἀπώλεσα, 
ἀπόλωλα, 2nd aor. mid. 
ἀπωλόμην, 533, 1 destroy; 
middle, I perish. 

ἀπολύω, I release, I dismiss. 

ἀποστέλλω, ἀποστελῶ, ἀπέ- 
στειλα, ἀπέσταλκα, ἀπέ- 
σταλμαι, ἀπεστάλην, IL send 
(with a commission). 

ἀπόστολος, ὁ, an apostle. 

ἄρτος, ὁ, a prece of bread, a 
loaf, bread. 

ἀρχή, ἡ, a beginning. 

ἀρχιερεύς, ἀρχιερέως, ὁ, ὦ 
chief priest, a high priest. 

ἄρχω, ἄρξω, ἦρξα, 1 rule 
(takes the genitive); mid- 
dle, 344 (footnote), I be- 
gun. 

ἄρχων, ἄρχοντος, ὃ, 211, 
559, a ruler. 

ἀρῶ, fut. of αἴρω. 

αὐτός, ἡ, ὁ, 96f., 105 f., 581, 
pron., himself, herself, 2t- 
self, same ; personal pron., 
he, she, τί. 

ἀφίημι, ἀφήσω, ἀφῆκα, ἀφ- 
etka, ἀφεῖμαι, (ἀφείθην), 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 257 


531f., I let go, I leave, I 
permit ; I forgive (with the 
accusative of the sin or 
debt forgiven and the dat- 
ive of the person forgiven). 


βαίνω, βήσομαι, ἔβην, βέβηκα, 
164, 588, I go (occurs in 
the New Testament only 
in composition). 

βάλλω, βαλῶ, ἔβαλον, βέ- 
βληκα, βέβλημαι, ἐβλήθην, 
I throw, I cast, I put. 

βαπτίζω, βαπτίσω, ἐβάπτισα, 
(βεβάπτικα), βεβάπτισμαι, 
ἐβαπτίσθην, I baptize. 

βασιλεία, ἡ, a kingdom. 

βασιλεύς, βασιλέως, ὁ, 355- 
357, 564, α king. 

βήσομαι, fut. of βαίνω. 

βιβλίον, τό, α book. 

βλέπω, βλέψω, ἔβλεψα, I see 
(βλέπω is the common 
word for J see in the pres- 
ent and imperfect. In the 
other tenses the principal 
parts given under ὁράω 
are commonly used). 


Γαλιλαία, ἡ, Galilee. 

γάρ, conj., postpositive, for. 

γέγονα, 2nd perf. of γίνομαι. 

γενήσομαι, fut. of γίνομαι. 

γεννάω, γεννήσω, ἔγέννησα, 
γεγέννηκα,γεγέννημαι, ἔγεν- 


νήθην, I beget; also of the 
mother, I bear. | 
γένος, γένους, τό, 352-354, 
562, a race, a kind. 
γῆ, ἡ, 403, earth, a land. 
γίνομαι, “γενήσομαι, ἔγενόμην, 
γέγονα, γεγένημαι, ἐγενη- 
θην, 424 (footnote 2), 550, 
552 f., 1 become, I come 
anto being, I appear in his- 
tory, 1 am; γίνεται, i 
comes to pass, it happens. 
γινώσκω, γνώσομαι, ἔγνων, 
ἔγνωκα, [ἔγνωσμαι, ἐγνώ- 
σθην, 510 f., 601,1 know. 
γνώσομαι, fut. of ywookw. 
γράμμα, γράμματος, τό, a 
letter. 
γραμματεύς, Ὑραμματέως, ὃ, 
α scribe. ' 
γραφή, ἡ, 56-58, 555, a writ- 
ing,a Scripture ; αἱ γραφαί, 
the Scriptures. 
γράφω, ypayw, ἔγραψα, γέ- 
Ύραφα, γέγραμμαι, ἔγρά- 
φην, 206, 258, I write. 
γυνή, γυναικός, ἡ, 566, α 
woman. 


δαιμόνιον, τό, α demon. 

δέ, con]., postpositive, 90 f., 
and, but. 

δεῖ, impersonal verb, 292, zt 
28 necessary. 

δείκνυμι or δεικνύω, δείξω, 


208 


ἔδειξα, (δέδειχα), δέδειγμαι, 
ἐδείχθην, 533, 1 show. 

δέχομαι, δέξομαι, ἐδεξάμην, 
δέδεγμαι, ἐδέχθην, I receive. 

δηλόω, δηλώσω, ἐδήλωσα, 
(δεδήλωκα), (δεδήλωμαι), 
ἐδηλώθην, 317-322, 592, 
I make manifest, I show. 

διά, prep. with gen., through; 
with acc., on account of. 

διδάσκαλος, ὁ, @ teacher. 

διδάσκω, διδάξω, ἐδίδαξα, 
(δεδίδαχα), (δεδίδαγμαι), 
ἐδιδάχθην, I teach. 

δίδωμι, δώσω, ἔδωκα, δέδωκα, 
δέδομαι, ἐδόθην, 482-515, 
596 f., I give. 

διέρχομαι, I go through. 

δίκαιος, a, ov, adj., 62, 570, 
righteous. 

δικαιοσύνη, ἡ, Tighteousness. 

διώκω, διώξω, ἐδίωξα, δεδίωκα, 
δεδίωγμαι, ἐδιώχθην, [ pur- 
sue, I persecute. 

δοκέω, (δόξω), ἔδοξα, I think, 
I seem. 

δόξα, ἡ, 54 f., 555, glory. 

δοξάζω, δοξάσω, ἐδόξασα, 
(δεδόξακα), δεδόξασμαι, ἐδο- 
ξάσθην, I glorify. 

δοῦλος, ὁ, 38, 557, a slave, a 
servant. 

δύναμαι, δυνήσομαι, (δεδύνη- 
μαι), ἠδυνήθην or ἤδυνά- 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


σθην, imperfect ἐδυνάμην or 

ἠδυνάμην, 538, I am able. 
δύναμις, δυνάμεως, ἡ, Power. 
δύο, 373, dat. δυσί(ν), two. 
δῶρον, τό, 41 f., 558, a gift. 


ἐάν, conditional particle, 
with subj., 288, af; ἐὰν μή, 
unless, except. 

éav, particle, sometimes used 
with the subj. in the 
same way as ἄν. 

ἑαυτοῦ, js, ov, reflexive pron., 
339 f., 586, of himself, of 
herself, of itself. 

ἔβαλον, 2nd. aor. of βάλλω. 

ἐβλήθην, aor. pass. of βάλλω. 

ἐγγίζω, ἔγγιῶ or ἐγγίσω, 
ἤγγισα, ἤγγικα, 1 come 
near. 

ἐγγύς, adv., near. 

ἐγείρω, ἔγερῶ, ἤγειρα, ---, ἔγή- 
γερμαι, ἠγέρθην, I ratse up; 
in passive sometimes as de- 
ponent, I rise. 

ἐγενήθην, aor. pass. (in form) 
of γίνομαι. 

ἐγενόμην, 2nd. aor. of γίνομαι. 

ἔγνωκα, perf. of γινώσκω. 

ἔγνων, 2nd. aor. of γινώσκω. 

ἐγνώσθην, aor. pass. of y- 
νώσκω. 

ἔγώ, ἐμοῦ or μου, pron., 94, 

681, L. De 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ἐδιδάχθην, aor. pass. of διδά- 
oKW. 

ἔθνος, ἔθνους, τό, a nation. 

εἰ, particle, 288-290, 2f , wheth- 
er; et un, unless, except. 

εἶδον, 2nd. aor. of ὁράω. 

εἰμί, ἔσομαι, 580, 602, 1 am. 

εἶπον, 2nd. aor. of λέγω 
(sometimes regarded as 
second aorist of φημί). 

εἰρήνη, ἡ, peace. 

eis, prep. with acc., into. 

eis, μία, ἕν, numeral, 371, 
587, one. 

εἰσέρχομαι, L goin, 1 enter. 


ἐκ (before vowels ἐξ), prep. | 


with gen., out of. 

ἐκβάλλω, I throw out, I cast 
out. 

ἐκεῖ, adv., there. 

ἐκεῖνος, 7,0, pron., 103 f., that. 

ἐκηρύχθην, aor. pass. of κη- 
ρύσσω. 

ἐκκλησία, ἡ, α church. 

ἐκπορεύομαι, L go out. 

ἔλαβον, 2nd.aor. of λαμβάνω. 

ἐλεέω, ἐλεήσω, ἠλέησα, (ἠλέ- 
nka), ἠλέημαι, ἠλεήθην, 
I pity, I have mercy on. 

ἐλεύσομαι, fut. of ἔρχομαι. 

ἐλήλυθα, 2nd. perf. of épxo- 
μαι. 

ἐλήμφθην, aor. pass. of λαμ- 
βάνω. 


259 


ἐλπίζω, ἐλπίσω, ἤλπισα,ἤλπι- 


κα, 1 hope. 

ἐλπίς, ἐλπίδος, ἡ, 211, 560, a 
hope. 

ἐμαυτοῦ, ys, refl. pron., 337, 
585, of myself. 

ἔμεινα, aor. of μένω. 

ἐμός, 7, Ov, POSSessive 86]., 
473{., my, belonging to me. 

ἔμπροσθεν, adv., an front, be- 
fore, an the presence of. 

ἐν, prep. with dat., an. 

ἐντολή, ἡ, α commandment. 

ἐνώπιον, adv., an front of, in 
the presence of, before. 

ἐξ, form of ἐκ used before 
vowels. 

e£,indeclinable, numeral, 812. 

ἐξέρχομαι, I go out, I come out. 

ἔξεστι(ν), impersonal verb, 
292, τέ rs lawful. 

ἐξουσία, ἡ, authority. 

ἔξω, adv., outside. 

ἕξω, fut. of ἔχω. 

ἑόρακα or ἑώρακα, perf. of 
ὁράω. 

ἐπαγγελία, ἡ, & promise. 

ἐπερωτάω, I ask a question of, 
1 question, I interrogate. 

ἐπί, prep. with gen., over, 
on, at the time of; with 
dat., on the basis of, at; 
with acc., on, to, against. 

ἐπιστρέφω, ἐπιστρέψω, ἐπέ- 


PRED GAS ee, 


900 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


στρεψα, (ἐπέστροφα), ἐπέ- 
στραμμαι, ἐπεστράφην, 1 
turn to, I turn, I return. 

ἐπιτίθημι, I place upon, I put 
upon, I lay upon (with ace. 
of the thing placed and 
dat. of the person or thing 
upon which it is placed). 

ἔργον, τό, α work. 

ἔρημος, ἡ, α desert. 

ἐρρέθην or ἐρρήθην, aor. pass. 
of λέγω (or φημὶ). 

ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, ἦλθον, 
ἐλήλυθα, 1 come, I go. 

ἐρῶ, fut. of λέγω (sometimes 
regarded as future of φημί). 

ἐρωτάω, ἐρωτήσω, ἠρώτησα, 
(ἠρώτηκα), (ἠρώτημαι), 
ἠρωτήθην, I ask (originally 
of asking a question, but 
in the New Testament 
also of asking in the sense 
of requesting). 

ἐσθίω, φάγομαι, ἔφαγον, I eat. 

ἔσομαι, fut. of εἰμί. 

ἔσχατος, ἡ, ον, adj., last. 

ἔσχον, 2nd. aor. of ἔχω. 

ἕτερος, a, ον, 538, other, an- 
other, different. 

ἔτι, adv., stall, yet. 

ἑτοιμάζω, ἑτοιμάσω,ἡτοίμασα, 
ἡτοίμακα, ἡτοίμασμαι, ἡτοι- 
μάσθην, I prepare. 

ἔτος, ἔτους, τό, α year. 


ev- Verbs beginning thus are 
sometimes augmented to 
nu- and sometimes not. 

εὐαγγελίζω, (εὐαγγελίσω), 
εὐηγγέλισα, (εὐηγγέλικα), 
εὐηγγέλισμαι,εὐηγγελίσθην, 
in middle often deponent, 
I preach the gospel, I evan- 
gelize (with acc. of the 
message preached and acc. 
or dat. of the persons to 
whom it is preached). 

εὐαγγέλιον, τό, a gospel. 

εὐθέως, adv., z«nmediately, 
straightway. 

εὐθύς, adv., zwmmediately, 
straightway. 

εὐλογέω, εὐλογήσω, εὐλόγησα, 
εὐλόγηκα, εὐλόγημαι, εὐλο- 
γήθην, I bless. 

εὑρίσκω, εὑρήσω, εὗρον, εὕρηκα, 
(εὕρημαι), εὑρέθην, I find. 

εὐχαριστέω, εὐχαριστήσω, 
εὐχαρίστησα, (εὐχαρίστη- 
κα), (εὐχαρίστημαι), εὐχα- 
ριστήθην, I give thanks 

ἔφαγον, 2nd. aor. of ἐσθίω. 

ἔφη, imperf. act. indic., 3rd 
pers. sing., of φημί. 

ἐχθρός, ὁ, an enemy. 

ἔχω, ἕξω, ἔσχον, ἔσχηκα, im- 
perf. εἶχον, I have. 

ἑώρακα or ἑόρακα, perf. of 
ὁράω. 


ee. ae 
ἌΣ..." 
ἐὰν 

| "i 


ΝΕ: 


' 
t 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 261 


ἕως, adv. with gen., up to, 
until; conj., 536, while, 
until. 


Caw, (now or ζήσομαι, ἔζησα, 
1 live. 

ζητέω, ζητήσω, ἐζήτησα, I 
seek. ; 


ζωή, ἡ, life. 


ἤ, conj., 462, than, or. 

ἤγαγον, 2nd. aor. of ἄγω. 

ἠγέρθην, aor. pass. of ἐγείρω. 

ἤδη, adv., already. 

#Oedov, imperf’ of θέλω. 

ἦλθον, 2nd. aor. of ἔρχομαι. 

ἡμέρα, ἡ, α day. 

ἡμέτερος, A, OV, POSS. 86].; 
47 3f., our, belonging to us. 

ἤνεγκα or ἤνεγκον, aor. of 
φέρω. 

ἠνέχθην, aor. pass. of φέρω. 

ἦρα, aor. of αἴρω. 


θάλασσα, ἡ, a lake, a sea. 

θάνατος, ὁ, death. 

θαυμάζω, θαυμάσομαι, ἐθαύ-- 
μασα, (τεθαύμακα), aor. 
pass. ἐθαυμάσθην, 1 wonder, 
I marvel, I wonder at. 

θέλημα, θελήματος, τό, a will. 

θέλω, θελήσω, ἠθέλησα, im- 
perf. ἤθελον, 364, I wish, 

‘Tam willing. 

θεός, ὁ, God. 


θεραπεύω, θεραπεύσω, ἐθερά- 


πευσα, (τεθεράπευκα), τε- 
θεράπευμαι, ἐθεραπεύθην, I 
heal. 

θεωρέω, θεωρήσω, ἐθεώρησα, 
I behold. 

θνήσκω, used only in perf. 
τέθνηκα, I am dead, and 
in pluperfect. 


᾿Ιάκωβος, 6, James. 

ἴδιος, a, ov, adj., one’s own. 

idov, particle, behold! lo! 

ἰδών, ἰδοῦσα, ἰδόν, 2nd. aor. 
part. of ὁράω. 

ἱερεύς, ἱερέως, ὁ, a priest. 

ἱερόν, τό, a temple (compare 
ναός). 

᾿Ιησοῦς, -οῦὔ, ὁ, 310, Jesus. 

ἱκανός, ἡ, Ov, sufficient, able, 
considerable. 

ἱμάτιον, τό, a garment. 

iva, conj., 286 f., 477, an or- 
der that (with subj.). 

᾿Ιουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew. 

ἵστημι, στήσω, ἔστησα, 2nd. 
aor. ἔστην, ἕστηκα, (ἕστα- 
μαι), ἐστάθην, 539-548, 
600 f., 1 cause to stand 
(in pres., imperf., fut., 
Ist. aor., and in passive); 
I stand (in 2nd. aor. and 
in perf.) 

ἰσχυρότερος, a, ov, adj., 
stronger (comparative de- 


202 


gree of 
strong). 


ἰσχυρός, a, Ov, 


καθαρός, a, ov, adj., pure, 
clean. | 

κάθημαι, dep., 1 svt. 

καθώς, adv., just as. 

kal, 146, and, even, also; καί 
ee καί, 148, δοί... απα. 

καιρός, ὃ, atime, an appointed 
time. 

κακός, 9, Ov, adj., bad, evil. 

καλέω, καλέσω, ἐκάλεσα, κέ- 
κληκα, κέκλημαι, ἐκλήθην, 
323, I call. 

καλός, ἡ, Ov, adj., 
beautiful. 

καλῶς, adv., well. 

καρδία, ἡ, a heart. 

καρπός, ὁ, α fruit. 

κατά, prep. with gen., down 
from, against; with acc., 
according to, throughout, 
during. 

καταβαίνω, I go down. 

κατέρχομαι, 1 come down, I 
go down. 

κελεύω, (κελεύσω), ἐκέλευσα, 
I command. 

κηρύσσω, Knpvéw, ἐκήρυξα, 
(κεκήρυχα), (κεκήρυγμαι), 
ἐκηρύχθην, I proclaim, I 
preach. 

κόσμος, ὁ, a world, the world. 

'κρείσσων, ov, adj., better (used 


good, 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


as comparative degree of 
ἀγαθός). 
κρίνω, κρινῷ, ἔκρινα, κέκρικα, 
κέκριμαι, ἐκρίθην, 328-331, 
594 f., I judge. 
κρίσις, κρίσεως, ἡ, agudgment. 
κύριος, ὁ, α lord, the Lord. 
κώμη, ἡ, a village. 


λαλέω, λαλήσω, ἐλάλησα, 
λελάληκα, λελάλημαι, ἐλα- 
λήθην, I speak. 

λαμβάνω, λήμψομαι, ἔλαβον, 
εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι, ἐλήμῴφθην, 
I take, I receive. 

λαός, ὁ, a people. 

λέγω, ἐρῶ, εἶπον, εἴρηκα, 
εἴρημαι, ἐρρέθην or ἐρρήθην, 
I say. 

λείπω, λείψω, ἔλιπον, (λέ- 
λοιπαὶ), λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, 
190-194, 296, 593, I leave. 

λήμψομαι, fut. of λαμβάνω. 

λίθος, ὁ, a stone. 

λόγος, ὁ, 557, a word. 

λοιπός, 7, OV, 84]., remaining; 
οἱ λοιποί, the rest. 

λύω, λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα, 
λέλυμαι, ἐἔλύθην, 589, 1 
loose, I destroy, I break. 


μαθητής, ὁ, 556, a disciple. 
μακάριος, a, ov, adj., blessed. 


“μᾶλλον, adv., more, rather. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


UapTUPEW, μαρτυρήσω, éuap- 
TUpnoa, μεμαρτύρηκα, με- 
μαρτύρημαι, ἐμαρτυρήθην, 
I bear witness, I witness. 

μαρτυρία, ἡ, a witnessing, a 
witness. 

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, adj., 
910, 575, great. 

μείζων, ov, adj., 459, 461, 
571, greater (comparative 
degree of μέγας). 


«μέλλω, μελλήσω, imperfect 


τς 


ἤμελλον Or ἔμελλον, L am 
about (to do something), 
I am going (to do some- 
thing). 

μέν. . . δέ, on the one hand 

. on the other (used in 

contrasts. Often it is bet- 
ter. to leave the μέν un- 
translated and translate 
the δέ by but). 

μένω, μενῶ, ἔμεινα, μεμένηκα, 
I remain, I abide. 

pera, prep. with gen., with; 
with acc., after. 


“μετανοέω, μετανοήσω, μετε- 


νόησα, I repent. 

μή, negative adverb, 256, 
478 f{., not (used with 
moods other than the in- 
dicative). 


Ὑ μή, con]., 475 f., lest, in order 


that not (with the subj.). 


263 


μηδέ, and not, nor; μηδέ. .. 
μηδέ, nerther .. . nor. 

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, 372, no 
one, nothing. 


“μηκέτι, adv., no longer. 
“μήποτε, lest perchance (with 


the subj.). 

μήτηρ, μητρός, ἡ, 565, a 
mother. 

μικρός, &, ov, adj., 62, 569, 
little, small. 


“μνημεῖον, τό, a tomb. 


μόνον, adv., only. 
μόνος, ἡ, ov, adj., alone, only. 
μυστήριον, τό, a mystery. 


aos, 6, a temple (the temple 


building itself, as distin- 
guished from ἱερόν, the 
whole sacred precinct). 


vvexpos, a, ov, adj., dead. 


νόμος, ὁ, a law, the Law. 

νῦν, adv., now. 

νύξ, νυκτός, ἡ, 211, 559, a 
night. 


ὁ, ἡ, τό, definite article, 63, 
567, the. 

ὁδός, ἡ, @ way, a road. 

οἶδα, 2nd perf. used as pres- 
ent, 549, 603, I know. 

οἰκία, ἡ, ἃ house. 

οἶκος, ὁ, α house. 


“ὀλίγος, ἡ; ον, adj., few, little. 


ὅλος, ἡ, ον, adj., whole, all. 


204 


ὅμοιος, a, ον, adj., like, sim- 
lar. 

ὄνομα, ὀνόματος, TO, 222, 561, 
a name. 

ὅπου, adv., where (relative). 

ὅπως, conj., 7 order that 
(with subj.). 

ὁράω, ὄψομαι, εἶδον, ἑώρακα ΟΥ̓ 
ἑόρακα, (ὦμμαι), ὦφθην, 
2nd aor. part. ἰδών, 186 
(footnote), 249-251, I see 
(in the present ὁράω is 
less common than βλέπω). 

ὄρος, ὄρους, τό, α mountain. 

ὅς, 7, 6, rel. pron., 395-399, 
583, who, which. 

ὅσος, ὅση, ὅσον, rel. adj., as 
great as, as much as, as 
many as. 


ὕστις, ἥτις, ὅτι, indef. rel. 
pron., whoever, whichever, 
whatever. 


ὅταν, whenever (with subj.). 

ὅτε, adv., when. 

ὅτι, conj., 3807f., 522 (foot- 
note 5), that, because. 

ov (οὐκ before vowels, οὐχ 
before the rough breath- 
ing), adv., 118, 256, not. 

οὐδέ, conj., and not, nor, not 
even, 147; ov6€.. . οὐδέ, 
neither ... nor 

οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, 372, no 
one, nothing. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


οὐκ, form of οὐ used before 
vowels and diphthongs 
that have smooth breath- 
ing. 

οὐκέτι, adv., no longer. 

οὖν, conj., postpositive, ac- 
cordingly, therefore. 

οὔπω, adv., not yet. 

οὐρανός, ὁ, heaven. 


νοὖς, ὠτός, TO, aN ear. 


οὔτε, con]., 535, and not; οὔτε 
...ovTe, neither ... nor. 

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demon- 
strative pron., 102, 104, 
582, this. 


Οὕτως, adv., thus, so. 


οὐχ, form of οὐ used before 

vowels and diphthongs 
that have rough breath- 
ing. 


“ὀφείλω, I owe, I ought. 


ὀφθαλμός, ὁ, an eye. 

ὄχλος, ὁ, @ crowd, a multi; 
tude. 

ὄψομαι, fut. of ὁράω. 


παιδίον, τό, a little child. 

πάλιν, adv., again. 

παρά, prep. with gen., from; 
with dat., beside, an the 
presence of; with acc., 
alongside of. 

παραβολή, ἡ, a parable. 


“παραγίνομαι, I become pres- 


ent, I arrive, I come. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


παραδίδωμι, 1 deliver over, I 
hand over. 

.«παρακαλέω, I exhort, I en- 
courage, I beseech, I com- 
fort. 

παραλαμβάνω, I receive, I 
take along. 

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, adj., 365- 
369, 573, all, every. 
νπάσχω, (πείσομαι), ἔπαθον, 
πέπονθα, I suffer, I experi- 
ence. 


~ 


iP πατρὸς, ὁ, 000, ἃ 
father. 

“πείθω, πείσω, ἔπεισα, πέποιθα, 
πέπεισμαι, ἐπείσθην, I per- 
suade. 

. πειράζω, (πειράσω), éreipaca, 
(πεπείρακα), πεπείρασμαι, 
ἐπειράσθην, I tempt, I at- 
tempt. 

πέμπω, πέμψω, ἔπεμψα, (πέ- 

πομφα), (πέπεμμαι), ἐπέμ- 
φθην, I send. 

πεντακισχίλιοι, fie 
thousand. 

πέντε, indeclinable, five. 
περί, prep. with gen., con- 

cerning, about; with acc., 
around. 

ATEPLTATEW, περιπατήσω, πε- 

ο΄ ριεπάτησα, περιπεπάτηκα, * 
walk, 

Ilérpos, 6, Peter. 


OL, wis 


ols, πολλή, πολύ, 


265 


πίνω, πίομαι, ἔπιον, πέπωκα, 
(πέπομαι), ἐπόθην, I drink. 

πίπτω, πεσοῦμαι, ἔπεσον OF 
ἔπεσα, πέπτωκα, [1 fall. 

πιστεύω, πιστεύσω, πίστευσα, 
πεπίστευκα, πεπίστευμαι, 
ἐπιστεύθην, 184, I belzeve 
(takes the dat.); πιστεύω 
eis with acc., I believe in 
or on. 


πίστις, πίστεως, ἡ, farth. 

πιστός, ἡ, OV, adj., farthful. 

\TNeiwy, ov, adj., more (com- 
parative degree of πολύς). 


πλῆθος, πλήθους, τό, a multe- 


tude. 

πλήρης, es (Sometimes inde- 
clinable), adj., full. 

πληρόω, πληρώσω, ἐπλήρωσα, 
πεπλήρωκα, πεπλήρωμαι, 
ἐπληρώθην, I fill, I fulfil. 

πλοῖον, τό, α boat. 

πνεῦμα, πνεύματος, τό, α 8Ρ17- 
at, the Spirit. 

ποιέω, ποιήσω, ἐποίησα, πεποί- 
ηκα, πεποίημαι, (ἐποιήθην), 
I do, I make. 

vrotos, a, ov, what sort of? 

πόλις, πόλεως, ἡ, 349-351, 
563, α city. 

adj., 

370, 574, much, great; in 

plur., many. 


“πονηρός, &, ov, adj., evil. 


266 


πορεύομαι, πορεύσομαι, ἔπο- 
ρευσάμην, πεπόρευμαι, ἔπο- 
ρεύθην, dep., usually with 
passive forms, 1 go. 

πότε, interrog. adv., when? 

ποτέ, particle, enclitic, at 
some time; μήποτε, lest per- 
chance. 

ποῦ, interrog. adv., where? 

πούς, ποδός, ὁ, α foot. 

πρό, prep. with gen., before. 

πρός, prep. with acc., to. 

προσέρχομαι, I come to, I go 
to (with dat.). 

προσεύχομαι, προσεύξομαι, 
προσηυξάμην, 1 pray. 

προσκυνέω, προσκυνήσω, προσ- 
εκύνησα, I worship (usu- 
ally with dat., Sometimes 
with acc.). 

προσφέρω, I bring to (with 
ace. of the thing brought 
and dat. of the person to 
whom it is brought). 

πρόσωπον, τό, a face, a counte- 
nance. 

προφήτης, ov, ὃ, 79, 556, a 
prophet. 

πρῶτος, ἢ, ov, adj., first. 

πῦρ, πυρός, τό, a fire. 

«πῶς, interrog. adv., how? 


ῥηθείς, ῥηθεῖσα, ῥηθέν, aor. 
pass. part. of λέγω (φημί). 
pea, ῥήματος, τό, a word. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


σάββατον, τό, (plural σάβ- 
Bara, σαββάτων, σάβ- 
βασι(ν), sometimes with 
singular meaning), a sab- 
bath. 

σἀρξ, σαρκός, ἡ, 219, 221, 
559, flesh. 

σεαυτοῦ, ἧς, reflexive pron., 
338, 585, of thyself. 


\ONMELOV, TO, A Sign. 


Σίμων, Σίμωνος, ὁ, Simon. 


σκότος, σκότους, τό, darkness. 


σός, 7, Ov, possessive adj., 
473{.,thy, belonging to thee. 

σοφία, ἡ, wisdom. 

σπείρω, (σπερῶ), ἔσπειρα, 
---- ἔσπαρμαι, ἐσπάρην, 
I sow. 

στάδιον, τό, a stadium, a fur- 
long. 


νσταυρόω, σταυρώσω, ἐσταύ- 


ρωσα, (ἐσταὐρωκα), ἐσταύ- 
ρωμαι, ἐσταυρώθην, LI cru- 
cify. 
στόμα, στόματος, τό, amouth. 
στρατιώτης, ov, 6, a soldier. 
ov, cov, pron., 95, 581, thou. 
σύν, prep. with dat., with. 


«συνάγω, I gather together. 


συναγωγή, ἡ, a synagogue. 

συνέρχομαι, L come together, 
I go together. 

σχῶ, 2nd. aor. 
ἔχω. 


subj. of 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


σώζω, σώσω, ἔσωσα, TETWKA, » 


σέσω(σ)μαι, ἐσώθην, I save. 
γσῶμα, σώματος, τό, a body. 
σωτηρία, ἡ, salvation. 


τέθνηκα, perf. οἵ θνήσκω. 
τέκνον, τό, α child. 
wréooapes, τέσσαρα, 588, four. 
LTNPEW, τηρήσω, ἐτήρησα, TE- 
THPNKA, τετήρημαι, ἐτη- 
"ρήθην, I keep. 
νέίθημι, θήσω, ἔθηκα, τέθεικα, 
τέθειμαι, ἐτέθην, 524-530, 
598 {., I place, I put. 
ντιμάω, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα, (τε- 
Tinka), τετίμημαι, (ἔτι- 
μήθην), 317-321, 590, I 
value, I honor. 
τίς, τί, interrog. pron., 385- 
387, 390 f., 584, who? 
which? what? 
Tis, τι, indef. pron., 388- 
390, 584, someone, some- 
thing, a certain one, a cer- 
tain thing. 
ντόπος, ὁ, a place. 
νΤότε, adv., then. 
τρεῖς, τρία, 588, three. 
οὐ τυφλός, ὁ, a blind man. 


vvbwp, ὕδατος, τό, water. 
υἱός, ὁ, 39 f., 557, a son. 
ὑμέτερος, a, OV, POssessive 
ο΄ adj., 473 £., your, belong- 
ing to you. 


267 


ὑπάγω, I go away, I depart. 


ς 


ν“ὕπέρ, prep. with gen., in be- 


half of; with acc., above. 

ὑπό, prep. with gen., by (of 
the agent); with acc., un- 
der. 


-trocTpépw, ὑποστρέψω, ὑπέ- 


στρεψα, I return. 


ygavepow, φανερώσω, ἐφανέ- 


ρωσα, (πεφανέρωκα), πεφα- 
νέρωμαι, ἐφανερώθην, I 
make manifest, I manifest. 

Φαρισαῖος, ὁ, a Pharisee. 

φέρω, οἴσω, ἤνεγκα, OY Hvey- 
κον, ἐνήνοχα, (ἐνἠνεγμαι), 
ἠνέχθην, I bear, I carry, I 
bring. 

φημί, ἐρῶ, εἶπον, εἴρηκα, 
εἴρημαι, ἐρρέθην or ἐρρήθην, 
I say (the principal parts 
may also be regarded as 
belonging to λέγω, which 
is far commoner in the 
present than is φημί). 

φιλέω, (φιλήσω), ἐφίλησα, 
πεφίληκα, (πεφίλημαι), 
(ἐφιλήθην), 317-321, 591, 
1 love. 

φοβέομαι, aor. ἐφοβήθην, dep. 
with pass. forms, 1 fear. 


“φυλακή, ἡ, α guard, a prison. 


φωνή, ἡ, & voice, a sound. 
Pas, φωτός, τό, a light. 


268 


χαίρω, χαρήσομαι, 2nd. aor. 
pass. ἐχάρην, I rejoice. 

χαρά, ἡ, Joy. 

χάρις, χάριτος, ἡ, 347 f., 
560, grace. 

χείρ, χειρός, ἡ, 566, a hand. 

Χριστός, ὁ, Messiah, Christ. 

χρόνος, ὁ, a period of time, 
tume. 

χώρα, ἡ, a country. 

χωρίς, adv. with gen., apart 

from. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


ψυχῆ, ἡ, a life, a soul. 


"ὧδε, adv., hither, here. 


ὦν, οὖσα, ov, pres. part. of 
εἰμί. 

ὥρα, ἡ, 48-51, 555, an hour. 

ws, adv. and conj., as (with 
numerals, about). 

ὥσπερ, 535, just as. 

ὥστε, 534 f., so that (often fol- 
lowed by accus. andinfin.). 

ὥφθην, aor. pass of dpaw. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


269 


II. English-Greek Vocabulary 


A certain one, τίς; a certain 
thing, neuter of τις. 

Abide, μένω. 

Able, ἱκανός. 

Able, am, δύναμαι. 

About, περί with gen. 

About (with numerals), ὡς. 

Above, ὑπέρ with acc. : 

According to, κατά with acc. 

Accordingly, οὖν. 

After, μετά with acc. 

Again, πάλιν. 

Against, ἐπί with acc., κατά 
with gen. | 

Age, αἰών. 

All, πᾶς, ὅλος. 

Alongside of, παρά with acc. 

Already, ἤδη. 

Also, kat. 

Am, εἰμί, γίνομαι. 

Am able, δύναμαι. 

Am about (to do something), 
μέλλω. 

Am going (to do something), 
μέλλω. 

Am willing, θέλω. 

And, καί, δέ. 

And not, οὐδέ, οὔτε, μηδέ. 

Angel, ἄγγελος. 

Another, ἄλλος, ἕτερος. 

Answer, ἀποκρίνομαι. 

Apart from, χωρίς. 


Apostle, ἀπόστολος. 

Appear in.history, γίνομαι. 

Around, περί with acc. 

Arrive, παραγίνομαι. 

AS, ὡς. ' 

As great as, as much as, as 
many as, ὅσος. 

Ask (a question), ἐρωτάω. 

Ask (request), αἰτέω, ἐρωτάω. 

Ask a question of, ἐπερωτάω. 

At, ἐπί with dat. 

At some time, ποτέ. 

At the time of, ἐπί with gen. 

Authority, ἐξουσία. 


Bad, κακός. 

Baptize, βαπτίζω. 

Be, εἰμί. 

Bear, φέρω; of a mother, 
γεννάω. 

Bear witness, μαρτυρέω. 

Beautiful, καλός. 

Because, ὅτι. 

Become, γίνομαι. 

Become present, παραγίνο- 
μαι. 

Before, πρό with gen. 

Beget, yevvaw. 

Begin, middle of apxw. 

Beginning, ἀρχή. 

Behold (verb), θεωρέω. 

Behold! (particle), ἰδού. 

Believe, πιστεύω. 


270 


Beseech, παρακαλέω. 

Beside, παρά with dat. 

Better, κρείσσων. 

Bless, εὐλογέω. 

Blessed, μακάριος. 

Blind man, τυφλός. 

Blood, αἷμα. 

Boat, πλοῖον. 

Body, σῶμα. 

Book, βιβλίον. 

ΒΟ ἀπ καὶ τ 10 Kae: 

Bread, ἄρτος. 

Break, λύω. 

Bring, φέρω. 

Bring to, προσφέρω. 

Brother, ἀδελφός. 

But, ἀλλά, δέ. 

By (of the agent), ὑπό with 
gen. 

By means of, expressed by 
the simple dat. 

By the side of, παρά with 
dat. 


Call, καλέω. 

Carry, φέρω. 

Cast, βάλλω. 

Cast out, ἐκβάλλω. 

Cause to rise, ἀνίστημι (in 
the transitive tenses). 

Cause to stand, ἵστημι (in 
the transitive tenses). 

Chief priest, ἀρχιερεύς. 

Child, τέκνον ; little child, 


παιδίον. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Christ, Χριστός. 

Church, ἐκκλησία. 

City, πόλις. 

Clean, καθαρός. 

Come, ἔρχομαι. 

Come’ down, κατέρχομαι. 
Come into being, γίνομαι. 
Come near, ἐγγίζω. 
Come out, ἐξέρχομαι. 
Come to, προσέρχομαι. 
Come to pass, γίνομαι. 
Come together, συνέρχομαι. 
Comfort, παρακαλέω. 
Command, κελεύω. 
Commandment, ἐντολή. 
Concerning, περί with gen. 
Consecrate, ἁγιάζω. 
Considerable, ἱκανός. 
Countenance, πρόσωπον. 
Country, xwpa. 

Crowd, ὄχλος. 

Crucify, σταυρόω. 


Darkness, σκότος. 

Day, ἡμέρα. 

Dead, νεκρός. 

Dead, am, perfect of θνήσκω. 
Death, θάνατος. 

Deliver over, παραδίδωμι. 
Demon, δαιμόνιον. 

Depart, ὑπάγω, ἀπέρχομαι. 
Desert, ἔρημος. 

Destroy, ἀπόλλυμι, λύω. 
Die, ἀποθνήσκω. 

Disciple, μαθητής. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 271 


Dismiss, ἀπολύω. 

Do, ποιέω. 

Down from, κατά with gen. 
Drink, πίνω. 

During, κατά with acc. 


Each other, ἀλλήλων. 
Ear, οὖς. 

Earth, γῆ. 

Eat, ἐσθίω. 

Encourage, παρακαλέω. 
Enemy, ἐχθρός. 

Enter, εἰσέρχομαι. 
Eternal, αἰώνιος. 
Evangelize, εὐαγγελίζω. 
Even, καί. 

Evil, πονηρός, κακός. 
Except, εἰ μή, ἐὰν μή. 
Exhort, παρακαλέω. 
Experience, πάσχω. 
Eye, ὀφθαλμός. 


Face, πρόσωπον. 
Faith, πίστις. 
Faithful, πιστός. 
Fall, πίπτω. 
Father, πατήρ. 
Fear, φοβέομαι. 
Few, ὀλίγος. 
Field, ἀγρός. 
Fill, πληρόω. 
Find, εὑρίσκω. 
Fire, πῦρ. 

First, πρῶτος. 
Five, πέντε. 


Five thousand, πεντακισχί- 
Avot. 

Flesh, σάρξ. 

Follow, ἀκολουθέω. 

Foot, πούς. 

For (prep.), use dat. 

For (conj.), yap. 

Forgive, ἀφίημι. 

Four, τέσσαρες. 

From, ἀπό with gen., παρά 
with gen. 

Fulfil, πληρόω. 

Full, πλήρης. 

Furlong, στάδιον. 


Galilee, Γαλιλαία. 

Garment, ἱμάτιον. 

Gather together, συνάγω. 

Gift, δῶρον. 

Give, δίδωμι. 

Give thanks, εὐχαριστέω. 

Give what is owed or prom- 
ised, ἀποδίδωμι. 

Glorify, δοξάζω. 

Glory, δόξα. 

Go, πορεύομαι, ἔρχομαι, Bat- 
VO). 

Go away, ὑπάγω, ἀπερχομαι. 

Go down, καταβαίνω, κατέρ- 
χομαι. 

Go in, εἰσέρχομαι. 

Go out, ἐκπορεύομαι, ἐξέρχο- 
μαι. 

Go through, διέρχομαι. 

Go to, προσέρχομαι. 


212 


Go together, συνέρχομαι. 
Go up, ἀναβαίνω. 
God, θεός. 

Good, ἀγαθός, καλός. 
Gospel, εὐαγγέλιον ; preach 
the gospel, εὐαγγελίζω. 

Grace, χάρις. 
Great, μέγας, πολύς. 
Greater, μείζων. 
Guard, φυλακή. 


Hand, χείρ. 

Hand over, παραδίδωμι. 

Have, éxw. 

Have mercy upon, ἐλεέω. 

He, αὐτός. 

Heal, θεραπεύω. 

Hear, ἀκούω. 

Heart, καρδία. 

Heaven, οὐρανός. 

Herself (intensive) , feminine 
of αὐτός. 

Herself (reflexive), feminine 
of ἑαυτοῦ. 

High priest, ἀρχιερεύς. 

Himself (intensive), αὐτός. 

Himself, (reflexive), ἑαυτοῦ. 

Holy, ἅγιος. 

Honor (verb), τιμάω. 

Hope (noun), ἐλπίς. 

Hope (verb), ἐλπίζω. 

Hour, wpa. 

House, οἶκος, οἰκία. 

How?, πῶς. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


I, ἐγώ. 

If, εἰ, ἐάν. 

Immediately, εὐθέως, εὐθύς. 

In, ἐν with dat. 

In behalf of, ὑπέρ with gen. 

In front of, ἐνώπιον. 

In order that, ἵνα, ὅπως. 

In order that not, ἵνα μή, μή. 
In the presence οὗ, παρά with 
dat., ἐνώπιον, ἔμπροσθεν. 

Instead of, ἀντί with gen. 

Interrogate, ἐπερωτάω. 

Into, eis with acc. 

It, neuter of αὐτός (also oft- 
en other genders). 

It is lawful, é£eo7u(v). 

Itself (intensive), neuter of 
αὐτός (also often other gen- 
ders). ἣ 

Itself (reflexive), neuter of 
ἑαυτοῦ (also often other 
genders). 


James, ᾿Ιάκωβος. 
Jesus, ᾿Ιησοῦς. 

Jew, ᾿Ιουδαῖος. 

Joy, xapa. 

Judge, κρίνω. 
Judgment, κρίσις. 
Just as, καθώς, ὥσπερ. 


Keep, τηρέω. 
Kall, ἀποκτείνω. 
Kind, γένος. 
King, βασιλεύς. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Kingdom, βασιλεία. 
Know, γινώσκω, οἶδα. 


Lake, θάλασσα. 

Land, γῆ. 

Last, ἔσχατος. 

Law, νόμος. 

Lawful, it is, ἔξεστι(). 
Lay down (one’s life) , τίθημι. 
Lay upon, ἐπιτίθημι. 
Lead, ἄγω. 

Leave, ἀφίημι, λείπω. 
Lest, μή. 

Lest perchance, μήποτε. 
Let go, ἀφίημι. 

Letter, γράμμα. 

Life, ζωή. 

Light, φῶς. 

Like, ὅμοιος. 

Little, μικρός, ὀλίγος. 
Little child, παιδίον. 
Live, (dw. 

Lo!, ἰδού. 

Loaf, ἄρτος. 

Look up, ἀναβλέπω. 
Loose, Avw. 

Lord, κύριος. 

Love (noun), ἀγάπη. 
Love (verb), ἀγαπάω, φιλέω. 


Make, zrovéw. 
Make manifest, 
δηλόω. 


φανερόω, 


Man, ἄνθρωπος, ἀνήρ. 


273 


Manifest (verb), φανερόω, 
δηλόω. 
Manifest, 
δηλόω. 


make, davepdw, 


Many, πολύς (in plural). 
Marvel, θαυμάζω. 

Mercy, have—upon, ἐλεέω. 
Messenger, ἄγγελος. 
Messiah, Χριστός. 
Mountain, dpos. 

More (adj.), πλείων. 

More (adv.), μᾶλλον. 
Mother, μήτηρ. 

Mouth, στόμα. 

Much, πολύς. 

Multitude, πλῆθος, ὄχλος. 
My, ἐμός. 

Myself (reflexive), ἐμαυτοῦ. 
Mystery, μυστήριον. 


Name, ὄνομα. 

Nation, ἔθνος. 

Near (adv), ἐγγύς. 

Near, come, ἐγγίζω. 

Necessary, it is, δεῖ. 

Neither... -. nor, οὐδέποτ 
οὐδέ, μηδέ... μηδέ, οὔτε 
serene ΟὔΤΕ: 

Night, νύξ. 

No longer, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι. 

No one, nothing, οὐδείς, μη- 
dels. 

Not, ov, μή. 

Not yet, οὔπω. 


974 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


On, ἐπί with gen. 

On account of, διά with acc. 

On the basis of, ἐπί with dat. 

On the one hand....onthe 
other, wev.... δέ. 

One another, ἀλλήλων. 

One’s own, ἴδιος. 

Only (adj.), μόνος. 

Only (adv.), μόνον. 

Open, ἀνοίγω. 


Other, ἄλλος, ἕτερος. 
Ought, ὀφείλω. 

Our, ἡμέτερος. 

Out οἵ, ἐκ with gen. 
Outside, ἔξω. 

Over, ἐπί with gen. 
Owe, ὀφείλω. 

Own, one’s, ἴδιος. 


Parable, παραβολή. 

Pay (verb), ἀποδίδωμι. 
Peace, εἰρήνη. 

People, λαός. 

Perish, middle of ἀπόλλυμι. 
Permit, ἀφίημι. 

Persecute, διώκω. 
Persuade, πείθω. 


- Pharisee, Φαρισαῖος. 


Piece of bread, ἄρτος. 
Pity, ἐλεέω. 

Place (noun), τόπος. 
Place (verb), τίθημι. 
Power, δύναμις. 

Pray, προσεύχομαι. 


Preach, κηρύσσω ; preach the 
gospel, εὐαγγελίζω. 
Prepare, ἑτοιμάζω. 
Priest, ἱερεύς. 
Prison, φυλακή. 
Proclaim, κηρύσσω. 
Promise, ἐπαγγελία. 
Prophet, προφήτης. 
Pure, καθαρός. 
Pursue, διώκω. 
Put, τίθημι, βάλλω. 
Put upon, ἐπιτίθημι. 


Question (verb), ἐπερωτάω. 


Race, γένος. 

Raise up, ἐγείρω. 

Rather, μᾶλλον. 

Receive, δέχομαι, παραλαμ- 
βάνω, λαμβάνω. 

Receive one’s sight, ἀνα- 
βλέπω. 

Rejoice, χαίρω. 

Release, ἀπολύω. 

Remain, μένω. 

Remaining, λοιπός. 

Repent, μετανοέω. 

Rest, the, see under λοιπός. 

Return, ὑποστρέφω. 

Righteous, δίκαιος. 

Righteousness, δικαιοσύνη. 

Rise, ἀνίστημι (in the in- 
transitive tenses and in 
the middle), passive of 
evel pw. 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 275 


Road, ὁδός. 
Rule, dpxw. 
Ruler, ἄρχων. 


Sabbath, σάββατον. 
Salvation, σωτηρία. 
Same, αὐτός. 
Sanctify, ἁγιάζω. 
Save, σὠζω. 

Say, λέγω, φημί. 
Scribe, γραμματεύς. 
Scripture, γραφή. 
Sea, θάλασσα. 

See, βλέπω, ὁράω. 
Seek, ζητέω. 

Seem, δοκέω. 


Send, πέμπω, ἀποστέλλω. 


Servant, δοῦλος.’ 

She, feminine of αὐτός. 
Show, δείκνυμι, δηλόω.. 
Sign, σημεῖον. 

Similar, ὅμοιος. 

Simon, Σίμων. 

Sin (noun), ἁμαρτία. 
Sin (verb), ἁμαρτάνω. 
Sinner, ἁμαρτωλός. 
Sit, κάθημαι. 

Slave, δοῦλος. 

Small, μικρός. 

So, οὕτως. 

So that, ὥστε. 

Soldier, στρατιώτης. 
Some one, 71s. 


Something, neuter of τις. 


Sow, σπείρω. 

Speak, λαλέω. 

Spirit, πνεῦμα. 

Stadium, στάδιον. 

Stand, ἵστημι (in the in- 
transitive tenses). 

Still, ἔτι. 

Stone, λίθος. 

Straightway, εὐθέως, εὐθύς. 

Stronger, ἰσχυρότερος. 

Suffer, πάσχω. 

Sufficient, ἱκανός. 

Synagogue, συναγωγή. 


Take, λαμβάνω. 

Take along, παραλαμβάνω. 

Take up, αἴρω, ἀναλαμβάνω. 

Teach, διδάσκω. 

Teacher, διδάσκαλος. 

Temple, ἱερόν (the whole sa- 
cred precinct), vads (the 
temple building itself). 

Tempt, πειράζω. 

Than, %. 

Thanks, give, εὐχαριστέω. 

That (conj.), ὅτι. 

That (demonstrative), éxet- 
Vos. 

The, ὁ. 

Then, τότε. 

There, ἐκεῖ. 

Therefore, ovv. 

Think, δοκέω. 

This, οὗτος. 

Thou, σύ. 


276 


Three, τρεῖς. 

Through, διά with gen. 
Throughout, xara with acc. 
Throw, βάλλω. 

Throw out, ἐκβάλλω. 

Thus, οὕτως. 


Thy, σός. 
Thyself (reflexive), σεαυτοῦ. 
Time, καιρός (appointed 


time), χρόνος (period of 
time). 

To, πρός with acc., ἐπί with 
acc.; indirect object, dat. 
without prep. 

Together, gather, συνάγω. 

Tomb, μνημεῖον. 

True, ἀληθής, 

Truth, ἀλήθεια. 

Turn to, turn, ἐπιστρέφω. 

Two, dvo. 


Under, ὑπό with acc. 
Unless, εἰ μή, ἐὰν μή. 
Until, ἕως. 

Unto, πρός with acc. 
Up to, ἕως with gen. 


Value, τιμάω. 
Village, κώμη. 
Voice, φωνή. 


Walk, περιπατέω. 
Water, ὕδωρ. 

Way, 000s. 

Well, καλῶς. 

What?, neuter of Tis. 


ΝΟ DE ST ACM BIND 3G Roel. 


What sort of?, ποῖος. 

Whatever, neuter of ὅστις. 

When (relative), ὅτε. 

When?, πότε. 

Whenever, ὅταν. 

Where (relative), ὅπου. 

Where?, ποῦ. 

Which (relative), és. 

Which?, τίς. 

Whichever, ὅστις. 

While, éws. 

Who (relative), ds. 

Who?, τίς. ‘ 

Whoever, ὅστις. 

Whole, ὅλος. 

Will, θέλημα. 

Willing, am, θέλω. 

Wisdom, σοφία. 

Wish, θέλω. 

With, μετά with gen., σύν 
with dat. 

Witness (verb), μαρτυρέω. 

Witness (noun), μαρτυρία. 

Woman, γυνή. , 

Wonder, wonder at, davyuatw. 

Word, λόγος, ῥῆμα. 

World, κόσμος. 

Work, ἔργον. 

Worship, προσκυνέω. 

Write, γράφω. 

Writing, γραφή. 


Year, ἔτος. 
Yet, ἔτι. 
Your, ὑμέτερος. 


INDEX 


(Figures refer to sections, except when preceded by p. or pp.) 


Abstract nouns, with the article, 
76 (footnote 2). 

Accent: pronunciation, 9; general 
rules, 11; rule of verb accent, 13; 
rule of noun accent, 14; accent 
in gen. and dat. of Ist and 2nd 
decl., 40, 58; in gen. plur. of 
1st decl. nouns, 51; in enclitics 
and words coming before en- 
clitics, 92f.; in compound verbs, 
132; in ἔστι(᾽), 134; in mono- 
syllables of 3rd decl., 221; in 
gen. plur. fem. of participles, 
228; in aor. pass. part., 263; in 
contract syllables, 316 (iii); in 
gen. sing. and plur. of nouns in 
-is, -εως, 350; in 2nd aor. 
imper., 419; in perf. act. infin., 

_ 427; in perf. middle and pass. 
infin. and part., 443f.; in pres. 
infin. of δίδωμι, 499; in pres. 
part. of δίδωμι, 502; in ὥστε 
etc., 535. 

Accusative case: for direct object, 
34; after prepositions expressing 
motion toward, 82; as subj. of 
infin., 304, 306, 534; acc. of 
extent of space and time, 382; of 
specification, 470. 

Active voice: conjugation, see 
under Verbs; use, 17. 

Adjectives : declension summarized, 
568-575; declension of adjs. in 
-os,- (a), -ov, 61f.; of adjs. in 
-ns, -ες, 360-362; of irregular 


adjs., 365-370; of μείζων, etc., 
459-461; of adjs. of two termina- 
tions, 481; attributive and pred- 
icate uses of adjs., 68-74, 381; 
substantive use, 75; comparison, 
456-461; possessive adjs., 473f. 

Adverbs, 463-465. 

Aeolic dialects, p. 1. 

Agreement: of verb with subj., 29, 
145; of adj. with noun, 66; of 
pronoun with antecedent, 97 
(3), 397, 399, 454 (footnote 2). 

Alexander the Great, pp. 1f. 

Alphabet, 11. 

Antepenult, definition, 10. 

Aorist tense: formation and conju- 
gation, see under Verbs; dis- 
tinction between first and second 
aor., 167; use of aor. tense in 
indic., 122, 168-170; in parti- 
ciples, 254, 520; in subj., 283; 
in infin., 299; in imperative, 
420. 

Apostolic Fathers, pp. 3f. 

Aramaic language, p. 4. 

Article: declension, 63-65, 567— 
use: in general, 26, 67; with 
attributive adj., 68-70, 72; with 
θεός, 77; in connection with 
οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος, 104; with 
participle, 234f., 255; with infin., 
301-305 ,468; with proper names, 
309; with prepositional phrases, 
376f., 380f.; followed by a 
noun in the genitive, 378f., 381; 


280 


as pronoun before μέν and δέ 
518f., 522 (footnote) omit- 
ted: with κόσμος, 209 (foot- 
note 1); in phrases such as 
ἐν νυκτί, 224 (footnote 1), ἐν 
σαρκί, 240 (footnote 1), and 
am’ ἀρχῆς, 537 (footnote 7); 
omitted with θεός, πνεῦμα, 
κόσμος, and the like, 311. 

Articular Infinitive, 468. 

Athens, pp. 1-3. 

Attic Greek, pp. 1-5. 

Attraction, of case of rel. pron. to 
that of its antecedent, 398. 

Attribulive use: of adjectives, 68- 
70, 72, 74, 381; of participles, 
234, 255, 264; of prepositional 
phrases, 376, 380f. 

Augment, 124-126, 172, 245; of 
compound verbs, 131; in 2nd 
aor:, 191, 251. 


Blass-Debrunner, Ὁ. x. 
Breathings, 5. 
Burton, E. D., p. x. 


Capps, Edward, p. x. 

Case endings, 33; in 2nd decl., 33; 
in Ist decl., 49; in 8rd decl., 
212-217, 350. 

Cases, 30; with various verbs, 119. 

Classical Greek, pp. vii, x, 1. 

Comparison, of adjs., 456-461; 
expressed by gen. or by 7, 462. 

Compound verbs, 117. 

Conditional relative clauses, 400f. 

Conditions, 288-290; contrary to 
fact, 551. 

Conjunctions: uses of καί and 
οὐδέ, 146-148. 

Contract verbs: pres. system, 317- 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


320, 590-592; principal parts, 
321, 438, 448. 
Contraction, rules, 314-316. 


Dative case: for indirect object, 
etc., 36; with prepositions ex- 
pressing rest in a place, 82; with 
ἀποκρίνομαι, 108; of means or 
instrument, 115; with πιστεύω, 
184; of respect, 469; of time, 471. 

Declensions, 25. 

Deliberative questions, 394. 

Demonstrative pronouns: declen- 
sion, 102f.; use, 104, 106. 

Demosthenes, pp. 1, 4. 

Deponent verbs, 116, 144, 207f.; 
verbs deponent in some tenses 
but not in others, 164; fut. of 
ἀκούω, 554 (footnote 1). 

Dialects, pp. 1-3. 

Diphthongs, 4. 

Direct discourse, sometimes in- 
troduced by ὅτι, 522 (footnote 
5). 

Doric dialects, p. 1. 

Double negative, p. 176 (footnote). 


Elision, 97 (footnote 1); 120 (foot- 
note 1 in Greek exercise). 

Enclitics, 92f., 98. 

Exercises, remarks on, p. ix. 

Exhorting, etc., construction after 
words denoting, 477. 

Extent of space and time, expressed 
by acc., 382. 


Fearing, construction after words 
denoting, 475. 

Feminine nouns in -os of 2nd 
decl., 60. 

First Aorist: formation and con- 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 281 


jugation, see under Verbs; Ist 
aor. endings on 2nd aor. stems, 
186 (footnote 1), 424 (footnote 
1), 521. 

First Declension : summarized, 555- 
556; nouns in -a@ and -7, 47-58; 
nouns in -7s, 79. 

_ Future conditions, 288-290. 

Future tense: conjugation, see 
under Verbs. 


Gender, 28; of 2nd-decl. nouns in 


“Ἂς, 28, 60; of Ist-decl. nouns in 


-a and -7, 47, in -ns, 78; of 
3rd-decl. nouns, 218-220; of 
3rd-decl. nouns in -ya, 222, 
in -us, -€WS, 351, in -Os, -ους, 
354, in -€US, -εως, 357. 

Genitive case: expressing posses- 
sion, etc., 35; with prepositions 
expressing separation, 82; with 
ὑπό expressing agent, 114f.; 
with ἀκούω and ἄρχω, 108; 
translation of gen. into English, 
120 (footnote 1 in English ex- 
ercise); gen. absolute, 266; gen. 
after the article, 378f., 381; gen. 
in the predicate after εἰμί, p.175 
(footnote 1); of comparison, 462; 
with adverbs of place, 466; gen. 
of time, 467; gen. of articular 
infin. expressing purpose, 468. 

Ginn and Company, 314 (footnote 
1). 

Grimm-Thayer, Ὁ. Χ. 


Hebrew language, pp. 4-6. 
Hebrews, Epistle to the, p. 6. 
Hortatory subjunctive, 285. 
Howard, W. F., 186 (footnote 1), 


Ρ. xX. 
Huddilston, J. H., p. x. 


Illustrations, remarks on, pp. 7f. 

Imperative mood: formation and 
conjugation, see under Verbs; 
use, 420-422. 

Imperfect tense: formation and 
conjugation, see under Verbs; 
use, 122. 

Indefinite pronoun: declension, 
d88f., 584; use, 390. 

Indirect discourse, 287, 306-308. 

Indirect questions, 392f. 

Infinitive: formation, see under 
Verbs; use in general, 298-300; 
with article, 301-305; in indirect 
discourse, 306; pres. infin. with 
ἄρχομαι, 344 (footnote 1);infin. 
after WoT € expressing result, 534. 

Interrogatwe pronoun: declension, 
385-387, 584; use, 390f. 

Tonic dialects, p. 1. 


Koiné, the, pp. 2-6. 


Labial mutes, 156. 

Lingual mutes, 156. 

Liquid verbs: conjugation, see 
under Verbs ; definition, 326. 

Literature, language of, pp. 4f. 


Macedonia, pp. 1f. 

Middle voice: conjugation, see 
under Verbs; use, 109. 

Monosyllabic nouns of 3rd decl., 
22]. 

Mood, 17. 

Moulton, J. H., 186 (footnote 1), 
553 (footnote 1), p. x. 

Moulton and Geden, p. x. 

Movable ν, 44, 129, 214. 


Negatives, 256, 284, 300, 422; in 
questions, 478f.; double nega- 
tive, p. 176 (footnote 1). 


282 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Neuter plural subject, may have 
verb in sing., 145. 

Nominative case: for subject, 34; 
in predicate after εἰμί, 99, after 
γίνομαι, 108. 

Nouns: declension, see under 
First Declension, etc.; nouns 
have gender, number and case, 
27. 

Number, 29; expressed by endings 
of verb, 19. 

Numerals, 371-375, 587. 

Nunn, H. P. V., pp. ixf. 


Optative mood, 550. 
Order of words, 43. 


Palatal mutes, 156. 

Papyrt, non-literary, pp. 4-6. 

Paradigms, collected, 555-603. 

Participles—formation and declen- 
sion: pres. act., 226-229, 231, 
576; pres. middle and pass., 
230f.; aor. act., 242-245, 577; 
aor. middle, 246-248; 2nd aor. 
act., 249-252; 2nd aor. middle, 
253; perf. act., 4338f., 578; 
perf. middle and pass., 444; 
aor. pass., 259-263, 579; pres. 
part. of εἰμί, 580—use: in 
general, 232, 239; tense, 233, 
254, 264, 520; attributive use, 
234, 255; substantive use, 235, 
237f., 255; various uses summa- 
rized, 236, 265; use of aor. part., 
254f., 264, 520; part. in genitive 
absolute, 266; use of perf. pass. 
part., 452 (3). 

Paul, Epistles of, p. 6. 

Penult, definition, 10. 

Perfect tense: formation and con- 


jugation, see under Verbs; use, 
451f. 

Person, expressed by endings of 
verbs, 19. 

Personal endings: in the primary 
tenses, act., 20, middle, 111; 
in the secondary tenses, active, 
127, 173, 199, middle, 139, 


180; in the pres. act., 20; in the ἡ 


pres. middle and pass., 111; in 
the imperf. act., 127f.; in the 
imperf. middle and pass., 139- 
142; in the pres. system, 151; 
in the fut. act. and middle, 152; 
in the Ist aor. act., 173-177; in 
the Ist aor. middle, 180-182; 
in the 2nd aor. act. and middle, 
192; in the aor. pass., 199; in 
the fut. pass., 200; in the sub- 
junctive mood, 269; in the perf. 
act., 431; in the perf. middle 
and pass., 447. 

Personal pronouns: declension, 
94-96, 581; use, 97, 106, 474. 

Philip of Macedon, p. 1. 

Plato, pp. 1, 4. 

Pluperfect tense, 450, 589. 

Plutarch, p. 4. 

Position; of the negative, 118; of 
Kal, 146. 

Possessive adjectives, 473f. 

Postpositives, 91. 

Predicate use and position of 
adjectives, 68f., 71-74, 381. 

Prepositions, 80-88; prefixed to 
verbs, 117. 

Prepositional phrases: used attri- 
butively, 376, 380f.; used sub- 
stantively, 377, 380f. 

Present General conditions, 288 
(footnote 1). 


ΤᾺ 
cm 
‘ 
rh 
; 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


Present tense: formation and con- 
jugation, see under Verbs; use, 
21, 118; pres. infin. with 
ἄρχομαι, 344 (footnote 1). 

Primary tenses, 20 (with foot- 
note), 111, 152, 431. 


Principal Parts of verbs, 159, 197, 
205; see also under Verbs. 


Proclitics, 64, 84. 

Prohibition, how expressed, 422. 

Pronouns—declension: personal 
pronouns, 94-96, 581; demon- 
strative, 102f., 582; reflexive, 
337-347, 585f.; reciprocal, 343; 
interrogative, 385-387, 584; in- 
definite, 388f., 584; relative, 
395f., 583—use : in general, 97; 
personal pronouns,. 97, 474; 
demonstrative, 104; αὐτός, 105; 
summary of various uses, 106; 
use of reflexive pronouns, 342; 
interrogative, 390f.; indefinite, 
390; relative, 397-399. 

Proper names, 309-311. 

Prose, Ὁ. 1. 

Punctuation, 7. 

Purpose, how expressed: ἵνα or 
ὅπως With subjunctive, 286f., 
455; ets with articular infin., 
303; genitive of articular infin., 
468; μή or ἵνα μή with subj. in 
negative clauses of purpose, 476. 


Quantity, of vowels and diph- 
thongs, 3, 10; of 8] -αἰ and -ou, 
10. 

Questions : indirect, 392f.; delibera- 
tive, 394; expecting a negative 
answer, 478f.; expecting a posi- 
tive answer, 479. 


283 


Reading aloud, 8. 

Reciprocal pronoun, 3438. 

Reduplication: in perf. tense, 480, 
435-437, 446; in pres. system of 
verbs in μι, 491, 525, 530, 532, 
540. 

Reflexive pronouns: declension, 
337-341, 585f.; use, 342. 

Relative pronoun: declension, 395f., 
583; use, 397-399, 454 (footnote 
2). 

Respect, expressed by dat., 469. 

Result, expressed by @orewith ace. 
and infin., 534. 

Robertson, A. T., p. x. 

Roman Empire, p. 2. 

Rome, Greek language at, p. 2. 


Second Aorist: formation and con- 
jugation, see under Verbs; 2nd 
aor. stems with 1st aor. endings, 
186 (footnote 1), 424 (footnote 
1), 521; 2nd aor. pass., 206. 

Second Declension: summarized, 
557f.; nouns in -o$, 31-33, 38-40; 
nouns in -op, 41f. 

Second Perfect, 440; 2nd perf. act. 
system of οἷδα (used as pres.), 
549, 603. 

Second Person, ambiguity as to 
number in English, 22. 

Secondary tenses, 20 (footnote 1), 
124, 127, 139, 172f., 199. 

Semitic languages, pp. 4-6. 

Septuagint, pp. 3-6. 

Sparta, p. 1. 

Specification, expressed by accusa- 
tive, 470. 


Stem: of verbs, 20; of nouns, 33; 
of 2nd-decl. nouns, 33; of Ist- 


284 


decl. nouns, 49; of 3rd-decl 
nouns, 213. 

Subjunctive mood — conjugation, 
see under Verbs—use: tenses in 
the subj., 283; negative of the 
subj., 284; subj. in exhortations, 
285; in purpose clauses with ἵνα, 
ὅπως or μή, 286f., 455, 476; 
in various uses with ἵνα, 477; 
in future conditions, 288-290; 
in deliberative questions, 394; 
in conditional relative clauses, 
400f.; aor. subj. in prohibitions, 
422: subj. with ἕως, 536; with 
μή after words expressing fear, 
475. 

Substantive use: of adjs., 75; of 
participles, 235, 255, 264; of 
prepositional phrases, 377, 380f.; 
of the gen., 378f., 381. 


Tense, 17; in participles, 233, 254, 
264, 520; in subj., 283; in infin., 
299, 344 (footnote 1); in indirect 
discourse, 307f.; in imperative, 
420, 422. 

Tenses, primary and secondary, 20 
(with footnote 1); see also 
Primary tenses and Secondary 
tenses. 

“That,” various uses 
English word, 238. 
“There,’ preparatory use of the 

English word, 336. 

Third Declension: summarized, 
559-566; various nouns, with 
general remarks on _ endings, 
etc., 211-221, 346; neuter nouns 
in -μα, 222; χάρις, 347f.; fem. 
nouns in -ls, -εως, 349-351; 
neuter nouns in -os, τοὺς, 352- 


of the 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 


354; masc. nouns in -€us, -€Ws, 
355-357. | 

Thucydides, pp. 1, 4. 

Time when, expressed by dat., 
471; by prepositional phrases, 
472. 

Time within which, expressed by 
gen., 467. 


Ultima, definition, 10. 


Variable vowel, 20, 111, 128, 140, 
153, 192, 200, 269, 327. 

Verbs, conjugation—regular verb: 
summarized, 589; pres. act. 
indic., 18, 20; pres. middle 
indic., 110f.; pres. pass. indic., 
112; imperf. act. indic., 123-130; 
imperf. middle and pass. indic., 
137-148; fut. act. and middle 
indic., 151-155; 1st aor. act. 
and middle indic., 167, 171-182; 
aor. pass. and fut. pass. indic., 
197-202; pres. act., middle and 
pass. participles, 226-231, 576; 
aor. act. and middle participles, 
242-248, 577; aor. pass. parti- 
ciple, 259-263, 579; the sub- 
junctive mood, 269-281; the 
infinitive, 293-295; the impera- 
tive mood, 404-415; the perf. 
system, 426-434; the perf. mid- 
dle system, 442-447; the pluperf. 
tense, 450; review, 453—second 
aorist system : summarized, 593; 
2nd aor. act. and middle indic., 
187-194; participles, 249-253; 
subj., 278; infin., 296; impera- 
tive, 416-419; 2nd aor. stems 
with ist aor. endings, 186 
(footnote 1), 424 (footnote 1), 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 285 


521—second aorist passive, 206 
—second perfect, 440; of οἶδα 
(used as present), 549, 603; 2nd 
perf. participle of ἵστημι,548--- 
future and first aorist systems 
of liquid verbs, 326-334, 594f.— 
verbs in μι: present and aorist 
systems summarized, 596-601; 
general remarks, 482f.; δίδωμι, 
484-515; τίθημι, 524-530; ἀφί- 
net, 531f.; δείκνυμι ahd ἀπόλ- 
λυμι, 533; ἵστημι, 539-548; 2nd 
aor.act. of yivwoKw,516f., 601; 
—conjugation of εἰμί: summar- 
ized, 602; pres. indic., 98, 134; 
imperf. indic., 133; fut. indic., 
335; pres. participle, 225, 580; 
pres. subj., 282; pres. infin., 
297; pres. imper. 423—contract 
verbs: pres. system, 317-320, 


590-592; principal parts, 321, . 


438, 448—formation of principal 
parts of various verbs: general 
remarks, 159-163; fut. stem, 
156-158, 164; aor. stem, 183; 
2nd aor. stem, 189, 25if.; 
aor. pass. stem, 204-206; perf. 
stem, 435-441; perf. middle 
system, 448f. 

Verbs, -use: summarized, 203; 
see also under individual topics. 

Vocabularies: directions for use, 
161-163, 252, 281, 322; remarks 
on vocabularies, p. ix. 

Vocative case, 37; of πατήρ, 537 
(footnote 10). 

Voice, 17, 109. 

Vowels, 3. 


White, J.W., 313 (footnote 1), p.x. 


“- < ", ᾿ “a 5 ἢ 
oo M, - τῇ Pi. ἢ 
4 ' ᾿ ΩΝ 
q 
> 
~ 
Ϊ 
- 
{ ΄ 
5 
t 
ν 
} 
i 


τῶ «σ᾽. 


GAYLORD 


DATE DUE 


#3523PI 


Printed in USA 


